Samsung 7100 Medical Alarms Programming Guide

Ed. 00

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server

Programming Guide

COPYRIGHT

This guide is proprietary to SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. and is protected by copyright.

No information contained herein may be copied, translated, transcribed or duplicated for any commercial purposes or disclosed to the third party in any form without the prior written consent of SAMSUNG Electronics Co.,

Ltd.

TRADEMARKS

is the trademark of SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.

Product names mentioned in this guide may be trademarks and/or registered trademarks of their respective companies.

This guide should be read and used as a guideline for properly installing and operating the product.

This guide may be changed for the system improvement, standardization and other technical reasons without prior notice.

If you need updated guides or have any questions concerning the contents of the guides, contact our Document Center at the following address or Web site:

Address: Document Center 18th Floor IT Center. Dong-Suwon P.O. Box 105, 416, Maetan-3dong Yeongtonggu, Suwon-si, Gyeonggi-do, Korea 442-600

Homepage: http://www.samsungdocs.com

©2007 SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. All rights reserved.

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

INTRODUCTION

Purpose

This guide describes a programming method for the OfficeServ 7100 system users.

OfficeServ 7100 allows you to utilize a digital phone to simply change the system setup.

Likewise, using a phone to change the system setup is called MMC(Man Machine Communication) program. This guide describes how to program a digital phone.

Audience

This guide is intended for users who program the MMC of the OfficeServ 7100 system.

Guide Contents

This guide is composed of two Chapters and Abbreviation. Each chapter is introduced as follows:

CHAPTER 1. Overview of MMC Programming

This chapter describes things to know before starting MMC programming and about the buttons of digital phone and cautions.

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming

This chapter describes in detail how to use each MMC program. MMCs are listed in numerical order.

ABBREVIATION

Acronyms frequently used in this document are described.

Samsung Business Communications

I

Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

Conventions

The following types of paragraphs contain special information that must be carefully read and thoroughly understood. Such information may or may not be enclosed in a rectangular box, separating it from the main text, but is always preceded by an icon and/or a bold title.

WARNING

Provides information or instructions that the reader should follow in order to avoid personal injury or fatality.

CAUTION

Provides information or instructions that the reader should follow in order to avoid a service failure or damage to the system.

CHECKPOINT

Provides the operator with checkpoints for stable system operation.

NOTE

Indicates additional information as a reference.

Console Screen Output

y y

The lined box with ‘Courier New’ font will be used to distinguish between the main content and console output screen text.

‘Bold Courier New’ font will indicate the value entered by the operator on the console screen.

II



Reference Guides

The following guides are also provided with your OfficeServ 7100 system.

OfficeServ 7100 Installation Guide

Describes the installation procedures and specifications for the OfficeServ 7100 system.

OfficeServ 7100 General Description

Describes the business features available with the OfficeServ 7100 system.

WIP-5000M User Guide

This is a user’s guide for the WIP-5000M mobile telephone that is designed to use the wireless LAN provided by the OfficeServ 7100 system.

Revision History

EDITION

00

DATE OF ISSUE

02. 2007.

REMARKS

First Edition


III


This page is intentionally left blank.

IV



SAFETY CONCERNS

For product safety and correct operation, the following information must be given to the operator/user and shall be read before the installation and operation.

Symbols

Caution

Indication of a general caution

Restriction

Indication for prohibiting an action for a product

Instruction

Indication for commanding a specifically required action


V


Warning

WARNING

Caution

Caution

Before using the Auto Record feature

Before using the Auto Record feature, make sure that you are not violating any laws. Samsung is not responsible for any illegal use of this feature.

CAUTION

CALL COST(MMC 508)

Changing this value when there is a call in progress may result in an inaccurate call cost. This MPD facility requires the Meter Pulse Detection version of the trunk card.

When changing the MMC [506], [807] and [812]

MMC [506], [510], [807] and [812] should not be changed from the default levels without the assistance of the local SAMSUNG distributor.

Compliance with the National Version Standards

For the national version, OfficeServ 7100 is designed to comply with the standards of the corresponding country. Therefore, if you need to use MMC 812 (Set

Country Code), please consult your dealer for advice.


VI


TABLE OF CONTENTS

INTRODUCTION I

Purpose ...........................................................................................................................................I

Audience..........................................................................................................................................I

Guide Contents ................................................................................................................................I

Conventions ....................................................................................................................................II

Console Screen Output...................................................................................................................II

Reference Guides ..........................................................................................................................III

Revision History .............................................................................................................................III

SAFETY CONCERNS V

Symbols ......................................................................................................................................... V

Warning......................................................................................................................................... VI

Caution ......................................................................................................................................... VI

CHAPTER 1.

Overview of MMC Programming 1-1

1.1

Introduction to Programming................................................................................................... 1-1

1.2

Digital Phones ........................................................................................................................... 1-2

1.2.1

DCS Euro Phones.......................................................................................................... 1-2

1.2.2

DS/ITP-5000 Series Phones .......................................................................................... 1-3

1.3

Cautions in Programming ........................................................................................................ 1-6

1.4

Program List by User’s Level................................................................................................... 1-7

1.4.1

Station Level Programming ............................................................................................ 1-7

1.4.2

Operator Level Programming ......................................................................................... 1-8

1.5

Programming List by Name.....................................................................................................1-16

1.6

Program List by Function........................................................................................................1-23

1.6.1

Phone Function .............................................................................................................1-23

1.6.2

Networking Function .....................................................................................................1-24

1.6.3

VoIP Function................................................................................................................1-24

1.6.4

WLAN Function .............................................................................................................1-25

1.6.5

LCR Function ................................................................................................................1-25

1.6.6

Auto Attendant/Voice Mail Function...............................................................................1-26


VII


1.6.7

Diagnosis Function........................................................................................................1-27

1.6.8

Hotel Function ...............................................................................................................1-27

CHAPTER 2.

MMC Programming 2-1

2.1

Overview of Programming Procedure ..................................................................................... 2-1

2.2

Programming Procedure .......................................................................................................... 2-2

[100] STATION LOCK ................................................................................................................. 2-2

[101] CHANGE USER PASSCODE ............................................................................................ 2-4

[102] CALL FORWARD............................................................................................................... 2-5

[103] SET ANSWER MODE........................................................................................................ 2-7

[104] STATION NAME................................................................................................................. 2-9

[105] STATION SPEED DIAL.....................................................................................................2-11

[106] STATION SPEED DIAL NAME..........................................................................................2-13

[107] KEY EXTENDER ..............................................................................................................2-14

[108] STATION STATUS ............................................................................................................2-16

[109] DATE DISPLAY.................................................................................................................2-18

[110] STATION ON/OFF.............................................................................................................2-20

[111] PHONE RING TONE .........................................................................................................2-23

[112] ALARM REMINDER CLOCK.............................................................................................2-24

[113] VIEW MEMO NUMBER ....................................................................................................2-26

[114] PHONE VOLUME .............................................................................................................2-27

[115] SET PROGRAMMED MESSAGE .....................................................................................2-29

[116] ALARM AND MESSAGE ...................................................................................................2-30

[117] EDIT TEXT MESSAGE .....................................................................................................2-32

[118] CONFERENCE GROUP ...................................................................................................2-33

[119] CALLER ID DISPLAY........................................................................................................2-35

[120] LARGE LCD OPTIONS.....................................................................................................2-36

[121] PHONE LANGUAGE ........................................................................................................2-38

[122] NEWS DISPLAY SPEED ..................................................................................................2-40

[125] EXECUTIVE STATE..........................................................................................................2-41

[199] SHOW LICENSE STATUS................................................................................................2-43

[200] OPEN CUSTOMER PROGRAMMING..............................................................................2-44

[201] CHANGE CUSTOMER PASSCODE.................................................................................2-45

[202] CHANGE FEATURE PASSCODE.....................................................................................2-46

[203] ASSIGN UA DEVICE ........................................................................................................2-48

[204] COMMON BELL CONTROL .............................................................................................2-49

[205] ASSIGN LOUD BELL........................................................................................................2-50

[206] BARGE-IN TYPE ..............................................................................................................2-51

[207] ASSIGN VM/AA PORT......................................................................................................2-52

VIII

© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.


[209] ASSIGN ADD-ON MODULE .............................................................................................2-54

[210] CUSTOMER ON/OFF PER TENANT ...............................................................................2-55

[211] DOOR RING ASSIGNMENT .............................................................................................2-60

[214] DISA ALARM RINGING STATION ....................................................................................2-61

[217] TRAFFIC REPORT OPTION ............................................................................................2-62

[219] RELAY TYPE ....................................................................................................................2-64

[220] ISDN SERVICE TYPE ......................................................................................................2-65

[221] EXTENSION TYPE...........................................................................................................2-66

[222] FAX PAIR ..........................................................................................................................2-68

[224] WAKE-UP ANNOUNCEMENT ..........................................................................................2-69

[300] CUSTOMER ON/OFF PER STATION...............................................................................2-71

[301] ASSIGN STATION COS....................................................................................................2-73

[302] PICKUP GROUPS ............................................................................................................2-75

[303] ASSIGN BOSS/SECRETARY ...........................................................................................2-76

[304] ASSIGN EXTENSION/TRUNK USE .................................................................................2-77

[305] ASSIGN FORCED CODE .................................................................................................2-79

[306] HOT LINE/OFF HOOK SELECTION.................................................................................2-80

[308] ASSIGN BACKGROUND MUSIC SOURCE .....................................................................2-81

[309] ASSIGN STATION MOH SOURCE ...................................................................................2-82

[310] LCR CLASS OF SERVICE ...............................................................................................2-83

[312] ALLOW CALLER ID ..........................................................................................................2-84

[314] CONFIRM OUTGOING CALL...........................................................................................2-85

[315] CUSTOMER SET RELOCATION......................................................................................2-86

[316] COPY STATION USABLE.................................................................................................2-89

[317] ASSIGN STATION/STATION USE ....................................................................................2-90

[318] DISTINCTIVE RINGING ...................................................................................................2-91

[319] BRANCH GROUP.............................................................................................................2-93

[320] PRESET FORWARD NO ANSWER..................................................................................2-94

[323] CALLING PARTY NUMBER..............................................................................................2-96

[326] RINGBACK TONE MESSAGE..........................................................................................2-97

[401] TRUNK LINE/PBX LINE..................................................................................................2-100

[402] TRUNK DIAL TYPE.........................................................................................................2-101

[403] TRUNK TOLL CLASS .....................................................................................................2-102

[404] TRUNK NAME ................................................................................................................2-104

[405] TRUNK CO TEL NUMBER .............................................................................................2-105

[406] TRUNK RING ASSIGNMENT .........................................................................................2-106

[407] FORCED TRUNK RELEASE ..........................................................................................2-107

[408] ASSIGN TRUNK MOH SOURCE....................................................................................2-108

[409] TRUNK STATUS READ ..................................................................................................2-109

[410] ASSIGN DISA TRUNK .................................................................................................... 2-111


IX


[412] ASSIGN TRUNK SIGNAL ...............................................................................................2-112

[414] MPD/PRS SIGNAL .........................................................................................................2-113

[415] REPORT TRUNK ABANDON DATA ...............................................................................2-115

[417] E1/PRI CRC4 OPTION ...................................................................................................2-116

[418] BRI AND PRI CARD RESTART ......................................................................................2-117

[419] BRI OPTIONS.................................................................................................................2-118

[420] PRI OPTIONS.................................................................................................................2-122

[421] MSN DIGIT .....................................................................................................................2-124

[422] TRUNK COS...................................................................................................................2-125

[423] S/T MODE.......................................................................................................................2-127

[424] BRI S0 MAPPING ...........................................................................................................2-128

[425] CID TRUNKS ..................................................................................................................2-129

[426] TRUNK GAIN CONTROL ...............................................................................................2-130

[428] ASSIGN TRUNK/TRUNK USE........................................................................................2-131

[432] SET H-TRK .....................................................................................................................2-132

[433] COST RATE....................................................................................................................2-133

[434] CONNECTION STATUS .................................................................................................2-134

[436] TRUNK TMC GAIN .........................................................................................................2-137

[437] 16TRK GAIN CONTROL.................................................................................................2-138

[500] SYSTEM-WIDE COUNTERS..........................................................................................2-139

[501] SYSTEM TIMERS...........................................................................................................2-141

[502] STATION-WIDE TIMERS ................................................................................................2-147

[503] TRUNK-WIDE TIMERS...................................................................................................2-149

[504] PULSE MAKE/BREAK RATIO ........................................................................................2-152

[505] ASSIGN DATE AND TIME ..............................................................................................2-153

[506] TONE CADENCE............................................................................................................2-154

[507] ASSIGN RING PLAN TIME.............................................................................................2-156

[508] CALL COST ....................................................................................................................2-158

[510] SLI RING CADENCE ......................................................................................................2-159

[511] MSG WAITING LAMP CADENCE...................................................................................2-161

[512] HOLIDAY ASSIGNMENT ................................................................................................2-162

[513] HOTEL TIMER ................................................................................................................2-163

[514] TONE SOURCE..............................................................................................................2-164

[515] DAYLIGHT ASSIGNMENT..............................................................................................2-165

[600] ASSIGN OPERATOR GROUP........................................................................................2-166

[601] ASSIGN STATION GROUP ............................................................................................2-167

[602] STATION GROUP NAME................................................................................................2-172

[603] ASSIGN TRUNK GROUP ...............................................................................................2-173

[604] ASSIGN STATION TO PAGE ZONE ...............................................................................2-175

[605] ASSIGN EXTERNAL PAGE ZONE .................................................................................2-176

X



[606] ASSIGN SPEED BLOCK ................................................................................................2-177

[607] UCD OPTIONS ...............................................................................................................2-179

[608] ASSIGN REVIEW BLOCK ..............................................................................................2-183

[609] CALL LOG BLOCK .........................................................................................................2-184

[611] ALLOW TEXT MESSAGING ...........................................................................................2-185

[612] ALLOW GROUP CONFERENCE ...................................................................................2-186

[614] STATION/TRUNK USE GROUP .....................................................................................2-187

[615] MGI GROUP ...................................................................................................................2-188

[616] MGI USER ......................................................................................................................2-190

[700] COPY COS CONTENTS ................................................................................................2-191

[701] ASSIGN COS CONTENTS .............................................................................................2-192

[702] TOLL DENY TABLE ........................................................................................................2-196

[703] TOLL ALLOWANCE TABLE ............................................................................................2-197

[704] ASSIGN WILD CHARACTER .........................................................................................2-199

[705] ASSIGN SYSTEM SPEED DIAL.....................................................................................2-200

[706] SYSTEM SPEED DIAL BY NAME ..................................................................................2-201

[707] AUTHORIZATION CODE................................................................................................2-203

[708] ACCOUNT CODE ...........................................................................................................2-204

[709] TOLL PASS CODE/SPECIAL CODE TABLE ..................................................................2-205

[710] LCR DIGIT TABLE ..........................................................................................................2-207

[711] LCR TIME TABLE............................................................................................................2-208

[712] LCR ROUTE TABLE .......................................................................................................2-209

[713] LCR MODIFY DIGIT TABLE ...........................................................................................2-211

[714] DID NUMBER AND NAME TRANSLATION....................................................................2-213

[715] PROGRAMMED STATION MESSAGE...........................................................................2-216

[716] UK LCR OPTION ............................................................................................................2-217

[717] UCD AGENT ID ..............................................................................................................2-219

[718] MY AREA CODE.............................................................................................................2-220

[719] IDLE DISPLAY ................................................................................................................2-221

[720] COPY KEY PROGRAMMING .........................................................................................2-222

[721] SAVE STATION KEY PROGRAMMING..........................................................................2-223

[722] STATION KEY PROGRAMMING ....................................................................................2-224

[723] SYSTEM KEY PROGRAMMING ....................................................................................2-228

[724] DIAL NUMBERING PLAN...............................................................................................2-230

[725] SMDR OPTIONS ............................................................................................................2-236

[727] SYSTEM VERSION DISPLAY ........................................................................................2-239

[728] CID TRANSLATION TABLE ............................................................................................2-240

[740] STATION PAIR................................................................................................................2-241

[746] COSTING DIAL PLAN ....................................................................................................2-242

[747] RATE CALCULATION TABLE.........................................................................................2-244


XI


[750] VM CARD RESTART ......................................................................................................2-246

[751] ASSIGN MAILBOX..........................................................................................................2-248

[752] AUTO RECORD..............................................................................................................2-249

[753] WARNING DESTINATION ..............................................................................................2-251

[754] VM HALT.........................................................................................................................2-252

[755] VM ALARM .....................................................................................................................2-253

[756] ASSIGN VMMOH............................................................................................................2-254

[757] VM IN/OUT .....................................................................................................................2-255

[758] VM DAY/NIGHT ..............................................................................................................2-256

[759] CLI RINGING ..................................................................................................................2-257

[760] ITEM COST TABLE ........................................................................................................2-259

[761] TAX RATE SETUP ..........................................................................................................2-261

[762] ROOM COST RATE........................................................................................................2-263

[763] SECOND LCR ................................................................................................................2-264

[800] ENABLE TECHNICIAN PROGRAM................................................................................2-266

[801] CHANGE TECHNICIAN PASSCODE .............................................................................2-267

[802] CUSTOMER ACCESS MMC NUMBER ..........................................................................2-268

[805] TX LEVEL AND GAIN .....................................................................................................2-269

[806] CARD PRE-INSTALL ......................................................................................................2-271

[807] PHONE VOLUME CONTROL.........................................................................................2-273

[810] HALT PROCESSING ......................................................................................................2-275

[811] RESET SYSTEM.............................................................................................................2-276

[812] SET COUNTRY CODE ...................................................................................................2-277

[813] HOTEL OPERATION ......................................................................................................2-278

[815] CUSTOMER DATABASE COPY.....................................................................................2-279

[818] PROGRAM DOWNLOAD ...............................................................................................2-281

[819] MC FILE CONTROL .......................................................................................................2-282

[820] ASSIGN SYSTEM LINK ID .............................................................................................2-284

[821] ASSIGN NETWORK TRUNK ..........................................................................................2-285

[822] VIRTUAL EXTENSION TYPE .........................................................................................2-286

[823] ASSIGN NETWORK COS...............................................................................................2-288

[824] NETWORK DIAL TRANSLATION ...................................................................................2-290

[825] ASSIGN NETWORKING OPTIONS................................................................................2-292

[826] ASSIGN SYSTEM REFERENCE CLOCK.......................................................................2-294

[829] LAN PRINTER PARAMETERS.......................................................................................2-295

[830] ETHERNET PARAMETERS ...........................................................................................2-297

[831] MGI PARAMETERS........................................................................................................2-300

[832] VoIP ACCESS CODE......................................................................................................2-302

[833] VoIP IP TABLE ................................................................................................................2-304

[834] H.323 OPTIONS .............................................................................................................2-305

XII



[835] MGI DSP OPTIONS........................................................................................................2-307

[836] H.323 GK OPTIONS .......................................................................................................2-310

[837] SIP OPTIONS .................................................................................................................2-312

[839] SIP USER .......................................................................................................................2-316

[838] PRIVATE IP ADDRESSES ..............................................................................................2-317

[840] IP PHONE INFORMATION .............................................................................................2-318

[841] SYSTEM IP OPTIONS....................................................................................................2-321

[845] WLAN PARAMETERS ....................................................................................................2-325

[846] WIP INFORMATION .......................................................................................................2-330

[848] WLAN IP/MAC LIST........................................................................................................2-332

[849] WLAN CONFIGURATION...............................................................................................2-333

[850] SYSTEM RESOURCE DISPLAY ....................................................................................2-335

[851] ALARM REPORTING......................................................................................................2-336

[852] SYSTEM ALARM ASSIGNMENTS .................................................................................2-338

[853] MAINTENANCE BUSY ...................................................................................................2-345

[854] DIAGNOSTIC TIME ........................................................................................................2-347

[856] TECH PROGRAMMING LOGS ......................................................................................2-348

[857] VIRTUAL CABINET SET.................................................................................................2-349

[859] HARDWARE VERSION DISPLAY ..................................................................................2-351

[861] SYSTEM OPTIONS ........................................................................................................2-352

[863] NODE INFO ....................................................................................................................2-355

[890] INITIALIZE PORT ...........................................................................................................2-356

ABBREVIATION I

A ~ C................................................................................................................................................I

D ~ I ................................................................................................................................................II

K ~ N..............................................................................................................................................III

O ~ S............................................................................................................................................. IV

T ~ V .............................................................................................................................................. V

W ~ X............................................................................................................................................ VI


XIII


LIST OF FIGURES

Figure 1.1 24B LCD DCS Euro Phone ..................................................................................... 1-2

Figure 1.2 DS-5038S Phone .................................................................................................... 1-3

Figure 1.3 DS/ITP-5014D/5021D Phone .................................................................................. 1-4

Figure 1.4 DS-5014S/5007S Phone ......................................................................................... 1-5

LIST OF TABLES

Table 1.1 Station Level Programming list ................................................................................. 1-7

Table 1.2 System Related MMC list.......................................................................................... 1-8

Table 1.3 Station Related MMC list........................................................................................... 1-9

Table 1.4 Trunk Related MMC list........................................................................................... 1-10

Table 1.5 Timer and Tone Related MMC list ............................................................................1-11

Table 1.6 Group Related MMC list...........................................................................................1-11

Table 1.7 Tables, Codes, AA, DECT and VM MMC list........................................................... 1-12

Table 1.8 Technician Level Programming list.......................................................................... 1-14

Table 1.9 Alphabetically arranged Programming list............................................................... 1-16

Table 1.10 Phone Function Programming list ......................................................................... 1-23

Table 1.11 Networking Function Programming list.................................................................. 1-24

Table 1.12 VoIP Function Programming list............................................................................ 1-24

Table 1.13 WLAN Function Programming list ......................................................................... 1-25

Table 1.14 LCR Function Programming list ............................................................................ 1-25

Table 1.15 Auto Attendant/Voice Mail Function Programming list........................................... 1-26

Table 1.16 Diagnosis Function Programming list.................................................................... 1-27

Table 1.17 Hotel Function Programming list ........................................................................... 1-27

XIV



CHAPTER 1. Overview of MMC Programming

In this chapter, the things to know before you start MMC programming, and the phone buttons and cautions will be discussed.

1.1 Introduction to Programming

The MMC means the changes on the data that is used for the system operation program.

The MMC can be divided into programmable one and non-programmable one.

The programmable MMC is classified into 3 levels, such as technician, operator, and station level. The technician level programming and the operator level programming require a passcode for each level and the station level programming does not require a passcode.

Program List by User’s Level

For more information about the programming level, refer to ‘1.4 Program List by

User’s Level’ of this chapter.


1-1

CHAPTER 1.


1.2 Digital Phones

You need a digital display(LCD) phone in order to carry out programming. These include

DCS Euro keysets and DS/ITP 5000 Series keysets, and some examples are described in the following sections. All use special programming buttons to select options on the display screen.

1.2.1 DCS Euro Phones

Volume Control Buttons

Volume control for handset, ring, speaker, etc

Soft Buttons(3)

Used to activate features via the display

LCD

Scroll Button

Used to select start menu and scroll through display options

1-2

Programmable Buttons

With tri-coloured LEDs:

24B

= 16

12B

= 8

Memory Button

Redial Button

DND Button

Speaker Button


With red LEDs:

24B

= 8, 12B = 4, 6B = 6

Dial Button Hold Button

Recall Button

Speaker

For hands-free operation.

Used in place of handset

Transfer Button ANS/RLS Button

Microphone

Pullout Directory

Tray

Figure 1.1 24B LCD DCS Euro Phone

24B LCD

phone has 24 programmable buttons: left column is numbered 1-12 from the top; right column is numbered 13-24 from the top. Buttons 19 to 24 are special buttons ‘A–F’

used for programming.

12B LCD

phone has 12 programmable buttons numbered 1-12 from top to bottom. But-

tons 7 to 12 are special buttons ‘A–F’ used for programming.

6B LCD

phone has 6 programmable buttons: left column is numbered 1-3 from the top; right column is numbered 4-6 from the top. Buttons 1 to 3 are special buttons ‘A–C’ and

buttons 4 to 6 are special buttons ‘D–F’ used for programming.



The special buttons are referred to within the relevant MMCs. For example, button ‘A’ is used to toggle between uppercase and lowercase characters when entering text on the display.

All programmable buttons can be programmed with functions as required.

The left soft button is used to save data or to move the cursor in the LCD display to the left.

individual—stations/trunks/etc. y y y

Hold Button: Clear an entry in the display.

Volume Buttons: Scroll through display options.

Transfer Button: Enter MMC programming mode or store data and exit programming mode. y

Speaker Button: Store data and advance to next MMC.

The right soft button is used to save data or to move the cursor in the display to the right.

Other buttons also have special functions when in programming mode: y

ANS/RLS Button: Select ‘ALL’ option for making changes to all—rather than

1.2.2 DS/ITP-5000 Series Phones

These include the DS-5038S, DS/ITP-5021L, DS/ITP-5021D, DS/ITP-5014D, DS-5014S, and DS-5007S. Examples are shown in the figures below.

Speaker

A Button

Programmable Buttons(21)

Soft Buttons

Scroll Button

Telephone Status Indicator

LCD Display

Dial Buttons

Speaker Button

Hold Button

Microphone

Volume Buttons

Redial Button

Conference Button

Transfer Button

Programmable Buttons(17)

Figure 1.2 DS-5038S Phone


1-3

CHAPTER 1.


DS/ITP-5014D

(Programmable Buttons: 14)

A Button

A Button

DS-/ITP5021D


Speaker


Soft Buttons

Scroll Button

Telephone

Status Indicator

LCD Display

Volume Button

Redial Button

Conference Button

Transfer Button

Navigation Button

Speaker Button

Dial Buttons

Hold Button

Microphone

Figure 1.3 DS/ITP-5014D/5021D Phone

1-4



A Button

DS-5014S


DS-5007S


A Button


Speaker

Soft Buttons

Scroll Button

Status Indicator

LCD screen

Volume Button

Redial Button

Conference Button

Transfer Button

Dial Buttons

Speaker Button

Hold Button

Microphone

Figure 1.4 DS-5014S/5007S Phone

The DS/ITP-5000 series phones have 38, 21, 14 or 7 programmable buttons that can be programmed with functions. Also, there are several other function buttons: the dial buttons, the volume control buttons, the redial button that allows you to redial the last phone number dialled, the conference button for setting up conference calls, the transfer button used to transfer a call to another station, the hold button to hold a call, the speaker button, and the navigation buttons for easy selection of phone options and menus.

The LCD displays the station status and various other kinds of information. Using three y y y y y colors(red, green, and yellow) the station status indicator displays the current status of station.

When programming, other functions programmed on buttons are as follows: y

Volume Buttons: Scroll through items in the display. y

Redial Button: Select ‘ALL’ option for making changes to all, rather than individual, stations/trunks/etc.

Soft Buttons: Save data or move the cursor left and right.

Speaker Button: Save data and proceed to the next program.

Hold Button: Erase the previously entered item.

A Button: Select uppercase or lowercase text.

Transfer Button: Enter the programming mode.


1-5

CHAPTER 1.


Using large LCD Phones

Large LCD phones(DS/ITP-5012L) do not have programmable buttons.

Instead, they display programming functions on the LCD to be selected via the selection buttons. Refer to your keyset user guide for more information.

1.3 Cautions in Programming

y y y

Programming can be done only while the handset is placed on the phone in idle state.

Full programming can be done on any digital LCD phone.

Only station level programming is allowed on a phone that does not have an y

If the LCD displays an ‘INVALID DATA’ message while programming, reenter the y y

If no button is pressed for a certain period of time during programming

(default is 60 seconds), the phone returns to the idle state from programming mode.

Programming mode halts if the handset is picked up or the Transfer button is pressed or the phone is unplugged. Any data previously entered in the display is

saved.

1-6



1.4

Program List by User’s Level

The MMC program can be divided into programmable one and non-programmable one.

The programmable MMC is classified into 3 levels, such as technician, operator, and station level. In this section, the programmable MMC for each level will be introduced.

1.4.1 Station Level Programming

Programming can be done for only station level programs.

Table 1.1 Station Level Programming list

MMC No.

MMC: 100

MMC: 101

MMC: 102

MMC: 103

MMC: 104

MMC: 105

MMC: 106

MMC: 107

MMC: 108

MMC: 109

MMC: 110

MMC: 111

MMC: 112

MMC: 113

MMC: 114

MMC: 115

MMC: 116

MMC: 117

MMC: 118

MMC: 119

MMC: 120

MMC: 121

MMC: 122

MMC: 125

MMC: 199

MMC Name

STATION LOCK

CHANGE USER PASSCODE

CALL FORWARD

SET ANSWER MODE

STATION NAME

STATION SPEED DIAL

STATION SPEED DIAL NAME

KEY EXTENDER

STATION STATUS

DATE DISPLAY

STATION ON/OFF

PHONE RING TONE

ALARM REMINDER CLOCK

VIEW MEMO NUMBER

PHONE VOLUME

SET PROGRAMMED MESSAGE

ALARM AND MESSAGE

EDIT TEXT MESSAGE

CONFERENCE GROUP

CALLER ID DISPLAY

LARGE LCD OPTIONS

PHONE LANGUAGE

NEWS DISPLAY SPEED

EXECUTIVE STATE

SHOW LICENSE


1-7

CHAPTER 1.


1.4.2 Operator Level Programming

A technician can do programming within the range set by the MMC [802] CUSTOMER

ACCESS MMC NUMBER.

Programming is allowed for any phone within the tenant group, but it can be done for only one phone at a time.

1.4.2.1 System Related MMC

The MMC programs related to the function of the system are as follows:

Table 1.2 System Related MMC list

MMC No.

MMC: 200

MMC: 201

MMC: 202

MMC: 203

MMC: 204

MMC: 205

MMC: 206

MMC: 207

MMC: 208

MMC: 209

MMC: 210

MMC: 211

MMC: 214

MMC: 217

MMC: 219

MMC: 220

MMC: 221

MMC: 222

MMC: 224

MMC Name

OPEN CUSTOMER PROGRAMMING

CHANGE CUSTOMER PASSCODE

CHANGE FEATURE PASSCODE

ASSIGN UA DEVICE

COMMON BELL CONTROL

ASSIGN LOUD BELL

BARGE-IN TYPE

ASSIGN VM/AA PORT

ASSIGN RING TYPE

ASSIGN ADD-ON MODULE

CUSTOMER ON/OFF PER TENANT

DOOR RING ASSIGNMENT

DISA ALARM RINGING STATION

TRAFFIC REPORT OPTION

RELAY TYPE

ISDN SERVICE TYPE

EXTENSION TYPE

FAX PAIR

WAKE-UP ANNOUNCEMENT

1-8



1.4.2.2 Station Related MMC

The MMC programs related to the function of the station are as follows:

Table 1.3 Station Related MMC list

MMC No.

MMC: 310

MMC: 312

MMC: 314

MMC: 315

MMC: 316

MMC: 317

MMC: 318

MMC: 319

MMC: 320

MMC: 323

MMC: 326

MMC: 300

MMC: 301

MMC: 302

MMC: 303

MMC: 304

MMC: 305

MMC: 306

MMC: 308

MMC: 309

MMC Name

CUSTOMER ON/OFF PER STATION

ASSIGN STATION COS

PICKUP GROUPS

ASSIGN BOSS/SECRETARY

ASSIGN EXTENSION/TRUNK USE

ASSIGN FORCED CODE

HOT LINE/OFF HOOK SELECTION

ASSIGN BACKGROUND MUSIC SOURCE

ASSIGN STATION MOH SOURCE

LCR CLASS OF SERVICE

ALLOW CALLER ID

CONFIRM OUTGOING CALL

CUSTOMER SET RELOCATION

COPY STATION USABLE

ASSIGN STATION/STATION USE

DISTINCTIVE RINGING

BRANCH GROUP

PRESET FORWARD NO ANSWER

CALLING PARTY NUMBER

RBT MESSAGE


1-9

CHAPTER 1.


1.4.2.3 Trunk Related MMC

The MMC programs related to the function of the trunk are as follows:

Table 1.4 Trunk Related MMC list

MMC No.

MMC: 409

MMC: 410

MMC: 412

MMC: 414

MMC: 415

MMC: 417

MMC: 418

MMC: 419

MMC: 420

MMC: 421

MMC: 422

MMC: 400

MMC: 401

MMC: 402

MMC: 403

MMC: 404

MMC: 405

MMC: 406

MMC: 407

MMC: 408

MMC: 423

MMC: 424

MMC: 425

MMC: 426

MMC: 428

MMC: 432

MMC: 433

MMC: 434

MMC: 436

MMCL 437

MMC Name

CUSTOMER ON/OFF PER TRUNK

TRUNK LINE/PBX LINE

TRUNK DIAL TYPE

TRUNK TOLL CLASS

TRUNK NAME

TRUNK CO TEL NUMBER

TRUNK RING ASSIGNMENT

FORCED TRUNK RELEASE

ASSIGN TRUNK MOH SOURCE

TRUNK STATUS READ

ASSIGN DISA TRUNK

ASSIGN TRUNK SIGNAL

MPD/PRS SIGNAL

REPORT TRUNK ABANDON DATA

E1/PRI CRC4

BRI & PRI CARD RESTART

BRI OPTIONS

PRI OPTIONS

MSN DIGIT

TRUNK COS

S/T MODE

BRI S0 MAPPING

CID TRUNKS

TRUNK GAIN CONTROL

ASSIGN TRUNK/TRUNK USE

SET H-TRK

COST RATE

CONNECTION STATUS

TRUNK TMC GAIN

16TRK GAIN

1-10



1.4.2.4 Timer and Tone Related MMC

The MMC programs related to the function of the timer and tone are as follows:

Table 1.5 Timer and Tone Related MMC list

MMC No.

MMC: 500

MMC: 501

MMC: 502

MMC: 503

MMC: 504

MMC: 505

MMC: 506

MMC: 507

MMC: 508

MMC: 510

MMC: 511

MMC: 512

MMC: 513

MMC: 514

MMC: 515

MMC Name

SYSTEM-WIDE COUNTERS

SYSTEM TIMERS

STATION-WIDE TIMERS

TRUNK-WIDE TIMERS

PULSE MAKE/BREAK RATIO

ASSIGN DATE AND TIME

TONE CADENCE

ASSIGN RING PLAN TIME

CALL COST

SLI RING CADENCE

MSG WAITING LAMP CADENCE

HOLIDAY ASSIGNMENT

HOTEL TIMER

TONE SOURCE

DAYLIGHT ASSIGNMENT

1.4.2.5 Group Related MMC

The MMC programs related to the function of a group are as follows:

Table 1.6 Group Related MMC list

MMC No.

MMC: 600

MMC: 601

MMC: 602

MMC: 603

MMC: 604

MMC: 605

MMC: 606

MMC: 607

MMC: 608

MMC: 609

MMC: 611

MMC: 612

MMC Name

ASSIGN OPERATOR GROUP

ASSIGN STATION GROUP

STATION GROUP NAME

ASSIGN TRUNK GROUP

ASSIGN STATION TO PAGE ZONE

ASSIGN EXTERNAL PAGE ZONE

ASSIGN SPEED BLOCK

UCD OPTIONS

ASSIGN REVIEW BLOCK

CALL LOG BLOCK

ALLOW TEXT MESSAGING

ALLOW GROUP CONFERENCE


1-11

CHAPTER 1.


Table 1.6 Group Related MMC list(continued)

MMC No.

MMC: 614

MMC: 615

MMC: 616

MMC Name

STATION/TRUNK USE GROUP

MGI GROUP

MGI USER

1.4.2.6 Tables, Codes, AA, DECT and VM MMC

The MMC programs related to the function of the tables, codes, AA, DECT and VM are as follows:

Table 1.7 Tables, Codes, AA, DECT and VM MMC list

MMC No.

MMC: 700

MMC: 701

MMC: 702

MMC: 703

MMC: 704

MMC: 705

MMC: 706

MMC: 707

MMC: 708

MMC: 709

MMC: 710

MMC: 711

MMC: 712

MMC: 713

MMC: 714

MMC: 715

MMC: 716

MMC: 717

MMC: 718

MMC: 719

MMC: 720

MMC: 721

MMC: 722

MMC: 723

MMC: 724

MMC: 725

MMC Name

COPY COS CONTENTS

ASSIGN COS CONTENTS

TOLL DENY TABLE

TOLL ALLOWANCE TABLE

ASSIGN WILD CHARACTER

ASSIGN SYSTEM SPEED DIAL

SYSTEM SPEED DIAL BY NAME

AUTHORIZATION CODE

ACCOUNT CODE

TOLL PASS CODE/SPECIAL CODE TABLE

LCR DIGIT TABLE

LCR TIME TABLE

LCR ROUTE TABLE

LCR MODIFY DIGIT TABLE

DID NUMBER AND NAME TRANSLATION

PROGRAMMED STATION MESSAGE

UK LCR OPTION

UCD AGENT ID

MY AREA CODE

IDLE DISPLAY

COPY KEY PROGRAMMING

SAVE STATION KEY PROGRAMMING

STATION KEY PROGRAMMING

SYSTEM KEY PROGRAMMING

DIAL NUMBERING PLAN

SMDR OPTIONS

1-12



Table 1.7 Tables, Codes, AA, DECT and VM MMC list(continued)

MMC No.

MMC: 754

MMC: 755

MMC: 756

MMC: 757

MMC: 758

MMC: 759

MMC: 760

MMC: 761

MMC: 762

MMC: 763

MMC: 727

MMC: 728

MMC: 740

MMC: 746

MMC: 747

MMC: 750

MMC: 751

MMC: 752

MMC: 753

MMC Name

SYSTEM VERSION DISPLAY

CID TRANSLATION TABLE

STATION PAIR

COSTING DIAL PLAN

RATE CALCULATION TABLE

VM CARD RESTART

ASSIGN MAILBOX

AUTO RECORD

WARNING DESTINATION

VM HALT

VM ALARM

ASSIGN VMMOH

VM IN/OUT

VM DAY/NIGHT

CLI RINGING

ITEM COST TABLE

TAX RATE SETUP

ROOM COST RATE

SECOND LCR


1-13

CHAPTER 1.


1.4.3 Technician Level Programming

This level is allowed to program every level of program.

This level of programming can be done on every phone within the system, but it can be done for only one phone at a time.

Table 1.8 Technician Level Programming list

MMC No.

MMC: 812

MMC: 813

MMC: 815

MMC: 818

MMC: 819

MMC: 820

MMC: 821

MMC: 822

MMC: 823

MMC: 824

MMC: 825

MMC: 800

MMC: 801

MMC: 802

MMC: 804

MMC: 805

MMC: 806

MMC: 807

MMC: 810

MMC: 811

MMC: 826

MMC: 829

MMC: 830

MMC: 831

MMC: 832

MMC: 833

MMC: 834

MMC: 835

MMC: 836

MMC Name

ENABLE TECHNICIAN PROGRAM

CHANGE TECHNICIAN PASSCODE

CUSTOMER ACCESS MMC NUMBER

SYS. I/O MODE

TX LEVEL AND GAIN

CARD PRE-INSTALL

PHONE VOLUME CONTROL

HALT PROCESSING

RESET SYSTEM

SET COUNTRY CODE

HOTEL OPERATION

CUSTOMER DATABASE COPY

PROGRAM DOWNLOAD

MC FILE CONTROL

ASSIGN SYSTEM LINK ID

ASSIGN NETWORK TRUNK

VIRTUAL EXTENSION TYPE

ASSIGN NETWORK COS

NETWORK DIAL TRANSLATION

ASSIGN NETWORKING OPTIONS

ASSIGN SYSTEM REFERENCE CLOCK

LAN PRINTER PARAMETERS

ETHERNET PARAMETERS

MGI PARAMETERS

VoIP ACCESS CODE

VoIP IP TABLE

H.323 OPTIONS

MGI DSP OPTIONS

H.323 GK OPTIONS

1-14



Table 1.8 Technician Level Programming list(continued)

MMC No.

MMC Name

MMC: 850

MMC: 851

MMC: 852

MMC: 853

MMC: 854

MMC: 856

MMC: 857

MMC: 859

MMC: 861

MMC: 863

MMC: 890

MMC: 837

MMC: 838

SIP OPTIONS

PRIVATE IP ADDRESSES

MMC:

839

SIP

MMC: 840

MMC: 841

MMC: 845

MMC: 846

MMC: 848

MMC: 849

IP PHONE INFORMATION

SYSTEM IP OPTIONS

WLAN PARAMETERS

WIP INFORMATION

WLAN IP/MAC LIST

WLAN CONFIGURATION

SYSTEM RESOURCE DISPLAY

ALARM REPORTING

SYSTEM ALARM ASSIGNMENTS

MAINTENANCE BUSY

DIAGNOSTIC TIME

TECH PROGRAMMING LOGS

VIRTUAL CABINET

HARDWARE VERSION DISPLAY

SYSTEM OPTIONS

NODE INFO

INITIALIZE PORT


1-15

CHAPTER 1.


1.5 Programming List by Name

This programming list is arranged alphabetically

Table 1.9 Alphabetically arranged Programming list

MMC Name

ACCOUNT CODE

ALARM AND MESSAGE


ALARM REPORTING

ALLOW CALLER ID

ALLOW GROUP CONFERENCE

ALLOW TEXT MESSAGING

ASSIGN ADD ON MODULE



ASSIGN COS CONTENTS


ASSIGN DISA TRUNK



ASSIGN FORCED CODE

ASSIGN LOUD BELL

ASSIGN MAILBOX

ASSIGN NETWORK COS


ASSIGN NETWORKING OPTIONS

ASSIGN OPERATOR GROUP

ASSIGN REVIEW BLOCK


ASSIGN RING TYPE

ASSIGN SPEED BLOCK

ASSIGN STATION COS





MMC No.

MMC: 303

MMC: 701

MMC: 505

MMC: 410

MMC: 304

MMC: 605

MMC: 305

MMC: 205

MMC: 751

MMC: 823

MMC: 821

MMC: 708

MMC: 116

MMC: 112

MMC: 851

MMC: 312

MMC: 612

MMC: 611

MMC: 209

MMC: 308

MMC: 825

MMC: 600

MMC: 608

MMC: 507

MMC: 208

MMC: 606

MMC: 301

MMC: 601

MMC: 309

MMC: 604

MMC: 317

1-16



Table 1.9 Alphabetically arranged Programming list(continued)

MMC Name


ASSIGN SYSTEM REFERENCE CLOCK


ASSIGN TRUNK GROUP


ASSIGN TRUNK SIGNAL


ASSIGN UA DEVICE

ASSIGN VMMOH

ASSIGN VM/AA PORT


AUTHORIZATION CODE

AUTO RECORD

BARGE-IN TYPE

BRANCH GROUP


BRI OPTIONS

BSI RF CARRIER

BRI S0 MAPPING

CALL COST

CALL FORWARD

CALL LOG BLOCK

CALLER ID DISPLAY


CARD PRE-INSTALL



CHANGE TECHNICIAN PASSCODE



CID TRUNKS

CLI RINGING

COMMON BELL CONTROL

CONFERENCE GROUP

MMC No.

MMC: 319

MMC: 418

MMC: 419

MMC: 747

MMC: 424

MMC: 508

MMC: 102

MMC: 609

MMC: 119

MMC: 323

MMC: 806

MMC: 201

MMC: 202

MMC: 801

MMC: 101

MMC: 728

MMC: 425

MMC: 759

MMC: 204

MMC: 118

MMC: 820

MMC: 826

MMC: 705

MMC: 603

MMC: 408

MMC: 412

MMC: 428

MMC: 203

MMC: 756

MMC: 207

MMC: 704

MMC: 707

MMC: 752

MMC: 206


1-17

CHAPTER 1.



MMC Name

CONFIRM OUTGOING CALL

CONNECTION STATUS

COPY COS CONTENTS


COPY STATION USABLE

COST RATE

COSTING DIAL PLAN


CUSTOMER DATABASE COPY

CUSTOMER ON/OFF PER STATION

CUSTOMER ON/OFF PER TENANT


CUSTOMER SET RELOCATION

DATE DISPLAY

DAYLIGHT ASSIGNMENT

DIAGNOSTIC TIME

DIAL NUMBERING PLAN


DISA ALARM RINGING STATION

DISTINCTIVE RINGING

DOOR RING ASSIGNMENT

E1/PRI CRC4 OPTION

EDIT TEXT MESSAGE

ENABLE TECHNICIAN PROGRAM

ETHERNET PARAMETERS

EXECUTIVE STATE

EXTENSION TYPE

FAX PAIR

FORCED TRUNK RELEASE

H.323 GK OPTIONS

H.323 OPTIONS

HALT PROCESSING

MMC No.

MMC: 800

MMC: 830

MMC: 125

MMC: 221

MMC: 222

MMC: 407

MMC: 836

MMC: 834

MMC: 810

MMC: 515

MMC: 854

MMC: 724

MMC: 714

MMC: 214

MMC: 318

MMC: 211

MMC: 417

MMC: 117

MMC: 314

MMC: 434

MMC: 700

MMC: 720

MMC: 316

MMC: 433

MMC: 746

MMC: 802

MMC: 815

MMC: 300

MMC: 210

MMC: 400

MMC: 315

MMC: 109

1-18




MMC Name

HARDWARE VERSION DISPLAY

HOLIDAY ASSIGNMENT


HOTEL OPERATION

HOTEL TIMER

IDLE DISPLAY

INITIALIZE PORT


ISDN SERVICE TYPE

ITEM COST TABLE

KEY EXTENDER

LAN PRINTER PARAMETERS

LARGE LCD OPTIONS


LCR DIGIT TABLE


LCR ROUTE TABLE

LCR TIME TABLE

MAINTENANCE BUSY

MGI DSP OPTIONS

MGI GROUP

MGI PARAMETERS

MGI USER

MPD/PRS SIGNAL

MSG WAITING LAMP CADENCE

MSN DIGIT

MY AREA CODE


NEWS DISPLAY SPEED

NODE INFO

OPEN CUSTOMER PROGRAMMING

PHONE LANGUAGE

PHONE RING TONE

PHONE VOLUME

PHONE VOLUME CONTROL

MMC No.

MMC: 710

MMC: 713

MMC: 712

MMC: 711

MMC: 853

MMC: 835

MMC: 615

MMC: 831

MMC: 616

MMC: 414

MMC: 511

MMC: 421

MMC: 718

MMC: 824

MMC: 122

MMC: 863

MMC: 200

MMC: 121

MMC: 111

MMC: 114

MMC: 807

MMC: 859

MMC: 512

MMC: 306

MMC: 813

MMC: 513

MMC: 719

MMC: 890

MMC: 840

MMC: 220

MMC: 760

MMC: 107

MMC: 829

MMC: 120

MMC: 310


1-19

CHAPTER 1.



MMC Name

PICKUP GROUPS

PRESET FORWARD NO ANSWER

PRI OPTIONS


PROGRAM DOWNLOAD


PULSE MAKE/BREAK RATIO


RBT MESSAGE

RELAY TYPE

REPORT TRUNK ABANDON DATA

RESET SYSTEM

ROOM COST RATE

S/T MODE


SECOND LCR

SET ANSWER MODE

SET COUNTRY CODE

SET H-TRK


SHOW LICENSE

SIP OPTIONS

SIP USER

SLI RING CADENCE

MC FILE CONTROL

SMDR OPTIONS

STATION GROUP NAME


STATION LOCK

STATION NAME

STATION ON/OFF

STATION PAIR

STATION SPEED DIAL


STATION STATUS


MMC No.

MMC: 721

MMC: 763

MMC: 103

MMC: 812

MMC: 432

MMC: 115

MMC: 199

MMC: 837

MMC: 839

MMC: 510

MMC: 819

MMC: 725

MMC: 602

MMC: 722

MMC: 100

MMC: 104

MMC: 302

MMC: 320

MMC: 420

MMC: 838

MMC: 818

MMC: 715

MMC: 504

MMC: 747

MMC: 326

MMC: 219

MMC: 415

MMC: 811

MMC: 762

MMC: 423

MMC: 110

MMC: 740

MMC: 105

MMC: 106

MMC: 108

MMC: 614

1-20




MMC Name

STATION-WIDE TIMERS



SYSTEM SIO MODE

SYSTEM IP OPTIONS

SYSTEM OPTIONS

SYSTEM RESOURCE DISPLAY


SYSTEM TIMERS

SYSTEM VERSION DISPLAY

SYSTEM-WIDE COUNTERS

TAX RATE SETUP

TECH PROGRAMMING LOGS


TOLL DENY TABLE

TOLL PASS CODE/SPECIAL CODE TABLE

TONE CADENCE

TONE SOURCE


TRUNK CO TEL NUMBER

TRUNK COS

TRUNK DIAL TYPE

TRUNK GAIN CONTROL

TRUNK LINE/PBX LINE

TRUNK NAME


TRUNK STATUS READ

TRUNK TMC GAIN

TRUNK TOLL CLASS

TRUNK-WIDE TIMERS

TX LEVEL AND GAIN

UCD AGENT ID

UCD OPTIONS

UK LCR OPTION

VIEW MEMO NUMBER

MMC No.

MMC: 702

MMC: 709

MMC: 506

MMC: 514

MMC: 217

MMC: 405

MMC: 422

MMC: 402

MMC: 426

MMC: 401

MMC: 404

MMC: 406

MMC: 409

MMC: 436

MMC: 403

MMC: 503

MMC: 805

MMC: 717

MMC: 607

MMC: 716

MMC: 113

MMC: 502

MMC: 852

MMC: 723

MMC: 804

MMC: 841

MMC: 861

MMC: 850

MMC: 706

MMC: 501

MMC: 727

MMC: 500

MMC: 761

MMC: 856

MMC: 703


1-21

CHAPTER 1.



MMC Name

VIRTUAL EXTENSION TYPE

VM ALARM

VM CARD RESTART

VM DAY/NIGHT

VM HALT

VM IN/OUT

VoIP ACCESS CODE

VoIP IP TABLE

WAKE-UP ANNOUNCEMENT

WARNING DESTINATION

WIP INFORMATION

WLAN CONFIGURATION

WLAN IP/MAC LIST

WLAN PARAMETERS

16TRK GAIN

MMC No.

MMC: 822

MMC: 755

MMC: 750

MMC: 758

MMC: 754

MMC: 757

MMC: 832

MMC: 833

MMC: 224

MMC: 753

MMC: 846

MMC: 849

MMC: 848

MMC: 845

MMC: 437

1-22



1.6 Program List by Function

This section describes MMC programs are classified by the function of the OfficeServ

7100.

The MMC programs related to the function of a phone that is connected with the Office-

Serv 7100 are as follows:

Table 1.10 Phone Function Programming list

MMC Program No.

MMC: 100

MMC: 101

MMC: 102

MMC: 103

MMC: 104

MMC: 105

MMC: 106

MMC: 107

MMC: 108

MMC: 109

MMC: 110

MMC: 111

MMC: 112

MMC: 114

MMC: 115

MMC: 116

MMC: 119

Program Description

STATION LOCK


CALL FORWARD

SET ANSWER MODE

STATION NAME

STATION SPEED DIAL


KEY EXTENDER

STATION STATUS

DATE DISPLAY

STATION ON/OFF

PHONE RING TONE


PHONE VOLUME


ALARM AND MESSAGE

CALLER ID DISPLAY


1-23

CHAPTER 1.


The MMC programs related to the function of networking are as follows:

Table 1.11 Networking Function Programming list

MMC Program No.

MMC: 820

MMC: 821

MMC: 822

MMC: 823

MMC: 824

MMC: 825

MMC: 829

MMC: 830

MMC: 837

MMC: 840

MMC: 841




SET VIRTUAL EXTENSION TYPE

ASSIGN NETWORK COS


ASSIGN NETWORKING OPTION

LAN PRINTER PARAMETER

ETHERNET PARAMETERS

SIP OPTIONS

IP PHONE INFORMATIONES

SYSTEM IP OPTIONS

The MMC programs related to the function of VoIP(Voice over Internet Protocol) are as follows:

Table 1.12 VoIP Function Programming list

MMC Program No.

MMC: 831

MMC: 832

MMC: 833

MMC: 834


MGI PARAMETERS

VOIP ACCESS CODE

VoIP IP TABLE

H.323 OPTIONS

1-24



Table 1.12 VoIP Function Programming list(continued)

MMC Program No.

MMC: 835

MMC: 836


MGI DSP OPTIONS

H.323 GK OPTIONS

The MMC programs related to the function of WLAN(Wireless Local Area Network) are as follows:

Table 1.13 WLAN Function Programming list

MMC Program No.

MMC: 845

MMC: 846

MMC: 848

MMC: 849

1.6.5 LCR Function


WLAN PARAMETER

WIP INFORMATION

WLAN IP/MAC LIST

WLAN CONFIGURATION

The MMC programs related to the function of LCR(Least Cost Routing) are as follows:

Table 1.14 LCR Function Programming list

MMC Program No.

MMC: 710

MMC: 711

MMC: 712

MMC: 713

MMC: 763


LCR DIGIT TABLE

LCR TIME TABLE

LCR ROUTE TABLE


SECOND LCR


1-25

CHAPTER 1.


1.6.6 Auto Attendant/Voice Mail Function

The MMC programs related to the function of AA(Auto Attendant) or VM(Voice Mail) are as follows:

Table 1.15 Auto Attendant/Voice Mail Function Programming list

MMC Program No.

MMC: 207

MMC: 215

MMC: 216

MMC: 730

MMC: 731

MMC: 732

MMC: 733

MMC: 735

MMC: 736

MMC: 739

MMC: 750

MMC: 751

MMC: 752

MMC: 753

MMC: 754

MMC: 755

MMC: 756

MMC: 757

MMC: 758


ASSIGN VM/AA PORT

VOICE DIALLER OPTIONS

VOICE DIALLER ASSIGNMENTS

AA RECORD GAIN

AA RAM CLEAR

AA TRANSLATION TABLE

AA PLAN TABLE

AA USE TABLE

AUTO ATTENDANT MESSAGE MATCH

ASSIGN AA MOH

VM CARD RESTART

ASSIGN MAILBOX

AUTO RECORD

WARNING DESTINATION

VM HALT

VM ALARM

ASSIGN VM MOH

VM IN/OUT

VM DAY/NIGHT

1-26



The MMC programs related to the function of diagnosing the system are as follows:

Table 1.16 Diagnosis Function Programming list

MMC Program No.

MMC: 434

MMC: 851

MMC: 852

MMC: 853

MMC: 854

MMC: 890


CONNECTION STATUS

ALARM REPORTING


MAINTENANCE BUSY

DIAGNOSTIC TIME

INITIALIZE PORT

The MMC programs related to the function of a hotel are as follows:

Table 1.17 Hotel Function Programming list

MMC Program No.

MMC: 221

MMC: 222

MMC: 433

MMC: 513

MMC: 748

MMC: 749

MMC: 760

MMC: 761

MMC: 762



EXTENSION TYPE

COST RATE

HOTEL TIMER

COSTING DIAL PLAN


ITEM COST TABLE

TAX RATE SETUP

ROOM COST RATE


1-27


CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming

This chapter describes how to use each MMC program as it was listed.

2.1 Overview of Programming Procedure

The order of programming will be discussed before explaining programming method of each list. Please read the description carefully before programming.

The programming order is as follows:

1) Make the programmable state. y

Press the Transfer button at pause. y

Enter the program number, either 200 or 800. y

Enter either the operator passcode or the technician passcode. y

Press 1 dial button to ‘enable’ the programming mode. y

In case of Program 800 Technician Program Mode Setting, enter the tenant number to be programmed.

2) Make the program number selectable state.

If the Speaker button is pressed, the program selection mode appears.

Or, if the Transfer button is pressed, the programming state ends and the pause state begin.

3) Select a program.

Enter the program number.

Or, select the program number with the Volume button and press the Speaker button.

Or, Press Transfer button in a pause state and enter the program number.

4) Start programming the corresponding program.


2-1

CHAPTER 2.


2.2 Programming Procedure

This section describes a procedure of each program. Refer to the programming procedure corresponding to the MMC.

[100] STATION LOCK

Allows the system administrator or technician to lock or unlock an individual station or all stations simultaneously. The three options are as follows:

No Type Description

0 UNLOCKED Unlocks a locked station.

1 LOCKED OUT The phone cannot make calls outside the system. It can however make and receive intercom calls and receive incoming Trunk Line calls. When in this mode the Hold button will flash slow RED.

2 LOCKED ALL The phone cannot make or receive any calls. When in this mode the

Hold button will light steady RED.

CONDITIONS

y

Check if the station lock function is disabled at ‘MMC 301 ASSIGN STATION COS’.

If so, the station cannot be locked, but a locked station can be unlocked. y

A station can be locked or unlocked under any condition when the station is in Operator Level Programming or Technician Level Programming.

DEFAULT DATA

ALL STATIONS UNLOCKED

2-2



ACTION DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 100.

Display shows:

2) Dial station number.(e.g., 205)

OR

Press Volume button to select station and press Right Soft button to move cursor.

OR

Select all stations.

3) Enter 0 to unlock or 1 to lock.(e.g., 1)

OR

Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to return to step 2.

4) Press Transfer button to save and exit.

OR

Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 101

MMC 301

MMC 701


ASSIGN STATION COS

ASSIGN COS CONTENTS

[201] STN LOCK

UNLOCKED

[205] STN LOCK

UNLOCKED

[ALL] STN LOCK

?

[205] STN LOCK

LOCKED OUT


2-3

CHAPTER 2.


[101] CHANGE USER PASSCODE

Allows the system administrator or technician to reset any phone’s passcode to its default value of ‘1234’. This MMC cannot display station passcodes; it can only reset them to default.

Phone users can set or change their individual passcodes. The passcode is used to lock or unlock the phone for toll restriction(call barring) override and to access the DISA feature.

CONDITIONS

y y

The passcode of a station performing Operator Level Programming or Technician

Level Programming cannot be changed while the program mode is ‘ENABLE’.

An Operator or Technician Level can only delete the passcode of a station and reset the passcode to the default value, ‘1234’, not permitting to know the passcode.

Default passcodes cannot be used for toll restriction override or for DISA access.

DEFAULT DATA

ALL STATION PASSCODES: 1234

ACTION DISPLAY


Display shows:

2) Dial phone number.(e.g., 205)

OR

Use Volume button to scroll through phone numbers and press Right Soft button to move the cursor right.

3) Press Hold button to reset passcode.


OR


[201] PASSCODE

PASSCODE:****

[205] PASSCODE

PASSCODE:****

[205] PASSCODE

PASSCODE:1234

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 100 STATION LOCK

2-4



[102] CALL FORWARD

Allows the system administrator to program the call forward destinations for other station users. This MMC also allows call forward to be set after the destination has been entered.

Allows several types of call forwarding: FORWARD ALL, FORWARD NO ANSWER,

FORWARD BUSY and FORWARD DND. There is an additional option, FORWARD

BUSY/NO ANSWER, that allows both of these options to be activated at the same time, provided that destinations have been entered for both.

No Type

CONDITIONS

y y y

When ‘FORWARD BUSY/NO ANSWER’ is selected, calls are forwarded to stations set in ‘FORWARD BUSY’ and ‘FORWARD NO ANSWER’. Thus, a destination number must be set for both ‘FORWARD BUSY’ and ‘FORWARD NO ANSWER’ before you can select the ‘FORWARD BUSY/NO ANSWER’ option.

If forwarding is set to ‘OFF’ in MMC 701, ASSIGN COS CONTENTS, call forwarding cannot be set but can be cancelled.(Default: ‘OFF’)

Both ‘FORWARD’ and ‘EXT FWD’ must be set to ‘ON’ in MMC 701, ASSIGN COS

CONTENTS in order to forward a call to an external number. If only ‘FORWARD’ is set to ‘ON’, calls can only be forwarded to internal numbers.(Default: ‘OFF’)

DEFAULT DATA

NONE


2-5

CHAPTER 2.


ACTION DISPLAY


Display shows:


OR

Press Volume button to select station and press

Right Soft button to move cursor.

3) Dial 0-5 to select forward type.

OR

Press Volume button to select forward type(e.g., 1) and press Right Soft button to move cursor.

4) Dial destination number.(e.g., 201)

OR

Press Volume button to select destination and press


5) Dial 1 for YES, 0 for NO.

OR

Press Volume button to select YES or NO and press Right Soft button to return to step 2.


OR


[201] FORWARD

0:FORWARD CANCEL

[205] FORWARD

0:FORWARD CANCEL

[205] FORWARD

1:ALL CALL:NONE

[205] FORWARD

1:ALL CALL:201

[205] FORWARD

CURRENTLY SET:YES

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 301

MMC 501

MMC 502

MMC 701

MMC 722

MMC 723

ASSIGN STATION COS

SYSTEM TIMERS

STATION-WIDE TIMERS

ASSIGN COS CONTENTS



2-6



[103] SET ANSWER MODE

Allows the system administrator to change the answer mode of any phone. Each phone can have its answer mode set to one of the following options:


0 RING MODE The phone will ring in one of eight custom ring patterns. Calls are answered by pressing the ANS/RLS or SEND button or by lifting the handset.

1 AUTO ANSWER MODE After giving a short attention tone, the phone will automatically answer calls on the speakerphone. When a Trunk line is transferred to a phone in Auto Answer, the screened portion of the call will be Auto Answered, but the phone will ring when the transfer is complete if you have not pressed the ANS/RLS or SEND button or lifted the handset.*

2 VOICE ANNOUNCE The phone will not ring. After a short attention tone, callers can make an announcement but the ANS/RLS or SEND button or handset must be used to answer calls.

To answer the C.O. call automatically

To answer the C.O. call automatically, set ‘ON’ the option ‘AUTO ANS CO’ in

MMC 110.

DEFAULT DATA

ALL PHONES: RING


2-7

CHAPTER 2.


ACTION DISPLAY


Display shows:


OR

Press Volume button to select phone and press Right Soft button to move cursor.

OR

Select all phones.

3) Dial 0, 1 or 2 to change ring mode.

OR

Press Volume button to select ring mode and press Right Soft button to return to step 2 above.


OR


[201] ANS MODE

RING MODE

[205] ANS MODE

RING MODE

[ALL] ANS MODE

?

[205] ANS MODE

VOICE ANNOUNCE

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 111 PHONE RING TONE

2-8



[104] STATION NAME

Allows the system administrator or technician to enter a name up to 11 characters to identify an individual station.

ENTERING CHARACTERS

Names are written using the keypad. Each key press selects a character. Pressing the dial pad key moves the cursor to the next position. For example, if the directory name is ‘SAM

SMITH,’ press the number ‘7’ four times to get the letter ‘S’. Now press the number ‘2’ once to get the letter ‘A’. Continue selecting characters from the table below to complete your message. Pressing ‘A’ button toggles between upper case and lower case.

When the character you want appears on the same dial pad key as the previous character, press the Volume Up button to move the cursor to the right or the Volume Down button to move the cursor to the left. A space can be entered using these keys.

COUNT 1 2 3 4

DIAL 0

DIAL 1

DIAL 2

DIAL 3

DIAL 4

DIAL 5

DIAL 6

DIAL 7

DIAL 8

DIAL 9

DIAL *

<

Space

A

D

G

J

M

P

T

W

:

B

E

>

?

H

K

N

Q

U

X

=

I

L

C

F

.

,

O

R

V

Y

[

The # button can be used for the following special characters:

#, space, &, !, :, ?, ., ,, %, $, -, <, >, /, =, [, ], @, ^, (, ), _, +, {, }, |, ; , ”, Æ, ’. \.

@

#

)

!

$

%

^

S

*

Z

]

DEFAULT DATA

NONE

5

2

3

0

1

4

5

8

9

6

7

*


2-9

CHAPTER 2.


ACTION DISPLAY


Display shows:


OR


3) Enter the station name using the procedure described above and press Right Soft button

to return to step 2.


OR


[201] STN NAME

[205] STN NAME

_

[205] STN NAME

SAM SMITH

RELATED ITEMS

NONE

2-10



[105] STATION SPEED DIAL

Allows the system administrator or technician to assign phone numbers to a station’s personal speed dial locations.

CONDITIONS

Each station may have up to 50 locations(or bins) assigned to it in MMC 606(Assign Speed

Block). The speed dial bins are numbered 00~49. Each assigned phone number consists of a trunk or trunk group access code followed by a separator and up to 24 digits to be dial.

These dial digits may consist of 0~9, * and #. If the system recognizes a valid trunk or trunk group access number, it will automatically insert the separator.

DEFAULT DATA

NONE

PROGRAM BUTTONS

B

C

D

E

F

Used to insert a flash code ‘F’

Used to insert a pause code ‘P’

Used to insert a pulse/tone conversion code ‘C’

Used to mask/unmask following digits(shows as ‘[’or ‘]’)

Used to enter name for speed dial bin(see MMC 106)

ACTION DISPLAY


Display shows:


OR


If selected station has no speed dial bins, the display will be as shown and a new station

may be selected.

3) Dial location number.(e.g., 05)

OR

Press Volume button to select location and press Right Soft button to move cursor.

[201] SPEED DIAL

00:

[205] SPEED DIAL

00:

[205] SPEED DIAL

SPDBLK NOT EXIST

[205] SPEED DIAL

05:_


2-11

CHAPTER 2.


4) Enter trunk access code(e.g., 9) followed by the number to be dialed.(e.g., 4264100)

OR

Press Right Soft button to return to step 2.

OR

Press Left Soft button to return to step 3.

Press Hold button to clear an entry.

If an error is made, use VOLUME DOWN arrow to step back.

5) Press ‘F’ button to access MMC 106(Station Speed

Dial Name) to enter a name for speed dial.

OR

Press Transfer button to save and exit.

OR


RELATED ITEMS

MMC 106

MMC 606


ASSIGN SPEED BLOCK

[205] SPEED DIAL

05:9-4264100_

2-12



[106] STATION SPEED DIAL NAME

Allows a name up to 11 characters to be entered for each personal speed dial location. This allows speed dial numbers to be selected by name when the directory dial feature is used.


Refer to ‘ENTERING CHARACTERS’ in MMC 104, STATION NAME.

DEFAULT DATA

NONE

ACTION DISPLAY


Display shows:


OR



If selected station has no speed dial bins, the display will be as shown and a new station may be selected.

3) Dial speed dial location.(e.g., 01)

OR

Press Volume button to scroll through location numbers and press Right Soft button to move cursor.

4) Enter the location name using the procedure described above and press Right Soft button to

return to step 2.


OR


[201] SPEED NAME

00:

[205] SPEED NAME

00:

[305] SPEED NAME

SPDBLK NOT EXIST

[205] SPEED NAME

01:_

[205] SPEED NAME

01:SAM SMITH

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 105

MMC 606

STATION SPEED DIAL

ASSIGN SPEED BLOCK


2-13

CHAPTER 2.


[107] KEY EXTENDER

Use this program to view the programmable buttons assigned to stations. In addition, it allows the system administrator to assign key extenders to some keys to make a general access feature key more specific. The feature keys that can have extenders are listed below.

Key Feature Extender

AB Absence

ACC Account code bin

BOSS

CR

CS

DIR

DP

DS

Boss and Secretary

VM Call Record

UCD Call Status

Directory dial by name type

Direct Pickup

Direct Station Select

000-999

1-4

Mailbox number

UCD group number

1-3

Extension or station group number

Station number

0-7

IG

MMPG

MW

MS

In/Out of Group

Meet Me Page

Message Waiting

Manual Signalling

PAGE Page

PMSG

RSV

SG

SP

SPD

VG

VM

VT

UCD Supervisor

Speed Dial

SVM-800 Group Message

VM Memo

Voice Transfer

01-99

Station group number

0-9, *



Programmed Station Messaging

0-9

01-20

1-6

Room Status View(Hotel Application only) 1-5

Station Group Station group number

UCD group number

Personal: 00-49

System: 500-999



VM group number

DEFAULT DATA

NONE

2-14



ACTION DISPLAY


Display shows first station:


OR

Use Volume button to scroll through station numbers and press Right Soft button to move the cursor.

3) Enter key number.(e.g., 18)

OR

Use Volume button to scroll through keys and use Right Soft button to move the cursor.

OR

Press the key to be programmed.

4) Dial extender according to above table.

System will return to step 3.

5) Press Left Soft button to return to step 2.

OR


OR


[201] EXT (MAST)

01:CALL1

Æ

[205] EXT (MAST)

01:CALL1

Æ

[205] EXT (MAST)

18:DS

Æ

[205] EXT (MAST)

18: DS

Æ DS_

[205] EXT (MAST)

18: DS

Æ DS207

When using the Right Soft button

When the Right Soft button will not move the cursor to the right, you are attempting to add an extender to a key that cannot have one.

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 720

MMC 721

MMC 722

MMC 723

MMC 724





DIAL NUMBERING PLAN


2-15

CHAPTER 2.


[108] STATION STATUS

This is a READ-ONLY MMC. Displays the following attributes of a station port.

No Status Description

Cabinet(1)/Slot(MP,1,2)/Port(1-12)

1 TYPE

2 PICKUP GROUP

5

6

3 SGR

4 BOSS-SECR

PAGE

COS 1, COS 2

None, 01-99

None, Page Zone(0-4, * )

COS(1-30) per Ring Plan(01-06)

DEFAULT DATA

PORT #: FOLLOWS HARDWARE POSITION

TYPE: DEPENDENT ON CONNECTED PHONE

PICKUP GRP: NONE

SGR: NONE

BOSS-SECR: NONE

PAGE ZONE: NONE

COS NUMBER: 01 IN ALL RING PLANS

ACTION DISPLAY




OR


3) Dial 0~9 to select station status type.

OR

Press Volume button to select status and press Right Soft button to return to step 2.


OR


[201] STN STATUS

PORT:C1S1 -P01

[205] STN STATUS

PORT:C1 S1 -P05

[205] STN STATUS

PICKUP GROUP:01

2-16



RELATED ITEMS

MMC 301

MMC 302

MMC 303

MMC 601

MMC 604

ASSIGN STATION COS

PICKUP GROUPS





2-17

CHAPTER 2.


[109] DATE DISPLAY

Allows the system administrator or technician to select the date and time display mode on a per-station basis or system-wide.

No

0

1

2

Mode

COUNTRY

CLOCK

DISPLAY

Description

Sets overall display format and has two options:

0 = ORIENTAL

1 = WESTERN

MM/DD DAY HH:MM

DAY DD MON HH:MM

Sets format of clock display and has two options:

0 = 12 HOUR Displays 1 P.M. as 01:00

1 = 24 HOUR Displays 1 P.M. as 13:00

Sets format of DAY and MON display and has two options:

0 = UPPER CASE Displays Friday as ‘FRI’ and March as ‘MAR’.

1 = LOWER CASE Displays Friday as ‘Fri’ and March as ‘Mar’.

CONDITIONS

NONE

DEFAULT DATA

COUNTRY: WESTERN

CLOCK: 12 HOUR

DISPLAY: LOWER CASE

ACTION DISPLAY


Display shows:


OR



OR


3) Dial 0~2 to select mode.

OR

Press Volume button to scroll through modes and press Right Soft button to move cursor.

4) Press Volume button to scroll through formats and press Right Soft button to return to step 2.

[201] DAY FORMAT

COUNTRY:WESTERN

[205] DAY FORMAT

COUNTRY:WESTERN

[ALL] DAY FORMAT

COUNTRY:?

[205] DAY FORMAT

COUNTRY:ORIENTAL

2-18



OR


RELATED ITEMS

MMC 505 ASSIGN DATE AND TIME



2-19

CHAPTER 2.


[110] STATION ON/OFF

Allows the system administrator to set any of the phone features listed below.

No Feature

00 AUTO HOLD

01 AUTO TIMER

Default

OFF

ON

02 HEADSET USE OFF

03 HOT KEYPAD

04 KEY TONE

05 PAGE REJOIN

06 RING PREF.

07 CALL COST

ON

ON

ON

ON

OFF

08 AUTO CAMPON OFF

09 AME BGM OFF

10 AME PASSCODE OFF

11 DISP SPDNAME OFF

12 CID REVW ALL ON

13 SECURE OHVA ON

Description

Automatically places an existing Trunk Line call on hold if a CALL key, trunk key or trunk route key is pressed during that call.

Automatically starts the stopwatch timer during a Trunk

Line call.

When ON, this feature disables the hook switch allowing a headset user to answer all calls by pressing the

ANS/RLS button or SEND and END buttons.

When ON, this feature allows you to dial directory numbers without having to first lift the handset or press the

Speaker button.

Allows you to hear a slight tone when pressing buttons on phone.

Allows you to hear the remaining part of page announcements if phone becomes free during a page.

When OFF, requires you to press the fast flashing button to answer a ringing call after lifting the handset.

When ON, the cost of the call in progress will show in the upper right corner of the phone display instead of duration of the call.

When ON, phone users can allow intercom calls to camp-on to other phones without having to press a

CAMP-ON key.

This feature selects whether a station using Answer Machine Emulation will hear their personal greeting or BGM while callers are listening to the personal greeting.

A BGM source must be selected for this to work.

When ON, station users who have AME set must enter their station password to listen to messages being left.

When ON, the speed dial name associated with a speed dial number is displayed on a phone equipped a LCD display when using speed dial.

When ON, saves information on all calls that ring at an extension, When OFF, saves information only on calls that were not answered at the extension or were answered by voice mail.

When ON, OHVA announcements will be heard on the handset. When OFF, OHVA announcements will be heard over the phone speaker.

2-20



(continued)

No Feature Default

14 NOT CONT.CID ON

15 AUTO ANS CO OFF

16 ENBLOCK 2LCD OFF

Description

When OFF, the Caller ID will be displayed for the duration of the call. When ON, displays timer for duration of call(if AUTO TIMER also set on).

When ON, keyset will automatically answer outside calls through the speakerphone. For this to work, the keyset must be set to Auto Answer mode in MMC 103. Calls to groups cannot be auto-answered.

Enables Enbloc dialling for 2-Line LCD phones.This option only works when 2 LINE ENBLOCK option is enabled in MMC 861.

When ON, no tones will be heard when phone rings. 17 STN NO RING

DEFAULT DATA

OFF

SEE DESCRIPTION

SOME OPTIONS DEPEND ON COUNTRY

ACTION DISPLAY


Display shows:

2) Dial the station number.(e.g., 205)

OR

Press Volume button to select station and press the Right Soft button to move the cursor.

OR


3) Dial option number from above list.(e.g., 03)

OR

Press Volume button to select option and press the Right Soft button to move the cursor.

4) Dial 1 for ON or 0 for OFF.

OR

Press Volume button to select ON or OFF.

Press Left or Right Soft button to return to step 2.

OR


OR


[201] STN ON/OFF

AUTO HOLD :OFF

[205] STN ON/OFF

AUTO HOLD :OFF

[205] STN ON/OFF

HOT KEYPAD :ON

[201] STN ON/OFF

HOT KEYPAD :OFF


2-21

CHAPTER 2.


RELATED ITEMS

MMC 301

MMC 701

ASSIGN STATION COS

ASSIGN COS CONTENTS

2-22



[111] PHONE RING TONE

Allows the system administrator or technician to select the ring tone heard at each phone.

Eight ring tones are available. A short tone burst of the selection will be heard when the dial keypad is pressed.

DEFAULT DATA

FREQUENCY: 5

ACTION DISPLAY


Display shows:


OR


OR


3) Dial 1~8 to select ring tone.

OR

Press Volume button to select ring tone and press Right Soft button to move cursor.


OR


[201] RING TONE

SELECTION 5

[205] RING TONE

SELECTION 5

[ALL] RING TONE

SELECTION ?

[205] RING TONE

SELECTION 5

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 114

MMC 318

PHONE VOLUME

DISTINCTIVE RINGING


2-23

CHAPTER 2.


[112] ALARM REMINDER CLOCK

Allows the system administrator or technician to set or change the alarm clock/appointment reminder feature for any station. Three alarms may be set for each station and each alarm may be defined as a one-time or TODAY alarm, or as a DAILY alarm. The TODAY alarm is automatically cancelled after it rings, while the DAILY alarm rings every day at the same time. Alarm numbers are 1, 2 and 3. In the case of Station Pair assignments(MMC 740) the alarm only rings the station that is programmed and does not ring the paired station.

Description No Type

0 NOTSET

1 TODAY

2 DAILY

Alarm once only

Alarm daily at set time

DEFAULT DATA

ALARMS ARE NOTSET

ACTION DISPLAY


Display shows:


OR

Press Volume button to select station and press Right Soft button.

3) Dial 1~3 to select alarm.(e.g., 1)

OR

Press Volume button to select alarm and press Right Soft button.

4) Enter alarm time in 24-hour clock format.

(e.g., 1300 for 1pm)

5) Dial entry from above list for alarm type.(e.g., 2)

OR

Press Volume button to select alarm type and press

Right Soft button to move cursor and return to step 2.


OR

Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

[201] ALM CLK(1)

HHMM:

ÆNOTSET

[205] ALM CLK(1)

HHMM:

ÆNOTSET

[205] ALM CLK(1)

HHMM:

ÆNOTSET

[205] ALM CLK(1)

HHMM:1300

ÆNOTSET

[205] ALM CLK(1)

HHMM:1300

ÆDAILY

2-24


RELATED ITEMS

MMC 116 ALARM AND MESSAGE



2-25

CHAPTER 2.


[113] VIEW MEMO NUMBER

Allows a station user the ability to view a memo left by the user. A memo can be left by entering it via the dial keypad using the table below. A memo of up to and including 13 characters can be entered.

ENTER CHARACTERS


DEFAULT DATA

NONE

ACTION DISPLAY


Display shows:

2) Dial the keyset number.(e.g., 205)

OR

Press VOLUME keys to select station and press RIGHT soft key to move cursor.

[201] VIEW MEMO

1:

[205] VIEW MEMO

1:

[205] VIEW MEMO

OR

Press VOLUME keys to select and press RIGHT soft key to move cursor.

4) Enter memo via dial keypad.

1:_

[205] VIEW MEMO

1:CALL TOM


OR


RELATED ITEMS

NONE

2-26



[114] PHONE VOLUME

Allows the station user or system administrator to set the ring volume, off-hook ring volume, handset receive volume, speaker volume, background music volume and page volume for any or all phones.

No

0

1

2

3

4

5

Type Description

RING VOLUME This is the volume setting for the phone ringer. There are eight volume levels: level 1 is the lowest and level 8 the highest.

OFF-RING VOL This is the volume of the alert tone that tells you there is a call camped on to your phone. There are eight volume levels: level 1 is the lowest and level 8 the highest.

HANDSET VOL This is the volume setting for conversations on the handset receiver.

There are eight volume levels: level 1 is the lowest and level 8 the highest.

SPEAKER VOL This is the receive volume setting for conversations on the speaker phone of a phone. There are 16 volume levels: level 1 is the lowest and level 16 the highest.

BGM VOLUME This is the volume you will hear background music over the phone speaker at when your phone is idle and BGM is turned on. There are

16 volume levels: level 1 is the lowest and level 16 the highest.

PAGE VOLUME This is the volume you will hear internal page over the phone speaker when your phone is idle and BGM is turned on. There are 16 volume levels: level 1 is the lowest and level 16 the highest.

DEFAULT DATA

RING VOLUME: 4

OFF-HOOK RING VOLUME: 4

HANDSET VOLUME: 4

SPEAKER VOLUME: 13

BGM VOLUME: 13

PAGE VOLUME: 13


2-27

CHAPTER 2.


ACTION DISPLAY


Display shows:


[201] STN VOLUME

RING VOLUME :4

[205] STN VOLUME

RING VOLUME :4

3) Dial volume type.(e.g., 3)

OR

Press Volume button to select volume type and press

RIGHT soft key to move cursor.

4) Press Volume button to select volume.(You will hear a brief tone for the volume you select.)


OR


[205] STN VOLUME

SPEAKER VOL :13

[205] STN VOLUME

SPEAKER VOL :08

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 111 PHONE RING TONE

2-28



[115] SET PROGRAMMED MESSAGE

Allows the system administrator to set a programmed message at any or all display phones.

There are 20 messages(01-20) available. The last five message can be modified by each phone user.

CONDITIONS

These messages are as set up in MMC 715, PROGRAMMED STATION MESSAGE.

DEFAULT DATA

NO MESSAGES SELECTED

ACTION DISPLAY


Display shows:


OR


OR


3) Dial message number.(e.g., 05)

OR

Press Volume button to select message and press Right Soft button to return to step 2.

OR

Dial 00 to cancel an existing message.


OR


[201] PGMMSG(00)

CANCEL PGM MSG

[205] PGMMSG(00)

CANCEL PGM MSG

[ALL] PGMMSG(??)

[205] PGMMSG(05)

PAGE ME

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 715

MMC 722

MMC 723





2-29

CHAPTER 2.


[116] ALARM AND MESSAGE

Allows the system administrator or technician to set or change the alarm clock/appointment reminder feature for any station. Three alarms may be set for each station and each alarm may be defined as a one-time or TODAY alarm, or as a DAILY alarm.

The TODAY alarm is automatically cancelled after it rings, while the DAILY alarm rings every day at the same time. It is also possible to set a message to display when the alarm is sounded.


0 NOTSET

1 TODAY

2 DAILY

Alarm once only

Alarm daily at set time



DEFAULT DATA

ALARMS ARE NOTSET

ACTION DISPLAY


Display shows:


OR


OR


3) Dial 1~3 to select alarm.(e.g., 2)

OR

Press Volume button to select alarm and press


4) Enter alarm time in 24-hour clock format.

(e.g., 1300 for 1pm)

Display will automatically advance to step 5.

[201] ALM REM(1)

HHMM:

ÆNOTSET

[205] ALM REM(1)

HHMM:

ÆNOTSET

[ALL] ALM REM(1)

HHMM:

ÆNOTSET

[205] ALM REM(2)

HHMM:

ÆNOTSET

[205] ALM REM(2)

HHMM:1300

ÆNOTSET

2-30



5) Dial valid entry from above list for alarm type.

(e.g., 2)

OR

Press Volume button to select alarm type and press Right Soft button to move cursor.

6) Enter message and press Right Soft button to return to step 2.


OR


RELATED ITEMS

MMC 112 ALARM REMINDER CLOCK

[205] ALM REM

HHMM:1300

ÆDAILY

[205] ALM REM

Meeting


2-31

CHAPTER 2.


[117] EDIT TEXT MESSAGE

Allows the system administrator or technician to set or change text messages for any station. One station can use up to 10 text messages.

CONDITIONS

Only stations allowed to use text messages in MMC 611 can be selected here. Large LCD phones are automatically allowed.



DEFAULT DATA

BLANK MESSAGE

ACTION DISPLAY


Display shows:


OR



3) Dial 01~10 to select message.

OR

Press Volume button to select message and press


4) Enter message and press Right Soft button to return to step 3.


OR


[201] TXTMSG(01)

Blank Message

[205] TXTMSG(01)

Blank Message

[205] TXTMSG(02)

Blank Message

[205] TXTMSG(02)

SAME TIME

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 611 ALLOW TEXT MESSAGING

2-32



[118] CONFERENCE GROUP

Allows the system administrator or technician to set conference groups for any station.

A station is allowed up to five conference groups, and each group can include 4 members

(excluding the station itself). Names can be allocated to groups.

Conference members can be other stations, station groups, and external telephone numbers.

(which must include the outgoing access code)

CONDITIONS

Only stations set to use conference groups in MMC 612 can be selected here. Large LCD phones are automatically set to use conference groups.

ENTERING CONFERENCE GROUP NAME


DEFAULT DATA

NONE

ACTION DISPLAY


Display shows:


OR



3) Dial 1~5 to select group.

OR

Press Volume button to select group and press.


4) Dial 0 to select name or dial 1~4 to select member.

OR

Press Volume button to select name or member and press Right Soft button to move cursor.

OR


[201] GRP(1)NAME

[205] GRP(1)NAME

[205] GRP(1)NAME

[205] GRP(1)MBR1

NONE


2-33

CHAPTER 2.


5) Enter conference member dial number and press Right Soft button to return to step 4.


OR


RELATED ITEMS

MMC 612 ALLOW GROUP CONFERENCE

[205] GRP(1)MBR1

9-2794296

2-34



[119] CALLER ID DISPLAY

Allows the technician to set the individual station display preference on a per-station basis.

Caller ID or CLI can be selected to either show the name, number first, or no display depending on the type of call. Caller ID or CLI displays have the following options:

No Type

0 NO DISPLAY

1 NUMBER FIRST

2 NAME FIRST

Description

No Caller ID or CLIP data will be displayed.

The Caller ID or CLIP number received from the Central Office will be displayed first.

The Caller ID or CLIP name received will be displayed first.

In the case of CLIP the number must be programmed in the

CLIP translation table(MMC 728). CLIP does not provide names.

DEFAULT DATA

NUMBER FIRST

ACTION DISPLAY



2) Enter station number.(e.g., 205)

OR

Press Volume button to select station and press Right

Soft button.

OR


3) Dial display option 0, 1 or 2.(e.g., 2)

OR

Press Volume button to select option and press

Right or Left Soft button to return to step 2.


OR


[201] CID DISP

NUMBER FIRST

[205] CID DISP

NUMBER FIRST

[ALL] CID DISP

NUMBER FIRST

[205] CID DISP

NAME FIRST

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 312

MMC 608

MMC 728

ALLOW CALLER ID

ASSIGN REVIEW BLOCK



2-35

CHAPTER 2.


[120] LARGE LCD OPTIONS

Allows the system administrator to set any of the following options for large LCD phones.

No Option

1 DS KEY DISPLAY

Description

Sets whether to display ‘CALENDAR’ or ‘INFORMATION’ on

LCD when idle.

Sets whether to display extension numbers or names for ‘DS’ keys on LCD.

Sets dial mode to ENBLOCK or OVERLAP.

SOFT MENU FIRST

If selected, features assigned to keys are displayed when

SCREEN key is pressed while on a call.

4 CALENDAR

AOM KEY FIRST

If selected, extensions assigned to keys are displayed when

SCREEN key is pressed while on a call.

Sets whether to display PREVIOUS screen or CALENDAR screen on LCD when idle.

Sets cursor position on AOM menu screen.(01~99, PREV POSI-

TION)

DEFAULT DATA

IDLE DISPLAY: CALENDAR

DS KEY DISPLAY: TEL NUMBER

DIAL MODE: ENBLOCK

ACTION DISPLAY


Display shows:


OR

Press Volume button to scroll through stations and press Right Soft button to select a station.

OR

Select all stations and press the Right Soft button.

3) Dial the option number from above list.(e.g., 1)

OR

Press Volume button to select the option and press Right Soft button to move the cursor.

[201] IDLE DISP

CALENDER

[203] IDLE DISP

CALENDER

[ALL] IDLE DISP

CALENDER

[203] DS KEY DSP

TEL NUMBER

2-36



4) Press Volume button to select display type and press Right

Soft button.


OR


[203] DS KEY DSP

EXT NAME

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 719 IDLE DISPLAY


2-37

CHAPTER 2.


[121] PHONE LANGUAGE

Allows the system administrator to assign an LCD display based on the user’s own language.

No Language

00 ENGLISH

01 GERMAN

02 PORTUGAL

03 NORSK

04 DANISH

05 DUTCH

06 ITALY

07 SPANISH

08 SWEDISH

09 SPANISH/USA

10 FRENCH/CANADA

11 FINNISH

DEFAULT DATA

ENGLISH

ACTION DISPLAY


Display shows:


OR

Press Volume button to select station and use


OR


3) Dial 00~10 for language required.

OR

Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button.


OR


[201] LANGUAGE

ENGLISH

[205] LANGUAGE

ENGLISH

[ALL] LANGUAGE

?

[205] LANGUAGE

GERMAN

2-38


RELATED ITEMS

NONE



2-39

CHAPTER 2.


[122] NEWS DISPLAY SPEED

Used to set the Smart News display speed between 0300 mS(fastest) and 1 sec(slowest).

This timer is related to the Smart News PC Application Package.

DEFAULT DATA

03(0300 mS)

ACTION DISPLAY




OR

Press Volume button to scroll through stations and press Right Soft button to select a station.

OR

[201] CALL SPEED

03

Æ

[205] CALL SPEED

03

Æ


3) Dial speed option.(03~10)


OR

Press Speaker button to save and advance to next

MMC.

[205] CALL SPEED

03

Æ04

RELATED ITEMS

NONE

2-40



[125] EXECUTIVE STATE

Allows the system administrator or technician to set an executive station’s options, as follows.

No Option Description

0 EXEC STATE

1 STATE(IN)

When working with EASYSET, the state of the executive station can be displayed.(e.g., IN A MEETING)

If EXEC STATE set to OTHERS(IN), EASYSET displays this message.

2 STATE(OUT) If EXEC STATE set to OTHERS(OUT), EASYSET displays this message.

3 ANSWER MODE Set answer mode for executive/secretary calling: Ring, Auto Answer,

Voice Announce.(Refer to MMC 103 for a description of answer modes.)

ENTER CHARACTERS


DEFAULT DATA

NONE

ACTION DISPLAY


Display shows:

2) Dial executive station number.(e.g., 205)

OR



3) Dial 0~3 to select option.(see the table above).

OR


[201] EXEC STATE

IN THE ROOM

[205] EXEC STATE

IN THE ROOM

[205] EXEC STATE

IN THE ROOM

4) Dial 0~9 to select state.(e.g., IN A MEETING)

OR



OR


MMC.

[205] EXEC STATE

IN A MEETING


2-41

CHAPTER 2.


RELATED ITEMS

NONE

2-42



[199] SHOW LICENSE STATUS

Allows the system administrator or technician to confirm the status(Valid or Invalid) of the inserted license key.

No Feature

0 MGI MAX

1 VMS MAX

2 SOFT MAX

3 SOFT USE

4 SOFT CON

5 NEWS USE

Description

The license status for MGI port

The license status for VMS port

The license status for SoftPhone max

The license status for SoftPhone use

The license status for SoftPhone connect

The license status for NEWS USE

DEFAULT DATA

INVALID

ACTION DISPLAY


2) Use Volume buttons to confirm the status of the inserted license key.

3) Press Transfer button to exit.

OR


SHOW LICENSE STS

MGI MAX: INVALID

SHOW LICENSE STS

VMS MAX: 8

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 841 SYSTEM IP OPTION


2-43

CHAPTER 2.


[200] OPEN CUSTOMER PROGRAMMING

Used to open(enable) and close(disable) customer-level programming. If programming is not opened and an attempt is made to access a system MMC, the error message [NOT

PERMIT] will be displayed. A four digits passcode is required to access this MMC. Each digit can be 0-9. When opened, this MMC enables access to all MMCs allowed in MMC

802, Customer Access MMC Number.

Description No Mode

0 DISABLE

1 ENABLE Close(disable) customer-level programming.

DEFAULT DATA

DISABLE

ACTION DISPLAY


Display shows:

Incorrect code shows.

ENABLE CUS.PROG.

PASSCODE:

ENABLE CUS.PROG.

PASSCODE:

ENABLE CUS.PROG.

DISABLE

ENABLE CUS.PROG.

PASSCODE ERROR

ENABLE CUS.PROG.

ENABLE

3) Press Volume button arrow key to select ENABLE or DISABLE and press Right Soft button.

OR

Dial 1 for ENABLE or 0 for DISABLE.

4) Press Speaker button to advance MMC entry level and press Volume button to select MMC.

OR

Enter MMC number and press Right Soft button to enter MMC.

5) Press Transfer button to exit.

201:CUS.PASSCODE

SELECT PROG. ID

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 201

MMC 501

MMC 802


SYSTEM-WIDE TIMERS


2-44



[201] CHANGE CUSTOMER PASSCODE

Used to change the passcode allowing access to MMC 200, Open Customer Programming, from its current value.

CONDITIONS

y y

The passcode is four digits long. Each digit can be 0-9.

The current(old) passcode is required for this MMC.

DEFAULT DATA

PASSCODE: 1234

ACTION DISPLAY


2) Enter new passcode via dial keypad.

(maximum four digits)

3) Verify new passcode via dial keypad.

Passcode verified.(go to step 4)

OR

Passcode failure.(return to step 2)

CUST. PASSCODE

NEW CODE:_

CUST. PASSCODE

NEW CODE:****

CUST. PASSCODE

VERIFY :****

CUST. PASSCODE

VERIFY :SUCCESS

CUST. PASSCODE

VERIFY :FAILURE


OR


RELATED ITEMS

MMC 200 OPEN CUSTOMER PROGRAMMING


2-45

CHAPTER 2.


[202] CHANGE FEATURE PASSCODE

Used to change the passcodes for the following features.

No Feature Description

0

1

RING PLAN

DISA ALARM

The passcode required to place the system in different Ring Plans(RP) or change the Ring Time Override(RTO).

The passcode required to clear a DISA ALARM generated when the number of DISA attempts are exceeded.

2

5

ALARM CLR

DELETE

The passcode required to clear an ALARM generated by the disconnection of BI-PMS SIO.(Hotel Application only)

This passcode is used to allow items to be deleted from a room bill.

(Hotel Application only)

6 WLAN REGST The passcode required to register a WIP phone.

CONDITIONS

y y

The passcode is four digits long. Each digit can be 0~9.

The current passcode is required for this MMC.

DEFAULT DATA

RING PLAN: 0000

DISA ALARM: 5678

ALARM CLR: 8765

DECT REGST: 4321

DELETE: 9999

WLAN REGST: 0000

ACTION DISPLAY


Display shows:

2) Press Volume button to make selection and press

Right Soft button to move cursor to passcode entry.

3) Enter new passcode via digits from dial keypad.

CHANGE PASSCODE

RING PLAN :0000

CHANGE PASSCODE

AA RECORD :4321

CHANGE PASSCODE

AA RECORD :9999


Continue to change other passcodes.

2-46



OR


RELATED ITEMS

MMC 410

MMC 507

ASSIGN DISA TRUNK




2-47

CHAPTER 2.


[203] ASSIGN UA DEVICE

Assigns ringing device to be accessed when a Universal Answer(UA) key is pressed or the

UA pickup code is dialled. UA assignment is made in MMC 601, Assign Station Group, for a group and then the group is entered here. The device type is automatically determined by the Directory Number(DN) entered.

Ringing Device

NONE(NO UA)

Description

No phone number

STN GROUP

RING PAGE

COMMON BELL


External speaker phone number

Common bell phone number

When setting the MMC [203]

Only one of the above options can be selected. If the ability to ring more than one item(e.g., all four external page zones) is required, a station group containing all four zone codes must be created.

DEFAULT DATA

NONE

ACTION DISPLAY


Display shows current assignment:

2) Dial DN of UA device.(e.g., 205)

OR

Use Volume buttons to scroll through available devices.


OR


ASSIGN UA PORT

NONE-NO UA

ASSIGN UA PORT

205 -STATION

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 204

MMC 601

MMC 605

COMMON BELL CONTROL



2-48



[204] COMMON BELL CONTROL

Determines whether the common bell relay contacts have an interrupted or continuous closure when activated. If interrupted is chosen, the relay follows an internal Trunk Line ring pattern of one second closed followed by three seconds open.

CONDITIONS

When the common bell is not used for night time ring, the common bell must be set to a station group so that all stations in the group ring.

DEFAULT DATA

CONTINUOUS

ACTION DISPLAY


Display shows current setting:

2) Dial common bell number.

OR

Press Volume button to make selection of common bell numbers and press Right Soft button to advance cursor.

3) Dial 0 for continuous or 1 for interrupted operation.

OR

Use Volume button to scroll through options and press Right Soft button to return to step 2.


OR


[3801]COM. BELL

CONTINUOUS

[3801]COM. BELL

CONTINUOUS

[3802]COM. BELL

INTERRUPTED

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 203

MMC 601

ASSIGN UA DEVICE



2-49

CHAPTER 2.


[205] ASSIGN LOUD BELL

Designates the station that controls the loud bell ring output of a MIS card.(Each MIS card provides one loud bell port.) The loud bell will follow the ring cadence of the designated station.

CONDITIONS

Only a station can be assigned to control the loud bell, not a station group.

DEFAULT DATA

UNASSIGNED

ACTION DISPLAY


Display shows current setting.

2) Dial loud bell number.(e.g., 3902)

OR

Use Volume button to scroll through loud bell numbers and press Right Soft button to move the cursor.


OR



OR


[3901]LOUD BELL

RING PAIR:NONE

[3902]LOUD BELL

RING PAIR:NONE

[3902]LOUD BELL

RING PAIR:201

RELATED ITEMS

NONE

2-50



[206] BARGE-IN TYPE

Sets the type of barge-in that is permitted.

No Type

0 NO BARGE-IN

1 WITH TONE

2 WITHOUT TONE

Description

Barge-in feature is unavailable regardless of a station’s barge-in status.

Barge-in will have an intrusion tone and display at the station barged-in on.

Barge-in is allowed. There is no barge-in tone or display at the station barged-in on and the barging-in station will be muted.

DEFAULT DATA

NO BARGE-IN

ACTION DISPLAY


Display shows:

2) Dial 0-2 to select barge-in type.(e.g., 2)

OR

Press Volume button to select barge-in type and press Right Soft button.


OR


BARGE IN TYPE

NO BARGE IN

BARGE IN TYPE

WITHOUT TONE

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 301

MMC 701

ASSIGN STATION COS

ASSIGN COS CONTENTS


2-51

CHAPTER 2.


[207] ASSIGN VM/AA PORT

Enables SLI ports to be designated as NORMAL or VM/AA. VM/AA ports receive digits and also receive a true disconnect signal on completion of a call. Only SLI cards, not keyset daughter-boards, support disconnect signal. Do not make VM/AA ports data; this will return them to a single line port and stop voice mail integration. VM/AA ports have the equivalent of data protect written in the program and are protected against tones.

When using the MMC [207]

This MMC is not used to assign voice mail card ports. Voice mail card ports are assigned as voice mail ports automatically when the system detects an SVM-400 or SVMi-20 card.

DEFAULT DATA

NORMAL PORT

ACTION DISPLAY


[209] VMAA PORT

NORMAL PORT


OR



3) Dial 1 or 0 to select port type.

(1:VMAA, 0:NORMAL)

OR

Press Volume button to select type and press

Right Soft button.


OR


RELATED ITEMS

[205] VMAA PORT

NORMAL PORT

[205] VMAA PORT

VMAA PORT

2-52



[208] ASSIGN RING TYPE

Allows programming of single lines to have ICM ringing, Trunk Line ringing and data secure. With the many types of external ringing devices, all configurations can be met. All devices will also have a positive disconnect signal. Do not make VM/AA ports data; this will return them to a single line port and stop voice mail integration.


0 ICM RING

1 CO RING

Follows normal SLI ring cadence.

Follows Trunk line ring cadence.

2 DATA RING Follows Trunk line ring cadence and does not support off-hook ring.

DEFAULT DATA

ICM RING

ACTION DISPLAY


Display shows:


OR



3) Dial 1, 2 or 0 to select port type.(e.g., 2)

OR

Press Volume button to select type and press

Left or Right Soft button to return to step 2 above.


OR


[209] RING TYPE

ICM RING

[205] RING TYPE

ICM RING

[205] RING TYPE

DATA RING

RELATED ITEMS

NONE


2-53

CHAPTER 2.


[209] ASSIGN ADD-ON MODULE

Designates to which phone an add-on module(AOM) is assigned. There is no limit to the number of AOMs that can be assigned in the system. A maximum of four AOMs can be assigned to a keyset.

CONDITIONS

An AOM cannot be designated as Master. If no AOM exists in the system, the ‘AOM NOT

EXIST’ message is displayed.

DEFAULT DATA

MASTER:NONE

ACTION DISPLAY


Display shows first AOM:

[301] AOM MASTER

MASTER:NONE

[301] AOM MASTER

MASTER:NONE

OR

Use Volume button to scroll through AOM numbers and use Soft buttons to move cursor.


OR

Use Volume button for selection of stations and press Right Soft button to return to step 2.


OR


[301] AOM MASTER

MASTER:201

RELATED ITEMS

NONE

2-54



[210] CUSTOMER ON/OFF PER TENANT

Allows the system administrator to set system features on a per-tenant basis. Each system option has a corresponding dialling number, as listed below. All options toggle ON/OFF.

No Option

00 DISA PSWD

01 LCR ENABLE

06 TRANSFER

MOH

Default

ON

OFF

03 PERI UCD RPT OFF

04 CID CODE INS OFF

05 DISA MOH OFF

OFF

08 DID BSY ROUT OFF

09 ALARM MOH ON

13 RECALL PIKUP OFF

Description

When ON, a caller must enter extension number and DISA password when they call a DISA trunk. When OFF, extension number and DISA password are not required and the caller has full access to all features allowed on this trunk.

This option determines whether the system will or will not route outgoing calls based on the information in the LCR routing tables

Periodic UCD Information provider. Enables UCD Statistics data on a per-UCD group basis to print out on the IO port which has been set as PERI UCD in real time(every 3~99 seconds). This allows the information to be interfaced and manipulated by an external package or third party provided software.

When ON, the system will insert the country code when receiving CID information. This feature can use the CID display callback feature.

When ON, outside parties will hear trunk MOH instead of dial tone from the time the system answers a DISA trunk until the caller dials a digit.

When ON, outside parties will hear trunk MOH instead of ringback tone from the time a transfer is completed until the call is answered by an internal party.

When ON, a DID call directed to a busy station will re-route to the destination in MMC 406 for that trunk, if CW is set to

OFF in MMC 714. If the CW option is set to ON the call will camp on. When OFF and the CW option is set to OFF, the call will re-route to the operator.

When ON, a station user answering an alarm ring will hear station MOH instead of dial tone.

When ON, a call recalling to a station can be picked up using

Direct Call Pickup, Pickup Group and My Group features.

This applies to held calls recalling and transferred calls recalling to a station.


2-55

CHAPTER 2.


(continued)

No Option Default

14 ICM EXT FWD OFF

16 DID ERR TONE OFF

18 KTS DISC ALM

19 OFF HOOK ALM OFF

20 SL SELF RING OFF

21 SGR INC BUSY OFF

24 TRANSFER

CANCEL

26 RECALL DISC

29 ARD TONE CHK ON

30 VPN ENABLE

31 IN TOLL CHK

CON

33 INCLUDE VAT

36 DSS KEY DPU

OFF

OFF

OFF

37 BEGN DGT DSP OFF

FACC

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

Description

When ON, call forward external is allowed when intercom calls are placed to a station that has Call Forward External programmed and set.

This option provides error tone when an invalid DID number is received.

When ON, generates a system alarm when a phone disconnects or connects.

When ON, generates a system alarm when a phone stays off-hook longer than this timer.

When ON, generates ring of 10 seconds when a single line phone dials itself and hangs up(self test).

When ON, generates busy tone when all station group members are busy for a group call. This does not work for station groups which have Unconditional Ring mode set.

When OFF, a single line phone can handle 2 calls simultaneously using the hook-flash to toggle between them. When

ON, a single line phone can connect to the second call, but pressing the hook-flash will not toggle between the two calls it will disconnect the second call and reconnect the single line phone to the first call.

When ON, the system disconnects a transferred call when it recalls.

When system detects CO BUSY TONE from Central Office, it returns to auto redial state.

When ON, VPN is enabled.(Australia only.)

When OFF, the system doesn’t toll restrict incoming calls.

When ON, if an outgoing call receives PROGRESS message from ISDN trunk, the call will connect without CON-

NECT message.

When ON, an ‘Inclusive VAT of’ line is printed on Hotel invoices(Hotel Application).

When ON, pressing a DS key will pick up the call at a ringing station

When ON, and an outside call is made via speed dial or LNR where more than 11 digits are dialled, then only the first 11 dialled digits are shown on the phone display.

When OFF, phone users cannot use one-touch account code(ACC) key.

2-56



(continued)


39 SGR ALL OUT OFF

40 CHAIN FWD

41 TRK MONITER

43 NTWK

AUTOTMR

44 USE EURO

COD

OFF

46 PERI UCD SIO OFF

47 AUTO

CLEANED

48 REDIAL REVW

50 ISDN KEYFAC

52 CHK SPV TRK

BUSY

ON

OFF

42 VOIP MFRALOC OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

54 ORG DIAL LOG OFF

Description

When ON, the last remaining station group member can leave a group.

If ON, an incoming call forwarded from a station to another station may then be forwarded to the mailbox of the second station, if the latter is set for ‘forward to voice mail’. If this option is OFF, the call may only be forwarded to the mailbox of the first station.

If ON, the system will monitor the trunk supervision signalling. That is, if a disconnection signal is received from the exchange, the call will be cleared and the extension will go back on hook.

If ON, this allocates a DTMF receiver for a VOIP tandem caller breaking out on another trunk group.

If OFF, the call timer in the phone display will not function if the call is from a network connection(Q-SIG).

If ON, the unit of currency shown in call displays and on

SMDR reports will be Euros(€).(This will also display on Hotel Application invoices.)

When ON, the steps verifying the staff code will be omitted in

Hotel operation.

When ON, the PERI UCD data will be sent to the SMDR IO port.

Normally, when a room is checked-out, the room status is changed to NEED CLEAN. When the option is set to ON, the room status will be changed to AVAILABLE instead.(Hotel

Application.)

When ON, the CALL LOG review will appear when the Redial or LNR button is pressed.

If ON, allows Keypad Facility messages to be sent to the exchange to invoke network features.

When ON, if trunks don’t have the supervision feature they cannot make outgoing transfers or unsupervised conferences.

When ON, and a call arrives at a busy station that is not set for forward busy, if a preset no answer destination is available the call is re-routed to that destination.

When ON, all dialled digits will be saved in the outgoing call log for Large LCD phones. When OFF, invalid dialling such as dialling of a non-existent station number will not be saved in the outgoing call log for Large LCD phones.


2-57

CHAPTER 2.


(continued)


56 VOIP REALRBT OFF

57

69

CO-CO TM ALL OFF

60 SMDR

MOH

LOG

ALL

59 NO ITEM COST OFF

AUT2ACC

64 IPNW REAL RB OFF

67 TRSF VT KEY

68 PAIR NO RING

DISA NO ACT

HOLD

71 DTMF TO S0

OFF

OFF

OFF

ON

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

72 STNHOLD

PICK

OFF

73 AREA DELETE OFF

Description

When ON, the system will connect the real path of the outgoing trunk to the incoming VoIP trunk user instead of providing virtual ringback tone.

When ON, the system trunk call will be attached timer for preven the call from locking up

In case of admin or normal station, and although cost is 0, the smdr record can be saved when this option is set.

When ON, during check-in in hotel, item code and cost don’t have to be entered. It is possible to skip.

When ON, the AUTHORIZATION CODE will be printed in

ACCOUNT field of SMDR.

When ON, the system will connect the real path of the outgoing trunk to the VoIP networking trunk user instead of providing virtual ringback tone.

When ON, an incoming trunk call is connected to MOH automatically after the DISA ANSWR timer(MMC 503) expires and the caller hears MOH. If the TRK AUTOMOH DISC timer in MMC501 expires before the call is answered, it is disconnected.(To use this feature, MMC 400 AUTO AN-

SWER option must set to ON.)

When ON, works like the VT key when the user transfers the call to Voice Mail using the TRSF key.

When ON, if a paired phone is busy the call camps on and a message waiting indication is set at the busy phone and does not ring the free paired extension.

When ON, a DISA call will go to the station assigned in MMC

406 after the DISA NO ACT timer expires.

When ON, will allow internal calls to be put on hold automatically when another call is taken.

When ON, DTMF can be sent to S0 station

The holded call can be picked up by other station.

74 ELCR DIALTON OFF

FWD

OFF

When ON, if call is created by phonebook, area code can be deleted.

In case of second lcr, dial tone can be different.

When spnet and station is seizing trk port and listening dial tone, it can be forward to external.

2-58



DEFAULT DATA

SEE DESCRIPTION


ACTION DISPLAY


Display shows:

2) Dial option number.(e.g., 00)

Press Right Soft button to move cursor.


OR


4) Repeat steps 2-3 for other options.

OR


OR


TEN. ON AND OFF

DISA PSWD :OFF

TEN. ON AND OFF

DISA PSWD :OFF

TEN. ON AND OFF

DISA PSWD :ON

RELATED ITEMS

NONE


2-59

CHAPTER 2.


[211] DOOR RING ASSIGNMENT

Designates which station or group of stations will ring when a door phone button is pressed.

If the ring plan destinations are not entered the default ring plan 1 is used. Available ring plans are 1 to 6.

DEFAULT DATA

STATION GROUP: 500

ACTION DISPLAY


Display shows first door phone:

2) Dial door phone number.(e.g., 230)

OR

Press Volume button to scroll through door phone numbers and use the Right Soft button to move cursor.

OR

Select All door ring.

3) Enter new ring plan number selection via dial keypad.

OR

Press Volume button to make selection and press

Right Soft button.

4) Press Right Soft button to return to step 2.

OR


OR


OR


[229] DOOR RING

1:500 2:500

[230] DOOR RING

1:500 2:500

[ALL] DOOR RING

1:500 2:500

[250] DOOR RING

1:301 2:500

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 601 ASSIGN STATION GROUP

2-60



[214] DISA ALARM RINGING STATION

Assigns the DISA alarm to ring at a specific phone. It is recommended that the person who can clear the alarm also receives the notification.

CONDITIONS

y y

A valid destination can be either a station group or an individual station.

The alarm ringing station or group will follow the ring plan time destination.

DEFAULT DATA

ALL RING PLANS: 500

ACTION DISPLAY


Display shows:

2) Enter valid destination number for ring plan.

(e.g., 217)

OR

Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to advance cursor.

3) Enter valid destination number for another ring plan.(e.g., 249)

OR

Press Volume button to make selection.


OR


DISA ALARM RING

1:500 2:500

DISA ALARM RING

1:217 2:500

DISA ALARM RING

1:217 2:249

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 202

MMC 601




2-61

CHAPTER 2.


[217] TRAFFIC REPORT OPTION

This MMC is used to print a traffic report and select options. The traffic report can be printed on demand, or every hour, or at a programmed time each day, or for up to three separately-timed shifts. Automatic printing will always clear the totals.

When report MANUAL PRINT OUT is selected, the options are:


0 PRINT AND CLEAR A report is printed and all totals are reset to 0.

1 PRINTOUT ONLY A report is printed and all the totals are saved.

2 CANCEL PRINTOUT Cancels printout.

When AUTO PRINT OPTN is selected, the options are:


0 AUTO PRINT OFF Automatic print feature is disabled.

1 DAILY A report is printed at a programmable time every day and all the totals are reset to ‘0’.

A report will be printed every hour. 2 EVERY HOUR

3 THREE TIME SHIFT Up to three separate Start and End times may be programmed to report traffic within different shifts. A report is printed at the end of each End time and all totals are reset to ‘0’.

When a report is printed, the totals represent call statistics accumulated from the date of the last report stated as BEGINNING: D & T up to the date of this printout stated as ENDING

D & T.

If there are no trunks in a group, the trunk group report for that group will not print.

CONDITIONS

If this function is required in an OfficeServ 7100 system with an MCP card, you must connect the LAN cable to the MCP card and be connected to a terminal supporting the TCP/IP function.

DEFAULT DATA

AUTO PRINT OFF

2-62



ACTION DISPLAY


Display shows:

2) Dial 0 for manual or 1 for automatic print.

OR

Press Volume button to select and press Right

Soft button.

3) If AUTO selected, dial 0, 1, 2 or 3 for automatic print option.

OR


Right Soft button.

4) Enter daily report time.(HHMM)


OR


TRAFFIC REPORT

MANUAL PRINTOUT

TRAFFIC REPORT

AUTO PRINT OPTN

TRAFFIC REPORT

DAILY HHMM:2359

TRAFFIC REPORT

DAILY HHMM:2200

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 829 LAN PRINTER PARAMETERS


2-63

CHAPTER 2.


[219] RELAY TYPE

Assigns the service type of three relay ports of misc card. Service consists of External Page,

Common bell , loud bell, NOT USED.

DEFAULT DATA

External Page

ACTION DISPLAY


Display shows:

2) Enter the station number.

OR


Right Soft button.

3) Select service type.(0-3)

OR


Right Soft button.


OR


RELATED ITEMS

NONE

[362] RELAY TYPE

EXTERNAL PAGE

[362] ISDN SVC

EXTERNAL PAGE

[362] RELAY TYPE

EXTERNAL PAGE

2-64



[220] ISDN SERVICE TYPE

Assigns the ISDN service type of a single line telephone port. Service consists of BC

(Bearer Capability) and HLC(High Layer Capability).

No Type

0 VOICE

1 FAX 3

2 AUDIO 3.1

3 MODEM

DEFAULT DATA

VOICE

Description

G3 FAX service

3.1 kHz Audio service

MODEM service

BC

Speech

3.1 kHz Audio

3.1 kHz Audio

3.1 kHz Audio

HLC

-

FAX G2/G3

None

Telephony

ACTION DISPLAY


Display shows:

2) Enter the station number.(e.g., 210)

OR


Right Soft button.

3) Select service type.(0-3)

OR


Right Soft button.


OR


RELATED ITEMS

NONE

[209] ISDN SVC

VOICE

[210] ISDN SVC

VOICE

[210] ISDN SVC

AUDIO 3.1


2-65

CHAPTER 2.


[221] EXTENSION TYPE

This MMC assigns station ports for a specific use. Each phone can be designated as one of five types(see table). These types can be changed by dialling the type number or by scrolling through the types and pressing the Right Soft button to select the type.


0 NORMAL STATION

1 GUEST SMOKING

2 GUEST NO SMOKING When a station is designated as this type it will appear in room status and check-in features as a non-smoking room.

3 MEETING ROOM

When a station is designated as this type it will appear in room status and check-in features as a smoking room.

Stations designated as Meeting Rooms will have the same attributes as guest rooms with regard to cleaning and occupied status but will not show up while scrolling through room status lists.

4 ADMINISTRATOR

This is the default setting. The station will operate in the normal manner associated with this type of station. Ports designated as

VMAA in MMC 207 must be designated as normal in this MMC.

5 FAX STATION

Only stations designated as administrator stations can use Hotel features.(check in, etc.)

When a station is designated as this type it can be assigned as a

‘pair’ station to a GUEST SMOKING ROOM or GUEST NO

SMOKING ROOM in MMC 222.

CONDITIONS

This MMC can be used only when the Hotel function is enabled in MMC 813, HOTEL

OPERATION.

DEFAULT DATA

NORMAL STATION

ACTION DISPLAY


Display shows:


OR



[201] PHONE USE

NORMAL STATION

[214] PHONE USE

NORMAL STATION

2-66


3) Dial 0 - 5 to select station type.

OR

Press Volume button to select option and press Right Soft button.


OR


RELATED ITEMS

MMC 813 HOTEL OPERATION


[214] PHONE USE

GUEST NO SMOKING


2-67

CHAPTER 2.


[222] FAX PAIR

Enables a guest room to have a normal phone line and fax line simultaneously. Only a

Guest No Smoking Room or Guest Smoking Room can be assigned a fax pair station which is already assigned as a fax station in MMC 221.

DEFAULT DATA

NONE

CONDITIONS

This MMC can be used only when the Hotel function is enabled in MMC 813, HOTEL

OPERATION.

This MMC can be used only when there is station that set GUEST SMOKING, GUEST NO

SMOKING in MMC 222, and if not, display ‘ROOM NOT EXIST’:

ACTION DISPLAY


Display shows:

2) Dial guest extension number.(e.g., 205)

OR


Soft button.

3) Dial fax station number.(e.g., 301)

OR


Soft button.


OR


RELATED ITEMS

MMC 221

MMC 813

EXTENSION TYPE

HOTEL OPERATION

[201] FAX PAIR

NONE

[205] FAX PAIR

NONE

[205] FAX PAIR

301

2-68



[224] WAKE-UP ANNOUNCEMENT

This MMC is an enhanced Wake Up feature. The system will play a recorded message when a Wake Up call is answered by the user. The Wake Up Announcement feature requires an SVMi-20 card to be installed in the system. When a Wake Up call is answered, the system will access the customized Wake Up message(1-48) recorded in the card. The end user can record this message and also change it if desired. The Wake Up message will have no default ROM message assigned to it; however, a ROM message(49-64) may also be assigned as the Wake Up message if desired.

This MMC has three options.

No

0

Option

AA GROUP

1

2

MESSAGE NO

GROUP BUSY

Description

Determines which AA group will be connected when a Wake Up call is answered. This destination can be any AA group.

Determines which message will be played when a Wake Up call is answered. This destination can be a custom recorded message

(1-48) or one of the pre-programmed messages(49-64).

Determines which tone source will be connected when all AA group members are busy. This destination can be NONE, TONE or external music on hold.

If NONE is set then dial tone is connected; if TONE is set then hold tone is connected.

CONDITIONS

NONE

DEFAULT DATA

AA GROUP: NONE

MESSAGE NO: NONE

GROUP BUSY: NONE

ACTION DISPLAY


Display shows:

2) Dial 0, 1 or 2 for option select.

OR


Right Soft button.

WAKE-UP ANNOUNCE

AA GROUP :NONE

WAKE-UP ANNOUNCE

AA GROUP :NONE


2-69

CHAPTER 2.


3) Enter the AA group number.

OR


Soft button to return to step 2.


OR


RELATED ITEMS

NONE

WAKE-UP ANNOUNCE

AA GROUP :520

2-70



[300] CUSTOMER ON/OFF PER STATION

Allows the following features to be enabled/disabled on a per-station basis.

No Option

01 MICROPHONE

02 OFF-HOOK RING

03 SMDR PRINT

04 TGR ADV.TONE

05 VMAA FORWARD

07 NGT PASSCODE

08 INTRCOM SMDR

09 FWD DELAY USE

11 FORWARD OVRD

12 RECL TO OPER

13 SLT LP OPEN

15 CID TO SLT

22 NO RCL FLASH

23 RBK STN NAME

Default Description

ON Determines a user can select a trunk or trunk group by dialling its Directory Number(DN). This selection should be turned off when using LCR.

ON

ON

ON

Allows phones to be used in speakerphone mode.

Will allow a short burst of ring tone to indicate another call.

ON

When the station is set for no Trunk Line calls to and from this station, the station will not print on SMDR.

This includes transferred calls or calls picked up from hold or park.

When this feature is set to ON, a warning tone will be heard each time LCR advances to the next route.

ON

ON

OFF

This feature selects whether Trunk Line calls can be forwarded to voice mail: ON, permits forward to voice mail; OFF, no forward to voice mail.

When ON, the steps verifying the ring plan passcode will be added in Ring Plan change.

When the station is set to OFF, the station will not print intercom calls on SMDR.

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

When ON, calls will overflow to the Forward No Answer destination when the Forward No Answer timer expires even when the Forward No Answer feature is not activated at the called party extension.

When set to ON and the station calls another station which has forwarding set, the call will not forward.

When the station is set to ON, if the station transfers a call and the destination doesn’t answer, the call will recall to the operator instead of the station.

When ON, SLI port receives real disconnect signal instead of busy or error tone.(VMAA or DATA ports always receive real disconnect signal.)

When a MIS card is installed and this option is set to

ON, the system will provide the CID signal to SLTs.

When the hook switch is flashed or the flash key is pressed, a recall signal will not be sent to the system.

When ringback, station name can be displayed, instead of “Ringing”


2-71

CHAPTER 2.


DEFAULT DATA

SEE DESCRIPTION


ACTION DISPLAY


Display shows:


OR

Press Volume button to select station.

OR

Select all stations and press Right Soft button to move cursor.

3) Press Volume button to select feature and press Right Soft button to move cursor.


OR

Press Volume button to select and press

Right Soft button.

5) Press Left Soft button to return to step 2.


OR


OR


[201] CUS.ON/OFF

ACCESS DIAL :ON

[205] CUS.ON/OFF

ACCESS DIAL :ON

[ALL] CUS.ON/OFF

ACCESS DIAL :ON

[ALL] CUS.ON/OFF

ACCESS DIAL :ON

[ALL] CUS.ON/OFF

ACCESS DIAL :OFF

RELATED ITEMS

LCR PROGRAMMING:

MMC 710

MMC 711

MMC 712

LCR DIGIT TABLE

LCR TIME TABLE

LCR ROUTE TABLE

2-72



[301] ASSIGN STATION COS

Used to assign a class of service to each phone. There are 30 different classes of service

(defined in MMC 701, Assign COS Contents) and six ring plans based on the Ring Plan

Time in MMC 507 that can apply to the COS. Classes of service are numbered 01-30. The default is COS 01.

DEFAULT DATA

RING PLANS 1-6: 01

ACTION DISPLAY




OR

Use Volume button to scroll through stations.

Press Right Soft button to advance step 3.

OR

Use Volume button to scroll through stations and press Left Soft button to advance to step 4.

OR


3) Enter new ring plan selection via dial keypad.

OR



4) Enter ring plan class of service.(e.g., 05)

OR

Use Volume button to scroll through classes of service and press Right Soft button to advance to the next ring plan.

OR

Use Volume button to scroll through classes of service and press Left Soft button to return to step 2.

[201] STN COS

1:01 2:01 3:01

[205] STN COS

1:01 2:01 3:01

[ALL] STN COS

1:01 2:01 3:01

[205] STN COS

1:01 2:01 3:01

[205] STN COS

1:05 2:01 3:01


2-73

CHAPTER 2.


5) Enter the next ring plan class of service.(e.g., 05)

OR

Use Volume button to scroll through classes of service and press Right Soft button to move cursor to the next ring plan.

OR

Use Volume button to scroll through classes of service and press Left Soft button to return to previous step.


OR


RELATED ITEMS

MMC 701 ASSIGN COS CONTENTS

[205] STN COS

1:05 2:01 3:01

2-74



[302] PICKUP GROUPS

Allows the assignment of stations into call pickup groups. There is a maximum of 20 pickup groups. An unlimited number of members can belong to each group. Stations can only be in one pickup group at any given time.

DEFAULT DATA

NO PICKUP GROUPS ASSIGNED

ACTION DISPLAY


Display shows:


OR

Use Volume button to select station number and press Right Soft button.

OR


3) Dial pickup group number.(e.g., 05)

OR

Press Volume button to select group number.

4) Press Right Soft button to return to step 2 to enter more stations.

OR


OR


OR


[201] PICKUP GRP

PICKUP GRP:NONE

[205] PICKUP GRP

PICKUP GRP:NONE

[ALL] PICKUP GRP

PICKUP GRP:??

[205] PICKUP GRP

PICKUP GRP:05

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 107

MMC 722

MMC 723

KEY EXTENDER




2-75

CHAPTER 2.


[303] ASSIGN BOSS/SECRETARY

Assigns BOSS phones to SECRETARY phones. One BOSS station can have up to and including four SECRETARY stations and one SECRETARY station can have up to and including four BOSS stations.

CONDITIONS

y

A dedicated BOSS button must be programmed on the SECRETARY phone(s). y y

A dedicated BOSS button must also be programmed on the BOSS phone.

A station designated as BOSS may not be assigned as a secretary of another BOSS.

DEFAULT DATA

NONE

PROGRAM BUTTONS

F BUTTON Used to toggle BOSS/SECRETARY field

ACTION DISPLAY


Display shows.

2) Dial BOSS station number.(e.g., 205)

OR


Right Soft button.

3) Dial SECRETARY number.(1, 2, 3 or 4)

OR

Press Volume button to select number and press

Right Soft button.

4) Dial SECRETARY station number.(e.g., 201)

OR

Press Volume button to select station.

Press Right Soft button to return to step 3 to enter more SECR numbers.

5) Press Left Soft button to return to step 2 and continue entries.

OR

Press Transfer button and enter to exit.

OR

Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS

BOSS STN:NONE

SECR 1:NONE

BOSS STN:205

SECR 1:NONE

BOSS STN:205

SECR 1:NONE

BOSS STN:205

SECR 1:201

BOSS STN:205

SECR 2:202

MMC 722 STATION KEY PROGRAMMING

2-76



[304] ASSIGN EXTENSION/TRUNK USE

Allows you to select which stations are allowed to make calls through C.O. lines or to answer calls for C.O. lines.(on a station and trunk use group basis)

CONDITIONS

y

Stations are set within use group numbers 001~100and trunks are set within use group numbers 101~200 in MMC 614, ASSIGN USE GROUP. y

If a station group is set to NO Dial, stations cannot place calls on that trunk group. y

If a station group is set to NO Answer, stations cannot answer incoming calls on that trunk group.

Note: MMC 406, Trunk Ring Assignment, overrides this MMC for the Answer option.

DEFAULT DATA

DIAL: YES

ANS: YES

ACTION DISPLAY


Display shows:

2) Dial the station use group number.(e.g., 005)

OR

Press Volume button to select station use group and press Right Soft button.

OR

Select all station use groups.

3) Dial the station use group number.(e.g., 101)

OR

Press Volume button to select trunk use group and press Right Soft button.

OR

Select all trunk use groups.

(001) USE (101)

DIAL:YES ANS:YES

(005) USE (101)

DIAL:YES ANS:YES

(ALL) USE (101)

DIAL:YES ANS:YES

(005) USE (101)

DIAL:YES ANS:YES

(005) USE (ALL)

DIAL:YES ANS:YES


2-77

CHAPTER 2.


4) Press Volume button to select YES/NO option.

OR

Dial 1 for YES or 0 for NO and press Right

Soft button to move cursor to ANS option.

Press Volume button to select YES/NO Option.

OR

Dial 1 for YES or 0 for NO and press Right

Soft button to return to step 2.


OR


RELATED ITEMS

MMC 316

MMC 614

COPY STATION USABLE


(005) USE (101)

DIAL:NO ANS:YES

(005) USE (101)

DIAL:NO ANS:YES

2-78



[305] ASSIGN FORCED CODE

This MMC allows one of the four options to be selected: the assignment of account codes with verification, account codes without verification and authorization codes(or none of these) on a per-station basis or on an all-station basis. The system supports 500 authorization codes and 999 account codes which may or may not require verification.

No Type

0 NONE

1 AUTHORIZE CODE

Description

2

3

ACCT VERIFIED

ACCT NO VERIFIED

Forces user to enter a valid Authorization code of four or more digits listed in the AUTHORIZATION CODE Table.(MMC

707)

Forces user to enter a valid Account code listed in the AC-

COUNT CODE Table.(MMC 708)

Forces user to enter an Account code which is not verified.

User can enter any code up to 12 digits.(including

∗ and #)

DEFAULT DATA

NONE

ACTION DISPLAY


Display shows.


OR



3) Dial a feature option 0-3.(e.g., 2)

OR


Right Soft button to return to step 2.

4) Press Transfer button and enter to exit.

OR


RELATED ITEMS

[201] FORCD CODE

NONE

[205] FORCD CODE

NONE

[205] FORCD CODE

ACCT VERIFIED

MMC 707

MMC 708

AUTHORIZATION CODE

ACCOUNT CODE


2-79

CHAPTER 2.


[306] HOT LINE/OFF HOOK SELECTION

Allows a station to make a predetermined call, similar to a ring-down circuit, upon the expiration of a timer.(see MMC 502, STATION TIMERS, Off-Hook Selection Timer)

CONDITIONS

y

The hotline destination can be a station, a station group, a trunk, a trunk group or an external number. y

There is a maximum of 18 digits in the dial string for external numbers. The access code for trunk or trunk group access(e.g., 0 or 9) is not counted as part of the 18.

DEFAULT DATA

NONE

PROGRAM BUTTONS

B

C

D

E

ACTION



Used to insert a pulse/tone conversion code ‘C’

Used to mask/unmask following digits-shows as ‘[’ or ‘]’

DISPLAY


Display shows.

2) Dial station number.

OR

Use Volume button to scroll through stations.

Press Right Soft button to move the cursor.

3) Enter the hot line destination of a station or trunk ID(e.g., 9 or 701) with a maximum of

18 outgoing digits after the access code for the CO call.(see above list of options if needed)


OR


RELATED ITEMS

MMC 502

[201] HOT LINE

NONE

[205] HOT LINE

NONE

[205] HOT LINE

9-1305P4264100_

STATION-WIDE TIMERS(OFF-HOOK SELECTION TIMER)

2-80



[308] ASSIGN BACKGROUND MUSIC SOURCE

Assigns a background music source to phones. There is one internal music source/external music source. The default directory numbers for the music sources are 371.

CONDITIONS

To use an external sound source, connect the corresponding port of the MOH source to the misc port of MP10/11 card. If ‘NONE’ is set for background music or if a sound source is not connected to the external sound source port designated as the background music source, music will not be played even if the background music function is enabled.

DEFAULT DATA

NONE

ACTION DISPLAY


Display shows current setting.


OR

Use Volume button to scroll through phone numbers and press Right Soft button to move the cursor.

OR


3) Enter source number.(e.g.,371)

OR



OR


[201] BGM SOURCE

BGM SOURCE:NONE

[205] BGM SOURCE

BGM SOURCE:NONE

[ALL] BGM SOURCE

BGM SOURCE:?

[205] BGM SOURCE

BGM SOURCE: 371

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 309

MMC 408




2-81

CHAPTER 2.


[309] ASSIGN STATION MOH SOURCE

Assigns a Music On Hold source to phones. There is one internal music source/external music source.

The default directory numbers for the music sources is 371.

CONDITIONS

To use an external sound source, connect the corresponding port of the MOH source to the external sound source of MISC port of MP10/11 card.

DEFAULT DATA

TONE

ACTION DISPLAY


Display shows current setting:


OR

Use Volume button to scroll through phone numbers and press Right Soft button to move the cursor.

OR

Press ANS/RLS button to select all stations.

3) Enter source number.(e.g., 371)

OR



OR


[201] STN MOH

MOH SOURCE:NONE

[205] STN MOH

MOH SOURCE:NONE

[ALL] STN MOH

MOH SOURCE:?

[205] STN MOH

MOH SOURCE:371

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 308

MMC 408



2-82



[310] LCR CLASS OF SERVICE

Assigns the LCR class of service allowed on a per-station/per-trunk basis. There are eight classes which may be assigned. LCR class of service allows specific users to ‘trunk advance’ up to a matching LCR class of service programmed in MMC 712.

DEFAULT DATA

LEAST COST ROUTING COS: 1

ACTION DISPLAY


Display shows:

2) Dial station/trunk number.(e.g., 205)

OR


OR


3) Dial 1-8 to select class type.(e.g., 3)

OR

Press Volume button to select class type and press Right Soft button to return to step 2.


OR


[201] LCR CLASS

LCR CLASS 1

[205] LCR CLASS

LCR CLASS 1

[ALL] LCR CLASS

LCR CLASS ?

[205] LCR CLASS

LCR CLASS 3

RELATED ITEMS

LCR PROGRAMMING:

MMC 710

MMC 711

MMC 712

MMC 713

LCR DIGIT TABLE

LCR TIME TABLE

LCR ROUTE TABLE



2-83

CHAPTER 2.


[312] ALLOW CALLER ID

Allows the system administrator or technician to allow or deny CID data to be sent from, or displayed at, LCD phones.

Option Description

RCV

SND

DEFAULT DATA

Set whether to display CID.

Set whether to send CID for ISDN calls.

RCV: YES

SND: YES

ACTION DISPLAY


Display shows:


OR



OR


3) Dial 0 or 1 to select Receive option.

OR

Press Volume button to select receive option and press Right Soft button to move cursor.

4) Dial 0 or 1 to select Send option.

OR

Press Volume button to select send option and press Right Soft button to return to step 2.


OR


RELATED ITEMS

[201] CID/ANI

RCV:YES SND:YES

[205] CID/ANI

RCV:YES SND:YES

[ALL] CID/ANI

RCV:YES SND:YES

[205] CID/ANI

RCV:YES SND:YES

[205] CID/ANI

RCV:YES SND:YES

MMC 119 CALLER ID DISPLAY

2-84



[314] CONFIRM OUTGOING CALL

Allows outgoing call restriction by call duration time: calls can be disconnected or the user can receive ‘confirm tone’.(refer to the CO Confirm timer in MMC 501)


0 NONE

1 CONFIRM TONE Caller hears confirmation tone at programmed time

2 DISCONNECT Call is disconnected.

DEFAULT DATA

NONE

ACTION DISPLAY


Display shows:


OR



OR


3) Dial a feature option 0-2.

OR



OR


RELATED ITEMS

MMC 501 SYSTEM-WIDE TIMERS

[201] CO CONFIRM

NONE

[205] CO CONFIRM

NONE

[ALL] CO CONFIRM

NONE

[205] CO CONFIRM

CONFIRM TONE


2-85

CHAPTER 2.


[315] CUSTOMER SET RELOCATION

Customer Set Relocation allows the system administrator or technician to exchange similar stations in the system without hardware changes. All the button settings, features, etc. for a phone can be copied to another. The user can relocate to the new station and work as normal.

CONDITIONS

Refer to the Relocate Allowed Table(next page) listing which phones/AOMs can be exchanged.

DEFAULT DATA

NONE

ACTION DISPLAY


Display shows:

2) Enter number of original station.(e.g., 202)


3) Enter second station number.(e.g., 210)

Press Right Soft button to enter data.


OR


SET RELOCATION

EXT_ EXT

SET RELOCATION

EXT202 EXT_

SET RELOCATE

EXT202 EXT210

SET RELOCATION

EXT_ EXT

RELATED ITEMS

NONE

2-86



Relocate

Allowed

Table

SLT

EURO 6B

EURO 12B

EURO 24B

48B AOM

64B AOM iDCS 28D iDCS 18D iDCS 8D

DS-5012L

DS-5014D

DS-5021D

DS-5007S

DS-5014S

DS-5038S

IP Phone*

SLT EURO

6B

EURO

12B

EURO

24B

48B

AOM

64B

AOM

iDCS

28D

iDCS

18D

YES NO NO NO NO NO NO NO

NO YES NO NO NO NO NO NO

NO NO YES YES NO NO NO NO

NO NO YES YES NO NO NO NO

NO NO NO NO YES YES NO NO

NO NO NO NO YES YES NO NO

NO NO NO NO NO NO YES YES

NO NO NO NO NO NO YES YES

NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO









2-87

CHAPTER 2.


Relocate

Allowed

Table

SLT

EURO 6B

EURO 12B

EURO 24B

48B AOM

64B AOM iDCS 28D iDCS 18D

iDCS

8D

DS-

5012L

DS-

5014D

DS-

5021D

DS-

5007S

DS-

5014S

DS-

5038S

IP

Phone*


NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO NO NO NO NO

NO NO NO NO NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO NO NO NO NO

NO NO NO NO NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO NO NO NO NO

NO NO NO NO NO

NO NO NO NO NO

DS-5012L NO YES NO NO NO NO NO NO

DS-5014D NO NO YES NO NO NO NO NO

DS-5021D NO NO NO YES NO NO NO NO

DS-5007S NO NO NO NO YES NO NO NO

DS-5014S NO NO NO NO NO YES NO NO

2-88



[316] COPY STATION USABLE

Provides a tool for copying station/trunk use assignments in MMC 304 from one station user group to another. This can be done on a station use group basis or for all station use groups.

Use groups are set up in MMC 614.

DEFAULT DATA

NONE

ACTION DISPLAY


Display shows:

2) Enter station use group number.(e.g., 005)

OR

Press Volume buttons to make selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor.

3) Enter station use group number to copy from.

Cursor returns to step 2.

OR



OR


OR


(001)COPY USABLE

FROM:NONE

(005)COPY USABLE

FROM:NONE

(005)COPY USABLE

FROM:003

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 304

MMC 614




2-89

CHAPTER 2.


[317] ASSIGN STATION/STATION USE

This MMC is used to determine whether stations in one use group can make intercom calls to stations in other use groups.(within the same tenant)

Use groups are set up in MMC 614.

DEFAULT DATA

DIAL: YES

ACTION DISPLAY


Display shows:

2) Dial the first station use group number.(e.g., 005)

OR


OR

Select all station use groups.

3) Dial the second station use group number.(e.g., 004)

OR


4) Dial 1 for YES or 0 for NO.(NO means first group cannot dial second group)

OR

Press Volume button to select YES/NO and press Right Soft button to move cursor.


OR


(001) USE (001)

DIAL:YES

(005) USE (001)

DIAL:YES

(ALL) USE (001)

DIAL:YES

(005) USE (004)

DIAL:YES

(005) USE (004)

DIAL:NO

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 614 STATION/TRUNK USE GROUP

2-90



[318] DISTINCTIVE RINGING

Allows the technician to select the ring tone heard at a keyset when called by a specific station or when a specific trunk rings that keyset. There is also a cadence control option to perform a similar function for SLTs.

There are eight ring tones available along with a Follow Station option(default) for keysets.

There are five cadences and a Follow Station option(default) for SLTs. See table, below.

It also allows the technician to assign the call priority for a group call when called by a specific station or when a specific trunk rings that phone. When calls come into a station group and all group members are busy, the system will assign a priority to a specific station or a specific trunk so that high priority calls will be placed at the front of the group queue.

If this option is set to NO, the call held longest in the group queue has the highest priority.

There are nine priority levels: level 1 is the highest and level 9 is the lowest.

Option No Description

TONE

Option

Calls will ring with the keyset user’s choice of ring frequency.

1~8 Calls from the programmed station or trunk will ring with this frequency.

CADENCE

Option

Calls will ring with the normal SLT ring cadences.

1

2

Calls from the programmed station or trunk will ring with the intercom ring cadence.

Calls from the programmed station or trunk will ring with the CO ring cadence.

3

4

5

Calls from the programmed station or trunk will ring with the DOOR ring cadence.

Calls from the programmed station or trunk will ring with the ALARM ring cadence.

Calls from the programmed station or trunk will ring with the CALLBACK ring cadence.

CONDITIONS

y y

Digital phone(keyset) rings are distinguished by their tone. If the T(TONE) of the calling internal/external phone is set to ‘NO’, the bell rings according to the normal setting in MMC 111, PHONE RING TONE, for the receiving station. If T is set to 1-8, the bell rings according to the designated ring tone.

SLT rings are distinguished by their ringing interval. If the C(CADENCE) of the calling internal/external phone is set to ‘NO’, the bell rings according to the interval set in

MMC 510, SLI RING CADENCE, for each calling station type. If C is set to 1-5, the bell rings according to that interval regardless of the calling station type.


2-91

CHAPTER 2.


DEFAULT DATA

T: NO (FOLLOW STATION SETTING)

C: NO (FOLLOW STATION SETTING)

ACTION DISPLAY



2) Dial trunk or station number.(e.g., 705)

OR

Press Volume button to select trunk or station and press Right Soft button to move cursor.

3) Dial 1-8 to select ring tone.

OR

Press Volume button to select ring tone and press


4) Dial 1-5 to select ring cadence.

OR

Press Volume button to select ring cadence and press Right Soft button to move cursor.

5) Enter priority level via dial keypad.

(1-9 or NO)


OR


[201] RING TONE

T:NO C:NO PRI:NO

[705] RING TONE

T:NO C:NO PRI:NO

[705] RING TONE

T:5 C:NO PRI:NO

[705] RING TONE

T:5 C:3 PRI:NO

[705] RING TONE

T:5 C:3 PRI:NO

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 111

MMC 510

PHONE RING TONE

SLI RING CADENCE

2-92



[319] BRANCH GROUP

Assign stations to branch groups. There is a maximum of four branch groups. When a C.O. line is ringing at a station, other stations assigned the same branch group can answer the incoming call by going off hook.

This MMC is currently not valid in the UK/EU.

DEFAULT DATA

NONE

ACTION DISPLAY


Display shows.

2) Dial station number.(e.g., 205).

OR



OR


3) Dial a branch group number. (01-20).

OR



OR


[201] BRANCH GRP

BRANCH GRP:NONE

[205] BRANCH GRP

BRANCH GRP:NONE

[ALL] BRANCH GRP

BRANCH GRP:??

[205] BRANCH GRP

BRANCH GRP:04

RELATED ITEMS

NONE


2-93

CHAPTER 2.


[320] PRESET FORWARD NO ANSWER

Allows a technician to assign a default destination for Forward No Answer(FNA) to each station on the system. These destinations may be the same or different for each station. The preset FNA destination will be temporarily overwritten if the station user enters a different

FNA destination. If you cancel the new destination, the preset destination will once more be in effect. Preset FNA time follows the station ‘NO ANS FWD’ timer(MMC 502).

Preset FNA can be assigned respectively for each type of call.

No

0

1

2

Type

INT

EXT

BOTH

Description

Preset FNA applies only to intercom calls.

Preset FNA applies only to incoming calls.

Preset FNA applies to both intercom and incoming calls.

When using PRE FWD BUSY option in MMC [210]

If PRE FWD BUSY option in MMC 210 is set ON, the forward busy follows this feature.

DEFAULT DATA

NONE

ACTION DISPLAY


Display shows:


OR



OR


3) Dial valid number via keypad.

OR

Press Volume button to select call type and press Right Soft button to move cursor.

[201] PRESET FNA

NONE OPT:BOTH

[205] PRESET FNA

NONE OPT:BOTH

[ALL] PRESET FNA

NONE OPT:BOTH

[205] PRESET FNA

202 OPT:BOTH

2-94



4) Dial call type 0, 1 or 2.(e.g., 1)

OR




OR


MMC.

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 102 CALL FORWARD

[205] PRESET FNA

202 OPT:EXT


2-95

CHAPTER 2.


[323] CALLING PARTY NUMBER

Allows a number up to 16 digits to be entered and associated with a station or trunk number on a per PRI/BRI basis. When this station makes an outgoing call on this PRI, the number entered here will be the Calling Party Number sent on the call. There are four tables for the system. If there are no entries in the tables the system uses the number for the trunk entered in MMC 405, TRUNK CO TEL NUMBER, for the Calling Party Number.

DEFAULT DATA

EMPTY

ACTION DISPLAY


Display shows:

2) Dial extension or trunk number.(e.g., 230)

OR

Press Volume button to select extension and press Right Soft button to move the cursor.

3) Dial table number.

OR

Press Volume button to select table number and press Right Soft button to move the cursor.

4) Enter the Calling Party Number.

5) Repeat steps 3 & 4 to enter other tables and Calling

Party Numbers.

OR

Repeat steps 2, 3, & 4 to enter other station or trunk and Calling Party Numbers.


OR


[201] SEND CLIP

1:

[230] SEND CLIP

1:

[230] SEND CLIP

2:

[230] SEND CLIP

2:3055922900

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 419

MMC 420

MMC 834

BRI OPTIONS

PRI OPTIONS

H.323 OPTIONS

2-96



[326] RINGBACK TONE MESSAGE

Assigns Color Ring Message by using SVMi message.

DEFAULT DATA

NONE

ACTION DISPLAY


Display shows:

2) Enter the VM station number.

OR


Right Soft button.

3) Select Ring Message. (0001-9999)

OR


Right Soft button.


OR


[301] RBT MSG

NONE

[302] RBT MSG

NONE

[302] RBT MSG

0001

RELATED ITEMS


2-97

CHAPTER 2.


[400] CUSTOMER ON/OFF PER TRUNK

Assigns several options(listed below) on a per-trunk basis.

No Option

0 1A2 EMULATION

1 TRUNK INC DND

2 TRUNK FORWARD

3 LCR ALLOW

6 EFWD EXT CLI

7 REPEAT CLI

8 TONECHK DISC

9 AUTO ANSWER

Default

OFF

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

ON

OFF

OFF

Description

When this option is set to ON up to 4 internal stations can participate in a conversation on this trunk by pressing the trunk key.

When this option is set to ON a trunk that is programmed to ring a specific station(a private line or DIL) will ring at that station if the station is in DND.

When this option is set to OFF this trunk will not follow a ringing stations call forwarding.

Allows LCR to be switched ON/OFF when a trunk is accessed using a DT key or by dialling its port number

(e.g., 701).

This option determines what kinds of CLI number will be sent to the external forwarded outgoing call.(Station or

Received CLI from Trunk)

This option determines what kinds of CLI number will be sent to the trunk to trunk call.(Trunk or Received CLI from Trunk)

When this option is set to ON, loop trunk can be disconnected by detecting busy tone.(To use this feature, the

LP TRK TONE DISC option in MMC 861 must be set to

ENABLE.)

When this option is set to ON, Auto Answer mode can be assigned on a per-trunk basis. used by svmi message.

DEFAULT DATA

1A2 EMULATE: OFF

TRK INC. DND: OFF

TRK FORWARD: ON

EFWD EXT CLI: ON

REPEAT CLI: ON

TONECHK DISC: OFF

AUTO ANSWER: OFF

COLORRING AS: OFF

2-98



ACTION DISPLAY


Display show:

2) Dial trunk number.(e.g., 704)

OR

Press Volume button to select trunk.

OR

Select all trunks and press Right Soft button to move cursor to options.

3) Dial option number from above list

OR




OR

Press Volume button to select ON/OFF and press Right Soft button to return to step 2.


OR


[701] TRK ON/OFF

1A2 EMULATE:OFF

[704] TRK ON/OFF

1A2 EMULATE:OFF

[ALL] TRK ON/OFF

1A2 EMULATE:?

[704] TRK ON/OFF

TRK FORWARD:ON

[704] TRK ON/OFF

TRK FORWARD:OFF

RELATED ITEMS

NONE


2-99

CHAPTER 2.


[401] TRUNK LINE/PBX LINE

Used to select the mode of the trunk lines: CO LINE or PBX LINE. If PBX mode is chosen, this allows PBX access codes to be recognized, thus allowing more complete toll restriction.

(call barring) This mode is assigned on a per-trunk basis.

DEFAULT DATA

ALL TRUNKS: CO LINE

ACTION DISPLAY


Display shows:


OR

Use Volume button to scroll through trunk numbers and press Right Soft button to move.

OR

Select all trunks.

3) Dial 1 for PBX or 0 for CO.(e.g., 1)

OR

Use Volume button to scroll through options



OR


[701] PBX LINE

CO LINE

[704] PBX LINE

CO LINE

[ALL] PBX LINE

?

[704] PBX LINE

PBX LINE

RELATED ITEMS

NONE

2-100



[402] TRUNK DIAL TYPE

Used to determine the dialling type of each trunk line. There are two options:


1 DIAL PULSE TYPE

DEFAULT DATA

ALL TRUNKS: DTMF

Dial Pulse

ACTION DISPLAY


Display shows:


OR

Use Volume button to scroll through trunk numbers and press Right Soft button to move the cursor.

OR

Select all.

3) Dial 0 for DTMF or 1 for PULSE.

OR

Use Volume button to scroll through options

Press Right Soft buttons to return to step 2.


OR


RELATED ITEMS

MMC 501

MMC 503

SYSTEM TIMERS

TRUNK-WIDE TIMERS

[701] DIAL TYPE

DTMF TYPE

[704] DIAL TYPE

DTMF TYPE

[ALL] DIAL TYPE

?

[704] DIAL TYPE

DIAL PULSE TYPE


2-101

CHAPTER 2.


[403] TRUNK TOLL CLASS

Assigns to ll class level assignments on a per-trunk or all-trunk basis in a day or night condition. The options for toll level will follow either the station class or the class of service defined in MMCs 702, Toll Deny Table, and 703, Toll Allowance Table. The toll classes available are listed below with their entry numbers.

No

2

3

0

1

4

5

6

7

8

F-STN

CLS-A

CLS-B

CLS-C

CLS-D

CLS-E

CLS-F

CLS-G

CLS-H

Class Description

Follow station toll restriction

Follow toll class A(Unrestricted)

Follow toll class B

Follow toll class C

Follow toll class D

Follow toll class E

Follow toll class F

Follow toll class G

Follow toll class H(All restricted)

DEFAULT DATA

ALL TRUNKS: F-STN

ACTION DISPLAY


Display shows:


OR


OR

Select all.

3) Dial ring plan number.(1~6)

OR

Use Volume button to scroll through ring plan numbers and press Right Soft button to move the cursor.

[701] TOLL CLASS

1:F-STN 2:F-STN

[704] TOLL CLASS

1:F-STN 2:F-STN

[ALL] TOLL CLASS

1:F-STN 2:F_STN

[704] TOLL CLASS

1:F-STN 2:F-STN

2-102



4) Enter day toll class.(e.g., 2 for CLS-B)

OR

Press Volume button to scroll through toll classes and use Right Soft button to move the cursor.


OR


RELATED ITEMS

MMC 301

MMC 507

MMC 701

ASSIGN STATION COS


ASSIGN COS CONTENTS

[704] TOLL CLASS

1:CLS-B 2:F-STN


2-103

CHAPTER 2.


[404] TRUNK NAME

Allows a name up to 11 characters long to be entered to identify an individual trunk.



DEFAULT DATA

NONE

ACTION DISPLAY


Display shows:

2) Dial trunk.(e.g., 704)

OR

Press Volume button to select trunk and press

Right Soft button to move the cursor.



OR


[701] TRUNK NAME

[704] TRUNK NAME

[704] TRUNK NAME

TELECOMS

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 104

MMC 405

STATION NAME

TRUNK CO TEL NUMBER

2-104



[405] TRUNK CO TEL NUMBER

Allows a number up to 11 digits long to be entered to identify an individual trunk.

ENTERING NUMBERS

Numbers are written using the keypad. Each press of a key selects the digit and moves the cursor to the next position.

The # button can be used for special characters:

#, space, &, !, :, ?, ., %, $, -, <, >, /, =, [, ], @, ^, (, ), _, +, {, }, |, ; , \ , " , ~.

DEFAULT DATA

NONE

ACTION DISPLAY


Display shows:

2) Dial trunk.(e.g., 704)

OR



3) Enter trunk number using the dial keypad.

[704] CO TEL NO.

3054264100


OR


OR


[701] CO TEL NO.

[704] CO TEL NO.

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 404 TRUNK NAME


2-105

CHAPTER 2.


[406] TRUNK RING ASSIGNMENT

Enables ringing to a specific station or to a group of stations when incoming calls are received. This MMC controls ring plan destinations for ring down trunks. If the ring plan destinations are not entered, the default ring plan is ring plan 1.

DEFAULT DATA

ALL TRUNKS RING DEFAULT OPERATOR GROUP

ACTION DISPLAY


Display shows:


OR


OR

Select all.

3) Dial ring plan number or press Right Soft button to move to the next step.

4) Dial station number or station group number.

(e.g., 205)

OR

Press Volume button to make selection and

press Right Soft button to move cursor to the next ring plan destination and repeat step 4.

OR



OR


[701] TRK RING

1:500 2:500

[704] TRK RING

1:500 2:500

[All] TRK RING

1:500 2:500

[704] TRK RING

1:500 2:500

[704] TRK RING

1:205 2:500

[704] TRK RING

1:205 2:501

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 202

MMC 507

MMC 601

CHANGE FEATURE PASSCODES



2-106



[407] FORCED TRUNK RELEASE

Provides a positive forced trunk release to a specific trunk or all trunks in the event of a trunk lock-up.

DEFAULT DATA

NONE

ACTION DISPLAY


Display shows:

2) Dial in trunk number.(e.g., 704)

OR

Press Volume button selected trunk and press

Right Soft button.

OR

Select all trunks.

3) Dial 1 for YES or 0 for NO.

(Pressing 1 or 0 will return to step 2)


OR


[701] TRK RELS.

RELEASE?_Y:1,N:0

[704] TRK RELS.

RELEASE?_Y:1,N:0

[ALL] TRK RELS.

RELEASE?_Y:1,N:0

[704] TRK RELS.

RELEASE?_Y:1,N:0

RELATED ITEMS

NONE


2-107

CHAPTER 2.


[408] ASSIGN TRUNK MOH SOURCE

Allows the system administrator to select which Music-On-Hold(MOH) source can be heard on each trunk. There is one internal music source/external music source (371).

CONDITIONS

To use an external sound source, connects the corresponding port of the to the misc port of

MP10/11 card.

DEFAULT DATA

TONE

ACTION DISPLAY


Display shows: current setting.


OR

Use Volume button to scroll through trunk numbers and press Right Soft button to move cursor.

OR

Select all.

3) Enter source number.(e.g., 371)

OR




OR


[701] TRK MOH

MOH:TONE AA:TONE

[704] TRK MOH

MOH:TONE AA:TONE

[ALL] TRK MOH

MOH:? AA:?

[705] TRK MOH

MOH:371 AA:TONE

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 756 ASSIGN VMMOH

2-108



[409] TRUNK STATUS READ

This is a READ-ONLY MMC. Allows the status of trunks to be read in a format that will enable the servicing personnel to quickly identify the ownership and position of a trunk.


00 PORT

01 TYPE

02

03

1A2 EMULATE

TRK FORWARD

04 LINE

05 DIAL

06-11 TOLL TYPE 1-6

12-17 RING PLAN 1-6

18

19

MOH SOURCE

DISA LINE

LOOP, GND, E & M, DID, BRI, PRI, VOIP

1A2 Emulation On/Off

Trunk Forward On/Off

CO/PBX

Ring Plan Toll Restriction(1-6)

Ring Plan Ring Destination(1-6)

MOH Source

DISA Status

DEFAULT DATA

FOLLOWS TRUNK

ACTION DISPLAY


Display shows:

2) Enter trunk number via dial keypad.(e.g., 704)

OR


Right Soft button to advance cursor.

3) Enter desired option 00-19.(e.g., 01)

OR



OR


[701] TRK STATUS

PORT:C1-S5-P01

[704] TRK STATUS

PORT:C1-S5-P04

[704] TRK STATUS

TYPE:LOOP TRUNK


2-109

CHAPTER 2.


RELATED ITEMS

MMC 400

MMC 401

MMC 402

MMC 403

MMC 404

MMC 406

MMC 408

MMC 410


TRUNK LINE/PBX LINE

TRUNK DIAL TYPE

TRUNK TOLL CLASS

TRUNK NAME


ASSIGN TRUNK MUSIC ON HOLD SOURCE

ASSIGN DISA TRUNK

2-110



[410] ASSIGN DISA TRUNK

Allows the system to have Direct Inward System Access(DISA). Because there is a possibility that unauthorized calls will be made via this feature, several safeguards have been added. Users must be informed of these to prevent unnecessary service calls. DISA can lock out when a predetermined number of invalid consecutive calls are attempted. Callers will then receive error tone until the programmable timer has expired.

CONDITIONS

y y

The * key may be used to initiate new dial tone while in a station to station call.

The # button may be used to terminate the DISA call and disconnect the central office line. DISA lines must be assigned to the ring plan(s).

DEFAULT DATA

ALL TRUNKS: NORMAL

ACTION DISPLAY


Display shows:


OR


Right Soft button.

OR

Select all trunks.

OR

3) Press Volume button to select a Ring Plan.(e.g., 3)

OR

Using the dial keypad, press 1 to select or 0 not to select the Ring Plan.(e.g., 1 to select)



OR


[701] 123456

DISA LINE:000000

[704] 123456

DISA LINE:000000

[ALL] 123456

DISA LINE:000000

[704] 123456

DISA LINE:001000

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 500 SYSTEM-WIDE COUNTERS


2-111

CHAPTER 2.


[412] ASSIGN TRUNK SIGNAL

Allows the assignment of analogue DID or E & M cards for proper signalling. These trunks can also use the translation tables in MMC 714.

No Signalling condition type

CONDITIONS

An analogue E & M/DID Trunk card must be installed in the OfficeServ 7100 system. Otherwise, the ‘NO E&M/DID TRUNK’ message is displayed.

DEFAULT DATA

IMMEDIATE START

ACTION DISPLAY


Display shows:

2) Enter desired trunk number.(e.g., 705)

OR

Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor.

OR

Select all trunks.

3) Enter desired trunk type selection from above list.

OR



OR


RELATED ITEMS

MMC 714

[701] TRK SIGNAL

IMMEDIATE START

[705] TRK SIGNAL

IMMEDIATE START

[ALL] TRK SIGNAL

IMMEDIATE START

[705] TRK SIGNAL

WINK START


2-112



[414] MPD/PRS SIGNAL

Used on a per-trunk basis to define if a Trunk line is to be either a Metering Pulse Detection(MPD) or a Polarity Reversal Signal(PRS) trunk.

An MPD Trunk will detect a C.O-provided meter pulse. A Polarity Reversal trunk will detect the line reversal signal which may be provided by the Trunk Line when the other party answers the outgoing call or the outside party clears the call.

Type

PRS 1

PRS 2

PRS 3

MPD

Description

When first PRS is detected, call duration timer is started. When second PRS is detected, call duration timer is stopped. The call is not released.

When first PRS is detected, call duration timer is started. When second PRS is detected, call duration timer is stopped and the call is released.

The call duration timer starts based on the timer. When first PRS is detected, call duration timer is stopped and call is released.

Metering Pulse Detection.

CONDITIONS

y y

If the trunk is designated as PRS, the call duration timer will be started and the results printed on the SMDR record.

PRS is also essential for dropping a trunk-to- trunk conversation which is unsupervised by an internal party.

DEFAULT DATA

NONE(NORMAL)

ACTION DISPLAY


Display shows:

2) Dial desired trunk number.(e.g., 705)

OR

Press Volume button to select trunk and use


[701] TRK PRS

NONE

[705] TRK PRS

NONE


2-113

CHAPTER 2.


3) Dial 0 for PRS 1, 1 for PRS 2, 2 for PRS 3, 3 for

MPD or 4 for NORMAL.

OR

Press Volume button to scroll through options and use Left or Right Soft button to return to step 2.


OR


MMC.

RELATED ITEMS

MMC503 TRUNK-WIDE TIMERS

[705] TRK PRS

PRS 2

2-114



[415] REPORT TRUNK ABANDON DATA

Allows the system administrator or technician to enable or disable the reporting of abandoned Trunk Line calls for which CLIP information has been collected on a per-trunk basis.

There are two options for this MMC:


0 REPORT: NO Abandoned call records for incoming calls with CLIP information will not be printed on SMDR or stored in the system call abandon list. These records will continue to be stored in the station review list.

1 REPORT: YES Abandoned call records for incoming calls with CLIP information will be printed on SMDR and stored in the system call abandon list. These records will also be stored in the station review list.

DEFAULT DATA

ALL TRUNKS REPORT: YES

ACTION DISPLAY


Display shows:


OR

Use Volume button to select trunk and press



OR

Use Volume button to select option and press



OR


[701] TRK ABNDN

REPORT:YES

[705] TRK ABNDN

REPORT:YES

[705] TRK ABNDN

REPORT:NO

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 725 SMDR OPTIONS


2-115

CHAPTER 2.


[417] E1/PRI CRC4 OPTION

This option is used to enable/disable CRC4 generation and checking.

CONDITIONS

y y

This is useful with some networks which do not support CRC4 framing but only

PCM30 framing.

After changing this option, MMC 418 must be used to restart the card to make the change effective.

DEFAULT DATA

CRC4: ON

ACTION DISPLAY


Display shows:

2) Enter first trunk number in PRI card.(e.g., 701)

OR

Press Volume button to select trunk and use


3) Enter 1 for ON 0 for OFF.

OR


Right Soft button.


OR


MMC.

[701] E1/PRI CRC

ON

[701] E1/PRI CRC

ON

[701] E1/PRI CRC

OFF

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 418 BRI & PRI CARD RESTART

2-116



[418] BRI AND PRI CARD RESTART

This MMC is used to restart a BRI or PRI card at the card level. This action is required to update the processor on the BRI or PRI card with any changes in the card setup MMCs and to put these changes into effect.

CONDITIONS

y y

A BRI card or TEPRI card or TEPRI2 card must be installed in the system.

Before setting the PRI program, the J2 jumper of the TEPRI or TEPRI2 card must be set ON to PRI mode.

DEFAULT DATA

NONE

ACTION DISPLAY


Display shows first BRI or PRI circuit:

2) Dial first trunk on a BRI or PRI card.(e.g., 733)

OR

Press Volume button to select the first trunk and press Right Soft button to move the cursor.


Pressing 1 will advance to step 4.


Pressing 1 or 0 will return to step 2.


OR


[725] RESTART

CARD RESTART?NO

[733] RESTART

CARD RESTART?NO

[733] RESTART

CARD RESTART?YES

[733] RESTART

ARE YOU SURE?YES

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 419

MMC 420

MMC 423

MMC 424

BRI OPTIONS

PRI OPTIONS

S/T MODE

BRI S0 MAPPING


2-117

CHAPTER 2.


[419] BRI OPTIONS

Assigns several options on a per-BRI basis. There are different options depending on whether the BRI is programmed as a trunk or station in MMC 423.

OPTIONS FOR BRI PORTS PROGRAMMED AS TRUNKS


0 CHANNEL ANY When this option is set to YES, the system will place calls on any free channel of that BRI if the channel chosen by the user is busy. If set to

NO, they will receive a busy signal if they attempt to access a busy channel even if the other channel on that BRI is free.

1 BRI MODE BRI access mode select.

P-P NOR

2

P-P DID

P-M NOR

P-M MSN

DLSEND

Point to Point NORmal. This operates like a standard telephone line with one CO number per channel and ring according to MMC 406.

Point to Point Direct Inward Dial. This operates in a similar manner to an analogue DID circuit with multiple CO numbers pointed to a single channel and translated within the system(MMC714) to a single device.

Point to Multi-point NORmal. This type of circuit operates in a similar manner to P-P NORmal but allows multiple devices to be attached to the circuit. Ringing is defined in MMC 406.

Point to Multi-point MSN. This setting is used when the line uses the

MSN supplementary service. Ringing is defined in MMC 421.

BRI dial sending mode select.

ENBLOCK

OVERLAP

3 CLIP TABLE

4 NB TYPE

Digits will be collected and sent in a single block similar to a Cellphone.

Digits will be sent as they are dialled by the user.

Used to select the Calling Party Number to send to the network. If

NONE, MMC405 TRUNK CO TEL NUMBER is sent to the network; otherwise, the Calling Party Number entry in MMC 323 corresponding with the selected number is sent to the network.

Used to select the type of the Calling Party Number to send to the network.

NETWORK Network specific number

2-118



(continued)


5 NB PLAN

UNKNOWN

ISDN

DATA

TELEX

Used to select the type of the Calling Party Number Plan to send to the network.

Unknown numbering plan

ISDN numbering plan(CCITT E.163-164)

Data numbering plan(CCITT X.121)

Telex numbering plan(CCITT F.69)

NATIONAL

PRIVATE

National standard numbering plan

Private numbering plan

EXTEN Local plan

OPTIONS FOR BRI PORTS PROGRAMMED AS STATIONS


0 ANY CHANNEL When this option is set to YES, the system will place calls on any free channel of that BRI if the channel chosen by the user is busy.(e.g., Preferred channel selection) If set to NO, the user will receive a busy signal if they attempt to access a busy channel even if the other channel on that BRI is free.(e.g., Exclusive channel selection)

1 POWER FEED This field determines if power to a BRI access will be supplied.(YES or

NO)

CONDITIONS

y y

A BRI card must be installed in the system. Otherwise, the ‘NO BRI CARD’ message is displayed.

If any changes are made in this MMC, the BRI card that is affected by these changes

MUST be restarted using MMC 418 in order for the changes to become effective.

DEFAULT DATA

For BRI Ports programmed as Trunks:

CHANNEL ANY: YES

BRI MODE: P-P DDI

DLSEND: OVERLAP

CLIP TABLE: NONE

NB TYPE: NATIONAL

NB PLAN: ISDN

For BRI Ports programmed as Stations:

CHANNEL ANY: YES

POWER FEED: NO


2-119

CHAPTER 2.


ACTION DISPLAY


Display shows first BRI channel.

2) Dial BRI trunk number.(e.g., 727)

OR

Press Volume button to select BRI trunk and press Right Soft button.

[725] BRI-TRK

CHANNEL ANY:YES

[727] BRI-TRK

CHANNEL ANY:YES

OR

Press Volume button to select option item and

press Right Soft button.

[727] BRI-TRK

CHANNEL ANY:NO

[727] BRI-TRK

BRI MODE:P-M MSN

[727] BRI-TRK

DLSEND :OVERLAP

[727] BRI-TRK

CLIP TABLE :NONE

[727] BRI-TRK

NB TYPE:UNKNOWN

[727] BRI-TRK

CLIP TABLE:1

OR

Press Volume button to select BRI station and press Right Soft button.

5) Dial BRI station number.(e.g., 729)

OR

Press Volume button to select BRI station and press Right Soft button.

[729] BRI-STN

CHANNEL ANY:YES

OR

Press Volume button to select BRI station and


OR

Press Volume button to select option item and



OR


[729] BRI-STN

CHANNEL ANY:YES

[729] BRI-STN

POWER FEED :NO

[729] BRI-STN

POWER FEED :YES

2-120



RELATED ITEMS

MMC 323

MMC 405

MMC 418

MMC 421

MMC 423

MMC 714


TRUNK CO TEL NUMBER


MSN DIGIT

S/T MODE

DID NAME AND NUMBER TRANSLATION


2-121

CHAPTER 2.


[420] PRI OPTIONS

This MMC allows the technician to program a PRI trunk card.


0 CHANNEL ANY When this option is set to YES, the system will place calls on any free channel of that PRI if the channel chosen by the user is busy. If set to

NO, they will receive a busy signal if they attempt to access a busy channel even if the other channel on that PRI is free.

1 PRI MODE

NORMAL

PRI access mode select.

Point to Point NORMAL. This operates like a standard telephone line with one CO number per channel and ring according to MMC 406.

DID

2 DLSEND

ENBLOCK

OVERLAP

Point to Point Direct Inward Dial. This operates in a similar manner to an analogue DID circuit with multiple CO numbers pointed to a single channel and translated within the system(MMC714) to a single device.

PRI dial sending mode select.

Digits will be collected and sent in a single block similar to a cellphone.

Digits will be sent as they are dialled by the user.

3 CLIP TABLE

4 NB TYPE

Used to select the Calling Party Number to send to the network. If

NONE, MMC405 CO TRUNK NUMBER is sent to the network; otherwise, the Calling Party Number entry in MMC 323 corresponding with the selected number is sent to the network.

Used to select the type of the Calling Party Number to send to the network.

NETWORK Network specific number

2-122

5 NB PLAN

UNKNOWN

ISDN

DATA

TELEX

NATIONAL

Used to select the type of the Calling Party Number Plan to send to the network.

Unknown numbering plan

ISDN numbering plan(CCITT E.163-164)

Data numbering plan(CCITT X.121)

Telex numbering plan(CCITT F.69)

National standard numbering plan

PRIVATE Private numbering plan

EXTEN Local plan

6 SAME CONNID When this option is set to OFF, ISDN port is searched by CONN ID and if set to ON, searched by data channel id.



CONDITIONS

y y

Before setting the PRI program, the J2 jumper of the TEPRI or TEPRI2 card must be set to ‘ON’ for PRI mode.

After changing this program, run MMC 418, BRI AND PRI CARD RESTART, to apply the new setting.

DEFAULT DATA

CHANNEL ANY: YES

PRI MODE: DDI

DLSEND: OVERLAP

CLIP TABLE: NONE

NB TYPE: NATIONAL

NB PLAN: ISDN

ACTION DISPLAY


Display shows:

2) Dial first PRI trunk number in PRI card.(e.g., 730)

OR


[701] PRI OPTION

CHANNEL ANY:YES

[730] PRI OPTION

CHANNEL ANY:YES

OR

Press Volume button to select option.

4) Press Volume button to make selection.

Then press Right Soft button.


OR


[730] PRI OPTION

PRI MODE:DDI

[730] PRI OPTION

PRI MODE:NORMAL

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 323

MMC 405

MMC 418

MMC 714


TRUNK CO TEL NUMBER


DID NAME AND NUMBER TRANSLATION


2-123

CHAPTER 2.


[421] MSN DIGIT

Provides a method of assigning an incoming MSN call to a specific station. If any entry in the MSN DIGIT TABLE matches an incoming call’s called party number, either the specific station is alerted, if it is programmed to accept the call, or the call is cleared if it is programmed to reject the call.

If the incoming called party number does not have a matching entry in the MSN table,

MMC 406 ringing destination is alerted or the call is optionally released.

You can give each MSN number to a specific station and you can select the call waiting option: when a destination is busy, the incoming call must be cleared or camped-on to the station.(which is alerted to the call)

CONDITIONS

y y

A BRI card must be installed in the system. Otherwise, the ‘NO BRI CARD’ message is displayed.

For each BRI access, two adjacent ports are assigned. You need only change the value for one of the two ports; the value for the other port will be changed automatically.

DEFAULT DATA

1-6: NONE

CW: YES

OPT: ACCEPT

ACTION DISPLAY


Display shows:

2) Enter trunk number.(e.g., 704)

OR

Press Volume button to scroll through ISDN ports and press Right Soft button to move cursor.

3) Enter the location 1-8.(e.g., 4)

OR

Press Volume button to select location and press


4) Enter digits to be translated(e.g., 4603881) via dial keypad and press Right Soft button to move

to the destination selection.(Max. Digit is 12)

[701] MSN DGT (1)

DGT:

[704] MSN DGT (1)

DGT:

[704] MSN DGT (4)

DGT:

[704] MSN DGT (4)

DGT:4603881

2-124



5) Enter destinations for the six ring plans via the dial keypad.(e.g., 204 for ring plan 1)

OR


6) Enter 1 for YES or 0 for NO.

OR


7) Enter 1 for ACCEPT or 0 for REJECT.

OR



OR


RELATED ITEMS

MMC 423 S/T MODE

[422] TRUNK COS

[704] MSN DGT (4)

1:204 2:NONE

[704] MSN DGT (4)

CW:NO OPT:ACEPT

[704] MSN DGT (4)

CW:NO OPT:ACEPT

Used to assign a class of service to each trunk for each of the six ring plans available.

There are 30 different classes of service that are defined in MMC 701, Assign COS Contents. Classes of service are numbered 01-30. Trunk COS applies on Tandem connections.

DEFAULT DATA

ALL RING PLANS: COS 01

ACTION DISPLAY


Display shows first trunk:

[701] TRK COS

1:01 2:01 3:01


2-125

CHAPTER 2.



OR

Use Volume button to scroll through trunks.

Press Right Soft button to advance to step 3.

OR

Use Volume button to scroll through trunks and press Left Soft button to advance to step 4.

OR

Select all trunks.

3) Enter ring plan class of service.(e.g., 05)

OR

Use Volume button to scroll through classes of service and press Right Soft button to advance to step 4.

OR

Use Volume button to scroll through classes of service and press Left Soft button to return to step 2.

4) Enter the next ring plan class of service.(e.g., 05)

OR

Use Volume button to scroll through classes of service and press Right Soft button to return to step 2.

OR

Use Volume button to scroll through classes of service and press Left Soft button to return to the previous step.


OR


MMC.

RELATED ITEMS


[705] TRK COS

1:01 2:01 3:01

[ALL] TRK COS

1:01 2:01 3:01

[705] TRK COS

1:05 2:01 3:01

[705] TRK COS

1:05 2:05 03:01

2-126



[423] S/T MODE

Allows the technician to select whether a BRI circuit is a station port or a trunk port.

No

0

1

Type

TRUNK

STATION

Description

The BRI trunk port used for ISDN trunk.

The BRI trunk port used for ISDN phone.

CONDITIONS

The BRI card must be installed in the system, otherwise the message ‘NO BRI CARD’ is displayed.

DEFAULT DATA

NONE

ACTION DISPLAY


Display shows first BRI:


OR

Use Volume button to scroll through BRI numbers and press Right Soft button to move cursor.

OR

Select all.

3) Enter circuit type.(e.g., station).

OR

Press Volume button to select option and press Right Soft button to return to step 2.


OR


RELATED ITEMS

MMC 424

MMC 418

MMC 419

MMC 421

BRI S0 MAPPING

BRI AND PRI CARD RESTART

BRI OPTIONS

MSN DIGIT

[725] S/T MODE

TRUNK

[727] S/T MODE

TRUNK

[ALL] S/T MODE

TRUNK

[727] S/T MODE

STATION


2-127

CHAPTER 2.


[424] BRI S0 MAPPING

This MMC assigns an ISDN terminal number to a BRI station port.

CONDITIONS

This function can be used only when the BRI card or BRM is installed in the system.

DEFAULT DATA

NONE

ACTION DISPLAY


Display shows first terminal number:

2) Dial terminal number.

OR

Press Volume button to make selection of terminal numbers and press Right Soft button to advance cursor.

3) Dial BRI port number.

OR

Use Volume button to scroll through ports and press Right Soft button to return to step 2.


OR


[8701]S0 MAPPING

NONE

[8704]S0 MAPPING

NONE

[8704]S0 MAPPING

712

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 419

MMC 423

BRI OPTIONS

S/T MODE

2-128



[425] CID TRUNKS

This MMC assigns a TRUNK number to a CID TRUNK.

CONDITIONS

This function can be used only when the TRM or trunk card is installed in the system.

DEFAULT DATA

NORMAL TRUNK

ACTION DISPLAY


Display shows first terminal number:

OR

Press Volume button to make selection of trunk numbers and press Right Soft button to advance cursor.

OR

Select all.

3) Enter trunk type.(e.g., CID TRUNK).

OR

Press Volume button to select option and



OR


[701]CID TRUNKS

NORMAL TRUNK

[702]CID TRUNKS

NORMAL TRUNK

[ALL] CID TRUNKS

NORMAL TRUNK

[ALL] CID TRUNKS

CID TRUNK

RELATED ITEMS


2-129

CHAPTER 2.


[426] TRUNK GAIN CONTROL

Allows loss levels to be adjusted on a per-trunk basis. There are two adjustments available in this MMC: ‘TX’ is the transmission level adjustment of the trunk to the station. ‘RX’ is the receiving level adjustment of the station to the trunk.

There are four types of adjustment:

No Trunk Gain

0 +0.0

1 +1.9

2 -6.0

-2.5 3

DEFAULT DATA

TX: +0.0

RX: +0.0

Description

Up 1.9 dB

Down 6.0 dB

Down 2.5 dB

ACTION DISPLAY


Display shows:

2) Enter desired trunk number.(e.g., 705) via the dial keypad.

OR


OR

Select all.

3) Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor.

4) Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor and

return to step 1.


OR


[701] TRUNK GAIN

RX:+0.0 TX:+0.0

[705] TRUNK GAIN

RX:+0.0 TX:+0.0

[ALL] TRUNK GAIN

RX:+0.0 TX:+0.0

[705] TRUNK GAIN

RX:+0.0 TX:+0.0

[701] TRUNK GAIN

RX:+0.0 TX:-2.5

RELATED ITEMS

NONE

2-130



[428] ASSIGN TRUNK/TRUNK USE

This MMC is used to allow or restrict trunks from making outgoing calls to other trunks within the same system. By default(DIAL=YES) all trunks can use other trunks. To prevent use, select NO.

DEFAULT DATA

DIAL: YES

ACTION DISPLAY


Display shows:

2) Dial the trunk use group number.(e.g., 305)

OR

Press Volume button to selection and press

Right Soft button.

OR

Select all trunk use groups.

3) Dial the trunk use group number.(e.g., 304)

OR

Press Volume button to selection and press Right

Soft button.


OR

Press Volume button to select YES/NO and press Right Soft button to move cursor.


OR


(301) USE (301)

DIAL:YES

(305) USE (301)

DIAL:YES

(ALL) USE (301)

DIAL:YES

(305) USE (304)

DIAL:YES

(305) USE (304)

DIAL:NO

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 614 STATION/TRUNK USE GROUP


2-131

CHAPTER 2.


[432] SET H-TRK

This MMC is used to select the type of signalling for each H- trunk. There are three operation types available.(E & M, DID, R/D)

DEFAULT DATA

E & M

ACTION DISPLAY


Display shows:

2) Enter desired trunk number.(e.g., 705)

OR



OR

Select all trunks.

3) Press Volume button to select trunk type and press Right Soft button to move cursor.


OR


RELATED ITEMS

NONE

[701] SET H-TRK

E&M

[705] SET H-TRK

E&M

[ALL] SET H-TRK

E&M

[705] SET H-TRK

DID

2-132



[433] COST RATE

In this MMC, the TRUNK COST RATE flags are entered for each trunk. DIAL PLANs are defined in MMC 746(Costing Dial Plan). RATE CALCULATION TABLES are defined in

MMC 749. Each trunk may be defined with up to eight cost rates. Enter one or more of the eight COST RATES per trunk. If an entry is left blank, no call costing will be calculated for that particular DIAL PLAN.

Call type 8 is fixed for incoming calls. Select cost rate type 8 only if you want incoming call costing for a trunk.

DEFAULT DATA

ALL TRUNKS/ALL DIAL PLANS: ALL COST RATES ASSIGNED

ACTION DISPLAY


Display shows trunk number and Cost Rate

[701] :12345678

CR :11111111


OR

Press Volume button to select trunk and press Right

Soft button to move cursor.

OR

Select all.

3) Press Volume button to move cursor along the line until the cursor is under the Cost Rate number.(e.g., 2)

Enter 1 for YES or 0 for NO and press Right Soft button to return to step 1.

OR


RELATED ITEMS

MMC 746

MMC 747

COSTING DIAL PLAN


[705] :12345678

CR :11111111

[701] :12345678

CR :10111111


2-133

CHAPTER 2.


[434] CONNECTION STATUS

This read-only MMC will confirm the connection status of stations or trunks. Display status displays the status of a station or trunk at the time requested. If a conference is in progress with the selected trunk or station, the display will show one of the conference parties and an arrow(Æ). The technician or system administrator can then display the other parties in the conference. If a station or trunk is in an idle state, the display will show

‘IDLE’. If the station or trunk selected is not a valid selection, the display will show ‘IN-

VALID DATA’. If the station or trunk is made busy by the CPU, the display will show

‘MADE BUSY’. If the station is in busy state with no other connection, the display will show ‘BUSY’ only.

DEFAULT DATA

NONE

ACTION DISPLAY

Display trunk connection status


2) Enter station or trunk number.

Display show connection status:

3) Enter another station or trunk.

OR

Press Transfer button to exit.

Display station connection status


DISPLAY STATUS

201 IDLE

DISPLAY STATUS

702 227

DISPLAY STATUS

702 227


Display show connection status.


OR


DISPLAY STATUS

201 IDLE

DISPLAY STATUS

235 715

DISPLAY STATUS

235 715

2-134


Display trunk status in conference



Display shows connection status:

3) Press Right Soft button to display the next station or trunks involved.


OR


Display status no connection



Display show connection status.


OR


Display status no connection


2) Enter invalid station or trunk number.

Display show INVALID DATA:


OR



DISPLAY STATUS

201 IDLE

DISPLAY STATUS

702 227 ,215

Æ

DISPLAY STATUS

702 216

Æ

DISPLAY STATUS

216 702 ,227

Æ

DISPLAY STATUS

201 IDLE

DISPLAY STATUS

702 NONE

DISPLAY STATUS

702 NONE

DISPLAY STATUS

201 IDLE

DISPLAY STATUS

INVALID DATA

DISPLAY STATUS

201 IDLE


2-135

CHAPTER 2.


Display connection status with invalid trunk or station number


2) Enter invalid station or trunk number

Display show INVALID DATA:


OR


Display connection status with trunk or station number in maintenance busy



Display show connection status:


OR


RELATED ITEMS

MMC 108

MMC 409

STATION STATUS

TRUNK STATUS READ

DISPLAY STATUS

201 IDLE

DISPLAY STATUS

INVALID DATA

DISPLAY STATUS

201 IDLE

DISPLAY STATUS

201 IDLE

DISPLAY STATUS

725 MADE BUSY

DISPLAY STATUS

725 MADE BUSY

2-136



[436] TRUNK TMC GAIN

Allows loss levels of TMC for analogue trunks to be adjusted on a per-trunk basis. There are two adjustments available in this MMC: ‘TX’ is the transmission level adjustment of the trunk to the station. ‘RX’ is the receiving level adjustment of the station to the trunk.

DEFAULT DATA

TX: +0 dB

RX: +0 dB

ACTION DISPLAY


Display shows:


OR


OR

Select all.


4) Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor and

return to step 2.


OR


[701] TMC GAIN

RX:+0 dB TX:+0 dB

[705] TMC GAIN

RX:+0 dB TX:+0 dB

[ALL] TMC GAIN

RX:+0 dB TX:+0 dB

[705] TMC GAIN

RX:+0 dB TX:+0 dB

[701] TMC GAIN

RX:+0 dB TX:-2 dB

RELATED ITEMS

NONE


2-137

CHAPTER 2.


[437] 16TRK GAIN CONTROL

Allows gain levels to be adjusted on a per-trunk basis. There are two adjustments available in this MMC: ‘TX’ is the transmission level adjustment of the trunk to the station. ‘RX’ is the receiving level adjustment of the station to the trunk.

CONDITIONS

This function can be used only when the TRM or trunk card is installed in the system.

DEFAULT DATA

TX: 3

RX: 3

ACTION DISPLAY


Display shows:


OR


OR

Select all.

3) Press Volume button to select trunk type (1~4) and press Right Soft button to move cursor. (e.g. 4)

4) Press Volume button to select RX value(1~6) and press Right Soft button to move cursor (e.g. 1)

5) Press Volume button to select TX value(1~6) and press Right Soft button to move cursor (e.g. 5)


OR


[701] TRK TYPE:3

RX:3 TX:3

[701] TRK TYPE:3

RX:3 TX:3

[ALL] TRK TYPE:3

RX:3 TX:3

[ALL] TRK TYPE:4

RX:3 TX:3

[ALL] TRK TYPE:4

RX:1 TX:3

[ALL] TRK TYPE:4

RX:1 TX:5

RELATED ITEMS

NONE

2-138



[500] SYSTEM-WIDE COUNTERS

Used to set the values of the system counters. The counters are listed below with a brief description of each.

No Counter

CNTER

COUNTER

2 DISA CALL CNTER

3 DISA LOCK CNTER

COUNTER

ALARM

6 UCDS AUDIO ALARM

7 UCD CS LEVEL 1

8 UCD CS LEVEL 2

Default

5

5

99

3

99

0

0

0

0

Description

The number of times that an alarm reminder will ring a station before cancelling. RANGE = 1-99.

The number of times the system will redial an outside number after the auto redial feature has been activated. RANGE = 1-99.

Sets the maximum number of intercom calls that can be made after accessing a DISA line.

RANGE = 1-99.

Number of attempts the system will allow to incorrectly access a DISA line before locking out the

DISA line. RANGE = -99

Number of times the system will allow a user to signal New Call on a Trunk line during one call.

RANGE = 1-99.

Used to set the Visual alarm threshold. It is triggered when the number of calls waiting to be answered in the UCD group reaches this value.

RANGE = 0-25.

Used to set the Audio alarm threshold. It is triggered when the number of calls waiting to be answered in the UCD group reaches this value.

RANGE = 0-25.

Provides call wait indication level 1 if number of calls waiting to be answered in UCD group reaches this value. RANGE = 0-25.

Provides call wait indication level 2 if number of calls waiting to be answered in UCD group reaches this value. RANGE = 0-25.

DEFAULT DATA

SEE DESCRIPTION


2-139

CHAPTER 2.


ACTION DISPLAY


Display shows:

2) Enter number from above list.(e.g., 6)

OR


3) Enter in new value via dial keypad.

If entry is valid, system will return to step 2.


OR


ALARM REM.CNTER

05

Æ

UCDS AUDIO ALARM

00

Æ

UCDS AUDIO ALARM

00

Æ02

RELATED ITEMS

NONE

2-140



[501] SYSTEM TIMERS

Allows the technician to adjust individual timers as necessary.

TIMER TABLE

Timer Name

ALARM TIME

ALERT TONE TIME

ALM REM.INTERVAL

ALM REM RING OFF

ATT. RECALL TIME

AUTO REDIAL INT.

AUTO REDIAL RLS.

BOOTH TIME OUT

(Hotel application only)

CALLBACK NO ANS

CAMP ON RECALL

CID MSG RECEIVE

CLI DISPLAY TIME

CO CLEAR TIME

Default Range Unit Description

100 0-2500 MIN This is the time the system alarm key will start ringing after the alarm key has been silenced.

1000 100-2500

MSEC

This timer sets the duration of the attention tone preceding a call to a phone in the Voice

Announce or Auto Answer mode. This tone will also precede a forced Auto Answer call.

25 1-250 SEC This timer controls the time between ring attempts at a station when alarm reminder is set.

10 1-25 SEC This timer controls the length of the ring cycle duration when an alarm reminder is set at a station.

30 0-250 SEC This controls how long a transfer recall will ring at a station before recalling the operator.

30 1-250 SEC This timer controls the time between attempts after RETRY dialling is set on a station.

45 1-250 SEC This timer controls the duration of a Ring No

Answer condition on a retry number dialled before the auto redial is automatically cancelled.

005 0-250 MIN Controls the time for which a booth phone is enabled.

30 1-250 SEC This timer controls the time before the callback is automatically cancelled when a callback detects Ring No Answer.

30 0-250 SEC This timer controls the time a camped-on call will stay at a destination before recalling to the transferring station.

6 1-25 SEC

5 1-25 SEC

The amount of time that the system will allow a valid message from the analogue CID trunk.

The amount of time that the Caller ID information remains on the phone’s display.

30 0-250 SEC The length of time a Direct Trunk Select key remains busy after cleardown.


2-141

CHAPTER 2.


(continued)

Timer Name

CO CONFIRM TIME

CO-CO DISCONNECT

CONFIRM TONE TM

CRD TONE INT TM

DIAL PASS TIME

DISA DISCONNECT

DISA LOCK OUT TM

DISA NOANS DISC.

DISA PASS CHECK

DISA NO ACTION

DISPLAY DELAY TM

DOOR LOCK RELES.

DOOR RING DETECT

DOOR RING OFF TM

E-HOLD RECALL TM


3 0-250 MIN According to MMC 314 CO CONFIRM type, the outgoing call will be disconnected after this timer expires or the outgoing caller will hear the confirm tone.

20 1-250 MIN This timer monitors the duration of an unsupervised conference; when it expires, both trunks are disconnected.

1000 100-2500

MSEC

The tone heard when a feature is activated or deactivated.

30 0-250 SEC This is the call record tone interval time. An entry other than zero will cause a tone to be heard by all the parties in a recorded conversation. The range for the tone is 001(every second) to 255

(every 255 seconds). A value of 000 means no tone. Requires an SVMi card.

3 0-25 SEC This timer monitors the time before connecting the transmit of the phone to the trunk side of an outgoing call.

30 1-250 MIN This timer controls the maximum duration of a

DISA call.

30 1-250 MIN This timer controls how long a DISA call is not allowed to be made after the DISA error counter has expired(MMC 500).

30 0-250 SEC This timer determines when a DISA call is disconnected by force when a called party does not answer.

30 1-250 MIN This timer defines the period before the system clears the incorrect passcode counter.

10 0-250 SEC This timer controls how long a DISA line will wait for further action from the caller.

2 1-250 SEC This timer controls how long a display is shown in the LCD and how long error tone is heard.

500 100-2500

MSEC

50 10-250

MSEC

This timer controls how long the door lock relay will be activated.

This timer controls the time before a call is answered by the door phone.

30 1-250 SEC This timer controls the duration of ringing at the door ring destination before automatically cancelling.

45 0-250 SEC This timer controls how long a call is held exclusively at a station before recalling.

2-142



(continued)

Timer Name

FIRST DIGIT TIME

HOK FLASH MAX TM

HOK FLASH MIN TM

HOOK OFF TIME

HOOK ON TIME

INQUIRY RELEASE

INTER DIGIT TIME

ISDN INT DGT TM

KMMC LOCK OUT TM

LCR ADVANCE TIME

LCR INTER DIGIT

LONG KEY DETECT

LONG KEY REPEAT

MCL DELAY TIME


10 1-250 SEC This timer controls how long the system will wait for dialling to begin before dropping the dial tone and returning the you to error tone.

120 20-2500

MSEC

This timer monitors the duration of a hookswitch flash to ensure that the flash is valid and not a line noise or an accidental hookswitch bounce LONGEST duration.

80 20-2500

MSEC

100

200

20-2500

MSEC

20-2500

MSEC

This timer monitors the duration of a hookswitch flash to ensure that the flash is valid and not a line noise or an accidental hookswitch bounce SHORTEST duration.

This timer controls the time before dial tone is sent to a single line station.

This timer sets the minimum amount of time that the system will recognize as an SLT hang up.

30 1-250 SEC This timer monitors the duration of the interaction of the Soft button to determine when to return the LCD back to a normal status. This timer affects only display phones.

10 1-250 SEC This timer controls the grace period between dialling valid digits before dropping the call and returning you back to error tone.

7 1-15 SEC This timer controls the grace period between dialling valid digits and the end of the dialling string on an ISDN call.

30 10-50 SEC This timer controls the grace period between programming actions while in a programming session. The timer automatically returns the system to secure programming status.

5 1-250 SEC This timer controls the time before selecting the next allowable route when a station is allowed to route advance.

5 1-250 SEC This timer controls the grace period between dialling valid digits before accessing a trunk.

600 0-2500

MSEC

This timer controls the time a key must be held down before the key press is repeated.

300 0-2500

MSEC

4 0-9 SEC

This timer controls the time between repeated digits on a long key press.

This timer controls the time when the system should start transmitting Authorisation Code after sending MCL access code(Cable& Wireless 131 access). Available in UK only.


2-143

CHAPTER 2.


Timer Name

MS LED ON TIME

OFF HOOK RING INT

OHVA ANSWER TIME

PAGE TIME OUT

PAGE TONE TIME

PARK RECALL TIME

AP-MMC LOCK TIME

PERI UCD REPORT

POWER DOWN TIME

RECALL

DISCONNECT

RECALL WAIT TIME

ROUTE OPTIMISE

SMDR START /DP

SMDR START /DTMF

SYS HOLD RECALL

(continued)


5 1-10 SEC This timer controls the duration a Manual Signalling key will remain on after use.

15 1-250 SEC This timer controls the time between ring bursts to a user who has a camped-on call.

10 1-250 SEC This timer controls the time allowed to answer an OHVA call before automatic rejection.

20 1-250 SEC This timer controls the duration of a page announcement.

500 100-2500

MSEC

This timer controls the duration of tone burst heard over the page prior to the page announcement.

45 0-250 SEC This timer controls how long a call is parked before recalling to the call park originator.

5 1-60 MIN This timer monitors the PCMMC activity, drops the link if no action is created by

PCMMC and returns the system back to secure program status.

5 3-99 SEC

2000 500-9900

MSEC

This timer determines the interval between periodic UCD reports provided to an SIO port.

This timer monitors the power to the ROM pack to begin shutdown status.

2 1-250 MIN This is the time an attendant recall will ring before being disconnected.

15 0-250 SEC This is the time any recall(hold or transfer) continues to recall at your station before it recalls to the operator.

5 0-250 SEC When a call is made via Q-SIG signalling, route optimization is activated after this time.

30 1-250 SEC This grace period timer starts SMDR recording for rotary dialing.

15 1-250 SEC This grace period timer starts SMDR recording for touchtone dialling. This timer also controls the LCD duration timer on the phones. The duration time displayed and the SMDR time duration will be the same.

45 0-250 SEC This timer determines the time calls can be left on hold before recalling to the holding station. This is a system-wide timer. Setting the timer to 000 means that no recalling will take place.

2-144



(continued)

Timer Name

TRANSFER RECALL

TRK AUTOMOH DISC

TSW CONN. DELAY

UCDS AUDIO ALARM

UCDS VISUAL ALARM

VOIP RE-ROUTE TM


20 0-250 SEC This timer determines how long transferred calls ring before recalling. This is a systemwide timer.

60 1-250 SEC When set to ON, incoming trunk calls are connected to MOH automatically after the

DISA ANSWR timer(MMC 503) expires. In this case the caller hears MOH. If the TRK

AUTOMOH DISC timer expires before the call is answered, the call is disconnected.

0 0-10 SEC When an incoming trunk makes an outgoing call to another trunk, the system connects the voice path after this time.

0 0-990 SEC When an SVMi-20 card is installed and the digital

UCD package enabled, this counter determines the maximum number of seconds a call has been waiting at the UCD group before the UCD group’s SUPV key begins to flash along with an audio alarm. For more UCD alarm conditions, see MMC 500.

0 0-250 SEC When an SVMi-20 card is installed and the digital UCD package enabled, this counter determines the maximum number of seconds a call at the UCD group before the UCD group’s SUPV key begins to flash as an alarm. For more UCD alarm conditions, see

MMC 500.

15 0-25 SEC If an outgoing call made via a VoIP trunk does not receive an acknowledgement message from the called party within this time, the call is treated as failed.

When timers value is ‘0’

Some timers are disabled when their value is set to ‘0’.

DEFAULT DATA

SEE DESCRIPTION

SOME TIMERS DEPEND ON COUNTRY


2-145

CHAPTER 2.


ACTION DISPLAY


Display shows first timer value:

2) Press Volume button to select timer and press


3) Enter new value using keypad; if valid, system returns to step 2 with new value.


OR


AA INT DGT TIME

05 SEC

Æ

KMMC LOCK OUT TM

060 SEC

Æ

KMMC LOCK OUT TM

060 SEC

Æ250

RELATED ITEMS

NONE

2-146



[502] STATION-WIDE TIMERS

Allows certain station timer values to be changed on a per-station basis or for all stations.

No Item Description

0 NO ANS FWD This timer controls how long the station will ring before Forward on No

Answer takes place.(1-250 sec)

1 DTMF DUR. This timer governs the duration of DTMF digits which are transmitted to an external VMS system port. This can be used when a VMS system fails to recognise the default DTMF digit duration being transmitted from the

SLT port.(100-9900 ms)

2 F-DGT DELY This timer will be valuable for the system administrator to insert a suitable delay before generating DTMF digits for In-Band integration.(100-

9900 ms)

3 OFFHK SEL. This timer controls the grace period before placing an internal/external call as programmed in MMC 306.(0-250 sec)

4 EFWD DELAY This timer controls the External Call Forward feature which will allow a station to ring before the call is placed on external call forwarding.

(1-250 sec)

5 CC RNG DLY If a station does not answer an incoming call within this time, other stations with a CC key for that station will ring.

CONDITIONS

NONE

DEFAULT DATA

NO ANS FWD: 015 SEC

DTMF DUR: 100 MSEC

F-DGT DELY: 600 MSEC

OFFHK SEL: 008 SEC

EFWD DELAY: 010 SEC

CC RNG DLY: 010 SEC


2-147

CHAPTER 2.


ACTION DISPLAY


Display shows:


OR


OR

Select all stations and press Right Soft button.

[201] NO ANS FWD

015 SEC

Æ

[205] NO ANS FWD

015 SEC

Æ_

3) Enter new value(must be three digits) via dial keypad.(e.g., 020)

System will return to step 2.

4) Dial timer number from above list.(e.g., 1)

OR



5) Enter new timer value.(must be four digits, e.g.,

0200)

System returns to step 2.


OR


[ALL] NO ANS FWD

015 SEC

Æ_

[205] NO ANS FWD

015 SEC

Æ020

[205] DTMF DUR.

0100 MS

Æ_

[205] DTMP DUR.

0100 MS

Æ0200

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 102

MMC 306

CALL FORWARD


2-148



[503] TRUNK-WIDE TIMERS

Allows certain trunk timer values to be changed on a per-trunk basis or for all trunks.

No

00

01

02

03

04

05

06

07

08

09

10

11

12

Item Description

ANS.BAK TM ANSWER BACK TIME. This timer is used for certain types of E & M signalling and does not affect normal

CO lines.

CLEARING This timer ensures that a call is fully disconnected at the CO by preventing CO access outgoing or receiving incoming ring between a disconnect and the expiration of this timer.

CO SUPV TM CO SUPERVISION TIME. this is the minimum length of loop open disconnect received from the

CO that will be seen as a valid hang up on the system.

DTMF DUR. DTMF DURATION. This is the length of the DTMF digits that will be sent to the CO on this line.

F-DGT DELY First-DIGIT DELAY. This is the length of time the system will wait for CO line conditions to stabilize after seizure before sending DTMF digits.

FLASH TIME This is the duration of the momentary open sent on a circuit when FLASH key is pressed.

NO RING TM This is the length of time the system will wait after detecting a ring burst on a line before deciding the call has disconnected.

PAUSE TIME This is the length of time the system will wait before sending the next digit for a pause in a speed dial bin.

PRS DET TM This means the duration of PRS signal pulse. If the

PRS signal is reversed when opposite party is answered and maintain the status before the opposite party disconnect the call, the PRS DET TM must be set to 0.

RNG DET TM RING DETECT TIME. This is the minimum length of ring signal the system will regard as a valid ring.

WINK TIME This is the duration of the acknowledgment signal that the system will send on an E&M circuit

MF/DP INT This is the interval between sending digit. In case of

DTMF signal, over the 500ms will be serviced as

100 ms.

MFR DLY TM This is a delay time to allocate the MFR after incoming trunk is detected. This is to prevent the wrong detection of DTMF signal by noise.

Range

0-2500 MSEC

100-9900 MSEC

10-2500 MSEC

100-9900 MSEC

100-9900 MSEC

20-2500 MSEC

1-25 SEC

1-25 SEC

0-2500 MSEC

10-2500 MSEC

100-300 MSEC

100-9900 MSEC

0-25 SEC


2-149

CHAPTER 2.


(continued)


13

14

DISA ANSWR This is a delay time to answer the DISA trunk call or to answer the trunk when TRK AUTO ANSWER is set to ON(MMC400).

CONN DELAY This is the delay time to connect a voice path when users make outgoing calls via a loop trunk. This is to prevent users hearing noise when the loop trunk is seized.

DEFAULT DATA

ANS.BAK TM: 0600 MSEC

CLEARING: 2000 MSEC

CO SUPV TM: 0400 MSEC

DTMF DUR.: 0100 MSEC

F-DGT DELY: 0600 MSEC

FLASH TIME: 0090 MSEC

NO RING TM: 04 SEC

PAUSE TIME: 03 SEC

PRS DET TM: 0000 MSEC

RNG DET TM: 0300 MSEC

WINK TIME: 200 MSEC

MF/DP INT: 0800 MSEC

MFR DLY TIME: 00 SEC

DISA ANSWR: 01 SEC

CONN DELAY: 0000 MSEC

Range

0-9 SEC

0-2500 MSEC

ACTION DISPLAY


Display shows:


OR



OR

Select all trunks.

3) Dial timer number from the list.

OR

Press Volume button to select timer and press


4) Enter new timer value.(must be four digits, e.g., 0200)


[701] ANS.BAK TM

0600 MS

Æ

[704] ANS.BAK TM

0600 MS

Æ

[ALL] ANS.BAK TM

0600 MS

Æ_

[704] DTMF DUR.

0100 MS

Æ_

[704] DTMF DUR.

0100 MS

Æ 0200

2-150



OR


RELATED ITEMS

NONE



2-151

CHAPTER 2.


[504] PULSE MAKE/BREAK RATIO

Allows the ability to change the value of pulses per second and the duration of the make/break time. This will only affect rotary dial trunks.

No

0

1

Item

MAKE/BREAK RATIO

PULSE PER SECOND

Description

Make/Break ratio of dial pulse(01-99)

Number of dial pulses per second(10 or 20)

DEFAULT DATA

MAKE/BREAK: 33 MAKE

PULSES PER SECOND: 10 PPS

ACTION DISPLAY


Display shows:

2) Dial 0 or 1 for option.

OR

Press Volume button for selection and press


3) Dial new value.



OR


MAKE/BREAK RATIO

33 MAKE

Æ

PULSE PER SECOND

10 PPS

Æ_

PULSE PER SECOND

10 PPS

Æ 20

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 402 TRUNK DIAL TYPE

2-152



[505] ASSIGN DATE AND TIME

Allows the system date and time to be set. This will set the system-wide clock.

Type Description Range

YY Year 00-99

MM Month 01-12

DD Date 01-31

W Day 0-6(0: SUN, 1: MON, 2: TUE, 3: WED, 4: THU, 5: FRI, 6: SAT)

HH Hour 00-23

MM Minute 00-59

DEFAULT DATA

NONE

ACTION DISPLAY


Display shows:

2) Enter new time and date using above table.


3) Verify time and date.

Re-enter if necessary.


OR


OLD:0111095:0901

NEW:YYMMDDW:HHMM

OLD:0111095:0901

NEW:0111121:1445

OLD:0111121:1445

NEW:YYMMDDW:HHMM

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 861 SYSTEM OPTIONS(AUTO UPDATE TIME)


2-153

CHAPTER 2.


[506] TONE CADENCE

Provides the ability to customize the tone cadence on a system-wide basis. The system provides 11 types of tone and three types of tone provided from Central Office or a PBX system can be detected.

When changing the MMC [506]

MMC [506] should not be changed from the default levels without the assistance of the local SAMSUNG distributor.


00 BUSY TONE The called station is busy.

01 CONFM/BARGE A feature has been successfully activated/cleared or a Barge-In with

Tone has been performed.

02 DIAL TONE The system is ready to interpret key presses/dialled digits.

03 DND/NO MORE The called station is in DND or has no free CALL buttons.

04 ERROR TONE An error has been made.

05 HOLD/CAMPON This is the system generated hold tone.

06 MSGWAT TONE This is the tone heard at an SLT with a message waiting.

07 RGBACK TONE The called station is ringing.

08 RING TONE

09 TRANSFER

TONE

This is the tone heard from a ROP device or Loud Bell when these devices are called.

This is the tone heard when the transfer button is pressed or an SLT hook flashes.

10 DID RNGBACK This is the tone heard by the outside party when they dial a DID number.

11 CO BUSY This is used to detect the busy tone provided from Central Office or a PBX system.

12 CO RINGBACK This is used to detect the ring back tone provided from Central Office or

PBX system.

13 CO DIAL This is used to detect the dial tone provided from Central Office or PBX system.

DEFAULT DATA

(unit: milliseconds)

TONE

BUSY TONE

CONFIRM/BARGE-IN

DIAL TONE

ON

500

200

OFF ON

500

200

CONTINUOUS

500

200

OFF

500

5000

2-154



TONE

DND/NO MORE TONE

ERROR TONE

HOLD/CAMP-ON TONE

RING BACK TONE

ON

250

500

500

OFF

250

500

3500

ON

250

500

500


OFF

250

500

3500

400 200 400 2000

1000 3000 1000 3000

100 100 100 100 TRANSFER TONE

CO BUSY TONE

CO RINGBACK TONE

CO DIAL TONE

350

400

350

200

CONTINUOUS

350

400

ACTION DISPLAY

350

2000


Display shows:

2) Dial tone number from above list.(00-13, e.g., 09)

OR

Press Volume button to select tone, press Left Soft button and advance to step 3.

BUSY TONE

INTERRUPT TONE

TRANSFER TONE

INTERRUPT TONE

3) Dial tone option 0 for CONTINUOUS or 1 for IN-

TERRUPT.

OR

Press Volume button to select tone control and press

Right Soft button to advance step 4.

OR


4) Dial new value for interrupt times.

(must be four digits)

Press Right Soft button advances cursor and press Left Soft button retreats cursor.

If valid entry, system returns to step 2.


OR


TRANSFER TONE

INTERRUPT TONE

TRANSFER TONE:0100

9900 0100 9900

RELATED ITEMS

NONE


2-155

CHAPTER 2.


[507] ASSIGN RING PLAN TIME

Use this MMC to program Ring Plans time settings. Ring Plans provide six separate ringing destinations based on day of the week and time of day. The start time within a plan is the time the system will switch from one ringing destination to the next. The end time is the time the system will switch from that plan to the previous plan.

An RPO(Ring Plan Override) button is not needed as the system will switch automatically; however, it is helpful to have a dedicated button so the status can be manually changed if needed. If a ring plan has no time entry the ring plan defaults to ring plan 1. The ring plans correlate with all MMCs that program ring or termination destinations and station and trunk COS.

The following example may be useful when assigning ring plan times:

RING PLAN Start Time End Time

(MON: 1)

(MON: 2)

(MON: 3)

(MON: 4)

(MON: 5)

(MON: 6)

ST: 0000

ST: 0800

ST: 1000

ST: 1200

ST: 1300

ST: 1400

END: 23:59

END: 2200

END: 2000

END: 1800

END: 1600

END: 1500

Using a 24-hour clock in the example above, notice that the END time is within the same

24-hour period as the START time. The system will stay in the last active Ring Plan from the previous day until the end time which is 23:59. Monday starts Ring Plan 1 at 00:00.

The system will stay in Ring Plan 1 until Ring Plan 2 starts(08:00) and will stay in Ring

Plan 2 until Ring Plan 3 starts(10:00), and so on. As each ring Plan start it will override the previous Ring Plan.

If a Ring Plan expires and there are no additional Ring Plans set, the system will default to the Ring Plan with a time that extends past the expired Ring Plan time.

CONDITIONS

y y y

When using a Samsung built-in Voice Mail card that only has day/night mode, the day/night must be set for each RING PLAN in MMC 758, VM DAY/NIGHT.

Ring Plans must be programmed in sequence.(RP 1, 2, 3, 4, etc.) A Ring Plan cannot be omitted.(i.e. you cannot program RP 1, 2, 5, etc.)

A higher numbered Ring Plan cannot have a START time which begins before a lower numbered Ring Plan.

2-156



Ring Plan 1

Ring Plan 1 is the default Ring Plan for each day. If no Ring Plan destination is entered, the operator group is the default destination.

DEFAULT DATA

START: NONE

END: NONE

ACTION DISPLAY


Display shows:

2) Dial day number.(0-6, e.g., 3 for Weds)

OR

Press Volume button to select day.

Press Right Soft button to advance cursor to step 3.

3) Dial ring plan number.(1-6, e.g., 2)

OR

Press Volume button to select day.

Press Right Soft button to advance cursor to step 4.

4) Dial start time.(e.g., 1030)

If valid, cursor moves to end time.

Enter end time.

If valid, system returns to step 2.

Begin again.


OR


RING PLAN (SUN:1)

ST: END:

RING PLAN (WED:1)

ST: END:

RING PLAN (WED:2)

ST:_ END:

RING PLAN (WED:1)

ST:1030 END:1800

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 722

MMC 723




2-157

CHAPTER 2.


[508] CALL COST

Set the Call Cost attributes generated by the system during a call. This information can be displayed on the phone during a call or as an SMDR record.

No

0

1

Display Description

UNIT COST PER MP When the system is installed to receive metering pulses on a C. O. outgoing call. It is used for generating total call cost by multiplying it by the number of pulses. Allows a maximum value of 9999.(Currency is PENCE or ECENTS depending on USE EURO option setting in MMC 210.)

CALL COST RATE This generates additional call cost calculated by multiplying this rate by the original call cost. Ranges from 100 to

255.

CALL COST

Changing this value when there is a call in progress may result in an inaccurate call cost. This MPD facility requires the Meter Pulse Detection version of the trunk card.

DEFAULT DATA

UNIT COST PER MP: 0200 PENCE, CALL COST RATE: 100 PERCENT

ACTION DISPLAY


Display shows:

2) Dial 0 or 1.

OR

Press Volume button to select and press Right Soft button to move cursor.

3) Enter new value.(e.g., 110)



OR


RELATED ITEMS

MMC 110

UNIT COST PER MP

0200 PENCE

™

CALL COST RATE

100 %

™

CALL COST RATE

110 %

™

STATION ON/OFF(CALL COST OPTION)

2-158



[510] SLI RING CADENCE

Provides the ability to customize the ring cadence for single line ports on a system-wide basis. There are five cadences available.


MMC [510] should not be changed from the default levels without the assistance of the local SAMSUNG distributor.

No

3

4

1

2

5


STN RING

TRK RING

This is the cadence intercom calls will ring at.

This is the cadence trunk calls will ring at.

DOOR RING This is the cadence door phone calls will ring at.

ALM RING This is the cadence alarm reminder calls will ring at.

CBK RING This is the cadence callbacks will ring at.

DEFAULT DATA


Item ON OFF ON OFF

ACTION DISPLAY


Display shows:

2) Dial cadence number from above list.(e.g., 3)

OR

Press Volume button to select

Press Left Soft button and advance to step 3.

3) Dial new value for interrupt times.

(must be four digits)

Press Right Soft button to advance cursor.

Press Left Soft button to retreat cursor.


1:STN RING :0400

0200 0400 3000

3:DOOR RING:0400

0100 0400 2000

3:DOOR RING:0100

9900 0100 9900


2-159

CHAPTER 2.



OR


RELATED ITEMS

NONE

2-160



[511] MSG WAITING LAMP CADENCE

This MMC defines the cadence(flash rate) of single line telephone message waiting lamps on phones connected to systems with an MWSLI card. There are two choices for the MW lamp cadence: continuous and interrupted.

No

0

1


INTERRUPTED The MW lamp will flash at a rate determined by the timer settings.

The shortest ‘on’ time is 100 ms and the longest ‘on’ time is

3000 ms. The timer is adjusted in 100 ms increments.

CONTINUOUS When an MWSLI port has a message, the lamp will be lit steady.

CONDITIONS

Systems with MWSLI cards only.

DEFAULT DATA

INTERRUPT LED: 1000MS-ON 1000MS-OFF

ACTION DISPLAY


Display shows:

2) Press 0 or 1 to select CADENCE.

OR


Press Right Soft button to advance step 3.

3) Dial new values for interrupt times.(four digits)

MW LAMP CADENCE

INTERRUPT LED

MW LAMP CADENCE

INTERRUPT LED

MW LAMP CADENCE

2000 2000

Press Right Soft button to move cursor back.


Press Left Soft button to move cursor back.



OR


RELATED ITEMS

NONE


2-161

CHAPTER 2.


[512] HOLIDAY ASSIGNMENT

This MMC defines up to 60 holiday dates throughout the year. The system will override the normal ring plan for these days and remain in the ring plan associated with the holiday.

Dates are entered in a month-day format: for example, July 4th would be 0704. One ring plan applies to all holidays.

DEFAULT DATA

NO HOLIDAY ASSIGNED

FOLLOWS RING PLAN 1

ACTION DISPLAY


Display shows the Ring Plan:

2) Press Right Soft button advance cursor.

Press Volume button to select a Ring Plan.

OR

Use the dial keypad to select a Ring Plan.(e.g., 2)

3) Press Right Soft button to enter and advance cursor.

RING PLAN

FOLLOW 1

RING PLAN

FOLLOW 2

4) Press Volume button to scroll to assign Holiday and press Right Soft button to advance cursor.

5) Press Volume button to select entry and press Right

Soft button enter and advance cursor.

6) Dial date for holiday using the dial keypad.

(e.g., 0704)


OR


RELATED ITEMS

MMC 507 ASSIGN RING PLAN TIME

RING PLAN

FOLLOW 2

ASSIGN HOLIDAY

01:

ASSIGN HOLIDAY

05:

ASSIGN HOLIDAY

05:0704

2-162



[513] HOTEL TIMER

This MMC is where the Hotel timers for guest-rooms are set. These are system-wide timers that affect all rooms. Refer to your Hotel documentation for more details.

No Item

0 CHECK OUT TIME

1 ROOM CLEAN TIME

2 CHECK IN END TM

Description

If a room is occupied after the checkout time, an additional day’s room charge will be automatically added to the room bill.(If a room is flagged as Occupied and HOLD then the additional day’s room charge will not be added. Setting a room status to HOLD allows a late checkout to be performed.)

This is the time each day that the system will flag all occupied rooms as NEEDS CLEANING.

This is used to decide if an additional day’s room charge will be automatically added to the room bill when the first Check Out Time is reached. For example, if you set the Check In End time as 5 am, all rooms checked in before 5 am will be automatically charged an extra day at the Check Out Time(which might be, say, 11 am). Rooms checked in after 5 am will not be charged extra until the next day, if still occupied at the Check Out Time.

CONDITIONS

This function can be used only when the Hotel function is enabled in MMC 813, HOTEL

OPERATION.

DEFAULT DATA

NONE

ACTION DISPLAY


Display shows:

2) Select the timer using the Volume buttons.

3) Enter new time using 24-hour clock format system returns to step 2.


OR


CHECK OUT TIME

HH:MM : :

ROOM CLEAN TIME

HH:MM : :

ROOM CLEAN TIME

HH:MM : 11:30

RELATED ITEMS

NONE


2-163

CHAPTER 2.


[514] TONE SOURCE

This program can assign an external tone source(e.g., a music source) instead of the normal system tone(TONE) for certain calls. The tones that can be changed are:

No Type

DEFAULT DATA

TONE

ACTION DISPLAY


Display shows:

2) Enter the tone number 0-6.(e.g., 1)

OR

Press Volume button to select tone number and press Right Soft button to move cursor.

3) Dial a number for external tone source.(e.g., 3762)

OR

Press Volume button to select tone number and press Right Soft button to store.


OR


RELATED ITEMS

NONE

BUSY TONE

TONE

DIAL TONE

TONE

DIAL TONE

3762

2-164



[515] DAYLIGHT ASSIGNMENT

Defines up to 10 summertime periods. The system time will automatically increase by an hour at 2 a.m. on the assigned Start date and will automatically decrease by an hour at 3 a.m. on the assigned End date.

Dates are entered as follows:

NO= entry number 01–10

YY= year(last 2 digits, e.g., 05 for 2005)

START = start date(MMDD, e.g., 0801 is 1st August)

END = end date(MMDD, e.g., 0910 is 10th September)

For example, the entry might be:

NO : YY : START : END

01 : 05 : 3103 : 2710

DEFAULT DATA

NONE

ACTION DISPLAY


Display shows:

2) Dial 01–10 to select entry number.(e.g., 01)

OR


Soft button to move cursor.

3) Enter dates as described above.


OR



01 : : :


01 :_ : :


01 : 05 : 3103 : 2710

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 505

MMC 861


SYSTEM OPTIONS(AUTO UPDATE TIME)


2-165

CHAPTER 2.


[600] ASSIGN OPERATOR GROUP

Used to assign an operator group for each ring plan.

DEFAULT DATA

RING PLAN 1-6: 500

ACTION DISPLAY


Display shows:

2) Dial the ring plan number.(1~6)

OR

Press Right Soft button to advance the cursor.

3) Dial the group number.

OR

Press Volume button to select group and press

Right Soft button.


OR


OPERATOR GROUP

1:500 2:500

OPERATOR GROUP

1:500 2:500

OPERATOR GROUP

1:501 2:500

RELATED ITEMS


2-166



[601] ASSIGN STATION GROUP

This MMC is used to build all station groups. There are 40 programmable groups available.

The options for setting up these groups are as follows:

No Option

0 TYPE

Description

This is the type of group you are creating and can be one of the following:

0 NORMAL: Used to assign stations in a ring group. The members can be stations, common bell contacts or Ring over Page relays.

1 VMAA: Used to group a number of voice mail port extensions. These must have been defined in MMC 207 as VMAA ports or they cannot be entered here..

2 UCD: Used to build a UCD group. The system will support two methods of UCD:

TYPE 1 UCD

The group OVERFLOW/N-ANS destination(see below) is defined as an SLT port to which you must connect some type of announcement device to play to callers while they are on hold.

Please note that this type of UCD group has the following limitations. a) The announcement device must be able to terminate the announcement with a hook-flash and a transfer back to the UCD group. b) Only one caller at a time can hear the announcement. c) Each caller connected to the announcement must hear the announcement in its entirety. d) It is possible that a new caller may ‘jump ahead’ in the queue if a previous caller is currently connected to the announcement device.

TYPE 2 UCD

The group OVERFLOW/N-ANS destination(see below) is defined as an AA port or group. This will only work if an AA card has been installed in the system.

The digital announcer in the AA card will supply two recorded announcements to callers in queue. The first announcement is played only once, the second announcement will repeat for as long as the caller is in queue.

This type of UCD group has the following advantages: a) No external device need be installed to provide an announcement. b) Multiple callers can hear the announcement(s) simultaneously. c) Callers hearing the announcement will be transferred to a free

UCD group member(agent) as soon as the agent becomes available.


2-167

CHAPTER 2.


No

0

Option

TYPE(contd)

1 RING MODE

(continued)

Description

d) The callers place in queue is always maintained.

Additional programming for this type of UCD group is in MMC

607. There is a maximum of 20 UCD groups available on a system due to availability of system resources.

3 AA: This is used to group a number of AA ports. An Auto Attendant(AA) card must be installed in the system to do this.

4 BI-VMS: This is the voice mail group for the Built-In Voice Mail card.

5 MESSAGE: Used to group a number of extensions to serve as a message desk or message group. When one of the stations in this type of group leaves a message to another station the messaged station will return the message to the message group so any member can answer the call. If a station is a member of more than one message group, then any message indications made by that station would be for the first numerical message group they are a member of. It is not recommended to program stations in to multiple station groups.

6 S0 STN GRP: This is used to group a number of S0 stations for a video conference.

7 VMSUCD GRP: This is used to collect UCD queuing prompts from the SVMi-20. The group members will be the VM ports.

Each group can have one of the following ring modes. This will decide how calls are placed to the group.

0 SEQUENTIAL: The stations listed as ‘members’(see below) will be called on a ‘first available’ basis. Calls will first go to the first member; if the first member is busy, calls will go to the second member; if the second member is busy, calls will go to the third member, and so on. This type of group is useful for placing the bulk of the incoming calls with a selected individual, and other members only getting the calls when that member is busy. The number of members allowed for a sequential group is 48.

1 DISTRIBUTED: The first call will go to the first member, the second call will go to the second member, the third call will go to the third member. This type of group is useful for evenly distributing the call among all group members. The number of members allowed for a distributed group is 48.

2 UNCONDITIONAL: Calls are placed to all group members simultaneously.

This reduces the number of members of the groups to 32. If a group member is busy, they can receive off-hook ring if defined in MMC

300. This ring mode option is not available for UCD or VMAA groups.

The SGR INC BUSY option is not available for unconditional ring mode.

2-168



(continued)


2 OVERFLOW

3 GROUP

4

TRANSFER

NEXT PORT

This is the timer value that will cause unanswered calls to a group to begin also ringing the NEXT PORT(see below) after this timer has elapsed. If set to 000, no overflow will take place.

This is a timer that will determine how long Trunk Line calls transferred to the group will ring at the group before recalling. If set to 000, no recall will take place.

This is the station or group number that callers will also ring at if the OVER-

FLOW feature has been programmed. The OVERFLOW DESTINATION can be defined as:

1 COMMON BELL There is a common bell port on each MIS card.

2 RING OVER PAGE The ROP port can be defined as the NEXT port.

3 STATION OR STATION GROUP. Any station or station group can be defined as the NEXT port.

5

6

MEMBER

NEXT HUNT

List all members that are to be in the group. Up to 32 members for the system are allowed in each group, but stations can be assigned to multiple station groups.

The length of time a call will ring at a station before it hunts to the next group member.

7 GROUP BUSY When this option is set to ON, a busy signal will be sent to the caller if all group members are busy. When this option is set to OFF, the ring back tone is sent to the caller even if all group members are busy. UCD is an exception to this rule. This option only works when MMC 210 SGR

INC BUSY is set to OFF. When MMC 210 SGR INC BUSY is set to ON, all station groups will follow this setting.

9 ALLOUT NEXT If all members are log-out, the call would be send to next port.

10 RBT MSG If set ON, coloring service can be used by using svmi message.

Calls to a group

Calls to a group do not follow the call forwarding instructions of any station in the group.


2-169

CHAPTER 2.


CONDITIONS

y y

A station can be assigned to all station groups. A station group can accommodate up to

32 members.

To enable off-hook ring for incoming calls to busy members, set OFFHOOK RING in

MMC 300, CUSTOMER ON/OFF PER STATION, to ON. Even in this case, however, the off-hook ring is enabled only when the RING MODE is UNCONDITIONAL.

DEFAULT DATA

NORMAL GROUP

ACTION DISPLAY


Display shows:

2) Dial group number.(e.g., 505)

OR

Press Volume button to select group and


3) Dial feature option number.(0-7, e.g., 0)

OR

Press Volume button to scroll options and press


4) DIAL group type.(e.g., 1)

OR

Press Volume button to make selection and press Left Soft button to move cursor to TYPE.

5) Dial feature option number.(0-6, e.g., 1)

OR

Press Volume button to scroll options and press Right Soft button to move cursor.

6) Dial ring option.(0-2, e.g., 0)

OR


Press Left Soft button to move cursor back to RING or press Right Soft button to return to step 2.

[501] STN.GROUP

TYPE:NORMAL GRP

[505] STN.GROUP

TYPE:NORMAL GRP

[505] STN GROUP

TYPE:VMAA GROUP

[505] STN GROUP

TYPE:VMAA GROUP

[505] STN GROUP

RING:DISTRIBUTE

[505] STN GROUP

RING:SEQUENTIAL

2-170



7) Dial next feature option and continue.

OR

Press Volume button to select option and press Right Soft button.

OR



OR


RELATED ITEMS

MMC 203

MMC 204

ASSIGN UA DEVICE

COMMON BELL CONTROL

[505] STN GROUP

RING:SEQUENTIAL


2-171

CHAPTER 2.


[602] STATION GROUP NAME

Allows the system administrator or technician to enter a name up to 11 characters to identify an individual station group.



DEFAULT DATA

NONE

ACTION DISPLAY


Display shows:

2) Dial group number.(e.g., 505)

OR

Press Volume button to make selection and press Left or Right Soft button to move cursor.

[500] SGR NAME

[505] SGR NAME

[505] SGR NAME

TELECOMS

4) Press Left or Right Soft button to return to step 2.

OR


OR


RELATED ITEMS

MMC 104

MMC 404

MMC 601

STATION NAME

TRUNK NAME


2-172



[603] ASSIGN TRUNK GROUP

Allows the assignment of trunks to a specific trunk group or to several trunk groups. This is useful in the programming of LCR when more than one trunk is to be in several dialling plans. There are two different modes of operation: (1) sequential and (2) distribute. There are 30 programmable trunk groups with up to 60 members per group.

Trunk group

One trunk can appear in more than one trunk group. If necessary, delete the trunk member from other groups to prevent accidental access.

DEFAULT DATA

ALL LOOP/ISDN TRUNKS: 9

ALL TIE TRUNKS: 801

ALL VOIP NETWORKING TRUNKS: 803

ALL VOIP H.323 TRUNKS: 804

ALL VOIP SIP TRUNKS: 805

ACTION DISPLAY


Display shows:

2) Enter valid trunk group.(e.g., 9)

OR



3) Press Right Soft button to change mode.

OR

Press Volume button to change mode to member.

4) Press Right Soft button to move cursor to number of member and enter valid member number

(e.g., 05) via dial keypad.

OR



[9] TRK GROUP

MODE:SEQUENTIAL

[9] TRK GROUP

MODE:SEQUENTIAL

[9] TRK GROUP

MEMBER 01:NONE

[9] TRK GROUP

MEMBER 05:NONE


2-173

CHAPTER 2.


5) Enter valid trunk number.(e.g., 729)

OR



6) Repeat steps 1-5 to remove trunk from group 9 if necessary.


OR


RELATED ITEMS

LCR PROGRAMMING

MMC 710

MMC 711

MMC 712

MMC 713

LCR DIGIT TABLE

LCR TIME TABLE

LCR ROUTE TABLE


VoIP PROGRAMMING

MMC 832

MMC 833

VoIP ACCESS CODE

VoIP IP TABLE

[9] TRK GROUP

MEMBER 01:729

2-174



[604] ASSIGN STATION TO PAGE ZONE

Allows the technician to assign a phone to any of the five internal paging zones. Each page zone can have up to 32 members. A phone may be assigned to more than one zone. Page zone(*) will page all external page zones as well as all phones that are members of page zone 0.

DEFAULT DATA

NO STATIONS ASSIGNED

ACTION DISPLAY


Display shows:

2) Enter the page zone number.(0-4, e.g., 3)

OR


3) Enter index number(e.g., 05) via dial keypad.

OR


4) Enter station number(e.g., 205) via dial keypad.

OR




OR


INT.PAGE ZONE(0)

MEMBER 01:NONE

INT.PAGE ZONE(3)

MEMBER 01:NONE

INT.PAGE ZONE(3)

MEMBER 05:NONE

INT.PAGE ZONE(3)

MEMBER 05:205

RELATED ITEMS

NONE


2-175

CHAPTER 2.


[605] ASSIGN EXTERNAL PAGE ZONE

Determines which relays will close when one of the four external page zones is accessed.

DEFAULT DATA

NONE

ACTION DISPLAY


Display shows first page zone:

2) Dial page zone number.(e.g., 6)

OR

Use Volume button to select desired page zone numbers and press Right Soft button to move the cursor.

3) Dial member number.(e.g., 3)

OR

Use Volume button to select member numbers and press Right Soft button to move the cursor.

OR


4) Dial relay number via dial keypad.(e.g., 3751) and press Right Soft button to return to step 2.

OR

Press Left Soft button to return to step 3 above.


OR


EXT. PAGE ZONE(5)

MEMBER 1 :NONE

EXT. PAGE ZONE(6)

MEMBER 1 :NONE

EXT. PAGE ZONE(6)

MEMBER 3 :NONE

EXT. PAGE ZONE(6)

MEMBER 3 :3751

RELATED ITEMS

NONE

2-176



[606] ASSIGN SPEED BLOCK

Provides a means of adding or deleting speed dial blocks to the system or an individual phone. With the ability to delete a block or blocks of speed dial, it will not be necessary to waste these on such items as voice mail, DPIMs or stations that do not require the ability to use speed dial. The Free List will show how many bins are left to be assigned.

A library of up to 200 speed dial numbers may be allocated as needed. The system list can have up to 50 numbers(or 95 numbers if set in MMC 861 SYSTEM OPTIONS) and each station can have up to 5 numbers. Speed dial numbers are assigned in blocks of 10. Each speed number may contain up to 24 digits.

DEFAULT DATA

SYSTEM: 200 ENTRIES

STATIONS: 1 BLOCK ASSIGNED

ACTION DISPLAY


Display shows:

2) Press Right Soft button to advance to next line.

OR

You can view BUSY LIST using Volume button.

3) Make a selection of SYSTEM or EXT using Volume button and press Right Soft button to advance cursor.

4) Enter desired extension number via dial keypad.

(e.g., 205)

OR



FREE LIST:20

SYSTEM:20

FREE LIST:20

SYSTEM:20

BUSY LIST:180

SYSTEM:20

FREE LIST:20

EXT201:1

FREE LIST:20

EXT205:1


2-177

CHAPTER 2.


5) Enter valid number for bins.

(e.g., 0-5 for EXT or 00-50 for SYSTEM)

OR


OR

Press Hold button to delete bin(s).


OR


RELATED ITEMS

MMC 105

MMC 106

MMC 705

MMC 706

STATION SPEED DIAL




FREE LIST:20

EXT205:5

2-178



[607] UCD OPTIONS

Sets up UCD options when an AA card has been installed. MMC 601 must have already been used to define a UCD group with an overflow destination of an AA port or group.

(A group is preferred over a port because a group allows multiple paths into the AA card and therefore has greater traffic handling capabilities.) When the group overflow timer in

MMC 601 expires, the caller will be routed to the AA card. It is here that the caller is played the UCD ‘FIRST MESSAGE’ and ‘SECOND MESSAGE’ while in queue. This will continue until an agent becomes free or the caller is transferred to a final destination.

The following program options apply:


00 FIRST MESSAGE

01 SECOND MESSAGE If no agent has become free after the UCD recall time(see UCD

Recall Time), the caller will be played the second message.

This message will be repeated for as long as the caller is in queue, at an interval specified in the UCD Recall timer below.

02 EXIT CODE

After the caller has overflowed from the UCD group, the first message will immediately play.

This message will only be played once for the caller.

While the caller is hearing a message(but not during MOH), the caller may dial the DTMF digit specified here and be transferred immediately to the final destination.(see Final Destination)

The exit code is optional and does not need to be used. If used, the first and second messages may be modified to provide instructions on its use.

03 RETRY COUNT The UCD program is designed to route a caller to a ‘final destination’ after a programmable number of ‘loops’ through the UCD message. The range of this counter is 0 to 99. 00 means that there is no retry counter and the caller will remain in the UCD queue until answered. Any non zero value will route a caller through the UCD loop that many times before going to the final destination. The UCD will route calls to the final destination immediately if all members of the group are either out of group or in

DND.

Example: If this counter is set to 02, callers reaching a busy group will hear the first UCD message, be placed on hold, hear the second UCD message, be placed on hold, and finally hear the second message again before being transferred to the final destination.


2-179

CHAPTER 2.


(continued)


04 FINAL DESTINATION This is the final destination for the caller if not answered by a

UCD agent.

This destination is only reached if(a) the caller dials an exit digit during a message or(b) the retry count has expired. The final destination can be a station number, a group number, a disconnect or another plan. Plans are entered by pressing button ‘A’ plus two digits 01-12. A disconnect is entered as a destination of

NONE.(Hold button)

If the final destination is a voice mail port, the port will receive a

FWD from UCD group integration message. The final destination will forward or overflow.

If the forward to destination is a voice mail port the port will receive FWD from UCD group integration message. If the final destination is not forwarded, the call will ring or camp on to the final destination indefinitely.

To ensure that you do not get a situation where all the call buttons are busy on the final destination it is advisable to make the final destination a group.(even if the group has only one station in it.)

05 RING NEXT TIME This timer must be shorter than the overflow timer in MMC 601.

If a higher value is entered, the display will show invalid entry. In the case where a UCD group has the ring next timer set at 000, an unanswered call will rotate evenly among all agents until it is answered. The UCD greetings will be heard during this routing process, but can be removed by defining the UCD messages in

MMC 607 as unrecorded message numbers. This will simulate a circular hunt group.

06 UCD RECALL TIME

07 MOH SOURCE

08 WRAP-UP TIME

After a caller has heard a UCD announcement, they will be placed on hold until an agent becomes available or the UCD recall timer expires. When the UCD recall timer expires, the caller will again hear the UCD announcement. The range is

00-99. The default is 10.

This option determines what Music-On-Hold source callers will be connected to between messages.

This option will make a UCD agent unavailable to receive additional UCD calls after hanging up from the last one. This is to allow agents to complete work associated with the previous call before the next call begins ringing. The range is 000-250. The default is 010.

2-180



(continued)


09 AUTO LOG OUT

10 ALLOUTÆFINAL

This YES/NO option determines if a station will automatically log out of the UCD group when the RING NEXT timer expires.

This setting will be ignored if the RING NEXT timer is set to 000.

This YES/NO option determines if calls forward to the UCD final destination when all stations are logged out of the UCD group.

If no UCD final destination is assigned then the call will disconnect.

11 AGENT PIN NO This YES/NO option determines if an agent is required to enter an Agent ID when logging on to this group. The Agent ID can be entered in MMC 717.

12 GROUP BUSY NEXT This YES/NO option determines if all agents are busy, specifies whether the next port is called immediately during overflow time.

DEFAULT DATA

FIRST MSG: 61

SECOND MSG: 62

EXIT CODE: NONE

RETRY COUNT: 03

FINAL DEST: 500

RING NEXT: 30 SEC

UCD RECALL: 10 SEC

MOH SOURCE: NONE

WRAP-UP: 10 SEC

AUTO LOG OUT: ON

ALL OUT TO FINAL: OFF

AGENT PIN NO: OFF

GROUP BUSY NEXT: OFF


2-181

CHAPTER 2.


ACTION DISPLAY


Display shows:

2) Press Volume button to select UCD group or dial group number.

OR

Press Left Soft button to position cursor under message number and enter new message.

OR

Press Right Soft button and advance to next option using the Volume buttons to select an option.

3) Press Right Soft button and advance to next option.

Use the Volume buttons to make a selection.

OR

Make a selection using the dial keypad.

4) Press Left Soft button to enter the selection and to return to step 1.

OR



OR


[530] UCD OPTION

FIRST MSG :61

[542] UCD OPTION

FIRST MSG :61

[530] UCD OPTION

FIRST MSG :25

[530] UCD GROUP

UCD RECALL:10 SEC

[530] UCD OPTION

UCD RECALL:10 SEC

[530] UCD OPTION

EXIT CODE :NONE

RELATED ITEMS


2-182



[608] ASSIGN REVIEW BLOCK

Provides a means of adding or deleting CID review blocks to an individual phone. With the ability to delete a block or blocks of CID review, it will not be necessary to waste these on items such as voice mail and DPIMs or phones that do not have displays. The free list will show how many bins are left to be assigned. The system has 1000 total bins. Each phone may be assigned a maximum of 50 bins.

DEFAULT DATA

PHONES: 10 BINS

ACTION DISPLAY



2) Enter desired EXT number.(e.g., 205)

OR


3) Enter valid number for bins.(e.g., 50)

OR


OR



OR


[201] REVIEW BLK

10:0060 FREE

[205] REVW BLOCK

10:0060 FREE

[205] REVW BLOCK

50:0010 FREE

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 119

MMC 312

MMC 725

CALLER ID DISPLAY

ALLOW CALLER ID

SMDR OPTIONS


2-183

CHAPTER 2.


[609] CALL LOG BLOCK

Provides a means of adding or deleting Call Log blocks for an individual phone. With the ability to delete blocks it will not be necessary to waste these on items such as voice mail and DPIMs or phones that do not have displays. The free list will show how many bins are left to be assigned. The system has 1000 total bins. Each phone may be assigned a maximum of 50 bins.

DEFAULT DATA

PHONES: 10 BINS

ACTION DISPLAY



2) Enter desired EXT number.(e.g., 205)

OR


3) Enter valid number for bins.(e.g., 50)

OR


OR



OR


[201] LOG BLOCK

10:0070 FREE

[205] LOG BLOCK

10:0070 FREE

[205] LOG BLOCK

50:0030 FREE

RELATED ITEMS

NONE

2-184



[611] ALLOW TEXT MESSAGING

This program allows stations to send text messages to other stations if they are busy or during an OHVA. Up to 20 stations can be allowed text messaging.

DEFAULT DATA

y

NOT USED(no text messaging allowed) y

ITP-5012L(Large LCD) keysets are automatically set to USED(text messaging allowed)

ACTION DISPLAY


Display shows:

2) Enter the number of a station.

[201] TMSG STN

NOT USED:100 FREE

[202] TMSG STN

OR


NOT USED:100 FREE

3) Specify whether text messaging will be used or not.

[202] TMSG STN

USED


OR


RELATED ITEMS

MMC 117 EDIT TEXT MESSAGE


2-185

CHAPTER 2.


[612] ALLOW GROUP CONFERENCE

This program allows a station to use the Group Conference call feature. Up to 20 stations can be allowed this feature. Each allowed station can have up to five pre-programmed conference groups.

CONDITIONS

This feature is only for Large LCD phones.(e.g., ITP-5012L, DS-5012L, WIP-5000M)

DEFAULT DATA

Large LCD phones are automatically set to allow this feature.(USED)

ACTION DISPLAY


Display shows:

2) Enter the number of a station.

OR


3) Specify whether Group Conference feature can be used or not.


OR


[201] CONF STN

NOT USED:100 FREE

[202] CONF STN

NOT USED :100 FREE

[205] CONF STN

USED

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 118 CONFERENCE GROUP

2-186



[614] STATION/TRUNK USE GROUP

This program allows you to assign stations to station use groups and trunks to trunk use groups. This is useful if you want to restrict calling between stations, outgoing calls through a trunk lines, or call answering.

CONDITIONS

Station use groups are numbered from 001 to 100, and trunk use groups from 101 to 200.

DEFAULT DATA

ALL STATIONS: 001

ALL TRUNKS: NONE

ACTION DISPLAY



2) Enter 0 if you want to set a station group.

Enter 1 if user want to set a trunk group.

OR



3) Enter number of station/trunk.

OR


4) Enter the number of the use group.

OR



OR


STATION GROUP

201 :001

TRUNK GROUP

701 : 101

TRUNK GROUP

702 : 101

TRUNK GROUP

702 : 101

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 304

MMC 317

MMC 428





2-187

CHAPTER 2.


[615] MGI GROUP

This program assigns designated MGI ports to specific services. This allows ‘grading’ of

MGI card(s) for traffic conditions. The MGI ports can be segregated into groups. Any entries made here may be ineffective if conflicting entries exist in MMC 616.


0

1

2

3

LOCAL ITP

PUB IP ITP

VOIP NTWK

PUB IP NTWK

This determines what MGI ports can be used with ITP phones across a private IP network.

This determines what MGI ports can be used with ITP phones on a public IP network.

This determines what MGI ports can be used for enhanced proprietary

Samsung VoIP networking between OfficeServ 7100 systems across a private IP network.

This determines what MGI ports can be used for enhanced proprietary

Samsung VoIP networking between OfficeServ 7100 systems on a public IP network.

4

5

VOIP TRUNK

PUB IP TRK

This determines what MGI ports can be used as industry-standard

H.323 or SIP VoIP trunks for communications across a private network

This determines what MGI ports can be used as industry-standard

H.323 or SIP VoIP trunks for communications on a public network.

6 MGI3 NEEDED This determines what MGI ports can be used for T.38 facsimile communications across a private network.

7 PUB IP MGI3 This determines what MGI ports can be used for T.38 facsimile communications on a public network.

8 ITP PAGED This determines what MGI ports can be used with station page to ITP phones across a private IP network.

The MGI ports have two selection modes: Sequential or Distributed. The members for each selection are the actual ports on the MGI card(s).

DEFAULT DATA

LOCAL ITP: MGI1, MGI2, MGI3

PUB IP ITP: MGI2, MGI3

VOIP NTWK: MGI2, MGI3

PUB IP NTWK: MGI2, MGI3

VOIP TRUNK: MGI2, MGI3

PUB IP TRK: MGI2, MGI3

MGI3 NEEDED: MGI3

PUB IP MGI3: MGI3

ITP PAGED: MGI1, MGI2, MGI3

2-188



ACTION DISPLAY


Display shows the first available option:

2) Press Volume button to select an user type.


3) Press Volume button to select an option and press Right Soft button to move cursor.

4) Press Volume button to select and press Right

Soft button to store data and return to step 1.


OR


USER: LOCAL ITP

MODE:SEQUENTIAL

USER: LOCAL ITP

MODE:SEQUENTIAL

USER: LOCAL ITP

MODE:SEQUENTIAL

USER: LOCAL ITP

MODE:SEQUENTIAL

RELATED ITEMS

NONE


2-189

CHAPTER 2.


[616] MGI USER

This program selects which specific MGI ports will be dedicated on a per-port basis for IP station/trunk devices. If this MMC is not used, allocation of MGI ports will be controlled by MMC 615. By defining dedicated MGI port usage, the IP station/trunk selected will always use the port programmed. MGI ports can be assigned for digital stations

(2XX~2XXX), private and public ITP stations(32XX), VoIP Networking trunks(83XX),

H.323 trunks(84XX), SIP trunks(85XX) and MGI3 facsimile. Only one assignment per

MGI port is permitted. Any entries made here will override entries made in MMC 615.

DEFAULT DATA

NONE

ACTION DISPLAY


Display shows the first available option:

2) Enter MGI dial number.

OR

Press Volume button to select an MGI port and press Right Soft button to move cursor.

3) Enter MGI user dial number.

OR

Press Volume button to select an MGI user and press Right Soft button to store and move cursor.


OR


[3801] MGI USER

NONE

[3801] MGI USER

NONE

[3801] MGI USER

NONE

RELATED ITEMS

NONE

2-190



[700] COPY COS CONTENTS

This MMC allows the technician to duplicate classes of service.

DEFAULT DATA

NONE

PROGRAM BUTTONS

‘F’ KEY Used to advance to MMC 701

ACTION DISPLAY


Display shows:

2) Dial selected COS to copy.(e.g., 05)

OR

Press Volume button to select COS and press.

Right Soft button to move cursor and advance to next step.

3) Dial target COS.(e.g., 06)

OR

Press Volume button to select COS and press

Right Soft button to move cursor back to step 2.

4) Press F key to advance MMC 701 and press

Right Soft to advance cursor.


OR


COPY COS ITEMS

COS01

ÆCOS01

COPY COS ITEMS

COS05

ÆCOS01

COPY COS ITEMS

COS05

ÆCOS06

COS CONTENTS(06)

TOLL LEVEL:A

RELATED ITEMS



2-191

CHAPTER 2.


[701] ASSIGN COS CONTENTS

Similar to MMC 700 but does not allow a copy command. This MMC is primarily used for creating a new class of service(COS). If the unsupervised conference feature is allowed, a programmed CONF key must be available to allow re-entry into a conference call.

There are 30 classes of service available.

This MMC is divided into 5 categories.

No Category Description

TOLL

4

5

6

7

0

1

2

3

E

F

G

H

A

B

C

D

COS

00 AA CALER

LEVEL

Follow toll class A(Unrestricted)

Follow toll class B in MMC 702, 703

Follow toll class C in MMC 702, 703

Follow toll class D in MMC 702, 703

Follow toll class E in MMC 702, 703

Follow toll class F in MMC 702, 703

Follow toll class G in MMC 702, 703

Follow toll class H(All restricted)

Default

YES

Description

Auto answer control by caller

01 ABSENCE YES Absence

02 ALM CLR YES Alarm Clear

03 AUTO RDL YES Retry on busy

04 CALLBACK YES Callback

05 CLIP ABN

06 CLIP INQ

YES

YES

Caller ID Abandon

Caller ID Inquire

07 CLIP INV YES Caller ID Investigate

08 CONFER. YES Conference

09 DALM CLR YES DISA alarm ring clear

10 DIRECT. YES Directory

11 DISA

12 DND

YES

YES

13 DND FWRD YES

14 DND OVRD NO

Allow DISA use

Do Not Disturb

Forward Do Not Disturb

Do Not Disturb Override

15 DOOR

16 DSS

YES

YES

Door ring answer

Direct station select

17 DTS YES Direct trunk select

18 EXT Intercom call automatic record

(SVM-800)

19 EXT FWD YES External call forward

2-192


No Category


(continued)

Description

COS Default

20 FEATURE YES

21 FLASH YES

22 FOLLOW-ME YES

23 FORWARD YES

24 FWDTOVMS YES

25 GRP I/O YES

26 HOLD

27 HOTLINE

YES

YES

Call forward to SVM-800

Group in/out

Hold

Hot line and Off-hook selection

Description

Call forward-follow me

28 INTERCOM YES

30 MESSAGE YES

31 MM PAGE YES

32 NEW CALL YES

33 OHVAED YES

34 OHVAING YES

Message

Meet me page

New call

Receive Off-hook voice announcement

Make Off-hook voice announcement

35 ONEA2 YES

36 OPERATOR YES Call to Operator

38 OVERRIDE NO

39 PAGE 0

40 PAGE 1

41 PAGE 2

42 PAGE 3

43 PAGE 4

YES

YES

YES

YES

YES

44 PAGE 5

45 PAGE 6

46 PAGE 7

47 PAGE 8

48 PAGE 9

49 PAGE *

YES

YES

YES

YES

YES

YES

51 PICKUP YES

52 PRB YES

Barge-In

Page zone 0 Paging

Page zone 1 Paging

Page zone 2 Paging

Page zone 3 Paging

Page zone 4 Paging

Page zone 5 Paging

Page zone 6 Paging

Page zone 7 Paging

Page zone 8 Paging

Page zone 9 Paging

Page zone * Paging

Privacy Release and Bridge


2-193

CHAPTER 2.


No Category

(continued)

53

54

55 SECURE YES

56 SET RLOC NO

57 SSPD TOL YES

58 STN LOCK YES

59 SYS SPD YES

60 TRK AREC NO

61

COS

REM. HOLD

RNG PLAN

TRK EHLD

Description

Default

YES

YES

YES

Description

Remote Hold

Ring Mode Change

Set Relocation

System Speed dial toll check

Station Lock

System Speed dial

Trunk call automatic record

(SVM-800)

Trunk call exclusive hold

64 VM AME NO

65 VM REC NO

66 VMS PSWD NO

67 VMS REC NO

STN GROUP 01-80 YES

GROUP

TRK GROUP 01-30 YES

GROUP

BIVMS STN(SVMi).

DEFAULT DATA

SEE DESCRIPTION

BIVMS STN 01-16 YES

Answer Machine Emulation

(SVMi)

Call Record(SVMi)

VMS password(SVM-800)

VMS Call Record(SVM-800)

Station group 01~80 calling

Trunk group 01~30 calling

SVMi port 01~16 calling

2-194



ACTION DISPLAY


Display shows:

2) Dial COS.(e.g., 06)

OR

Press Volume button to select COS number and press Right Soft button to move cursor.

3) Dial COS contents categories.

(e.g., 1 for Usable Features)

OR

Press Volume button to select COS categories and press Right Soft button to move cursor.

4) Dial COS usable feature option.(e.g., 12)

OR



5) Dial 0 for NO or 1 for YES.

OR

Press Volume button to select option and press Right Soft button to return to step 4.


OR


COS CONTENTS(01)

TOLL LEVEL:A

COS CONTENTS(06)

TOLL LEVEL:A

COS CONTENTS(06)

00:AA CALER :YES

COS CONTENTS(06)

12:DND :YES

COS CONTENTS(06)

12:DND :NO

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 700 COPY COS CONTENTS


2-195

CHAPTER 2.


[702] TOLL DENY TABLE

Provides a way to make toll restriction(call barring) very easy and flexible. There are 500 entries allowed in the deny table and each entry index can be assigned to a class of service.

Each index can have up to 12 digits. With the use of wild cards(MMC 704, Assign Wild

Character), more flexibility can be built into toll restriction. Wild cards can be used repeatedly in the dial string, limited only to what is allowed or denied in MMC 704.

Six toll levels, B to G, are programmable. Toll level A is set as ‘unrestricted’ by default and toll level H is set as ‘in-house only’ by default.

DEFAULT DATA

ALL ENTRIES ARE SET TO 0

PROGRAM BUTTONS

A

B

C

Used to enter wild card X

Used to enter wild card Y

Used to enter wild card Z

ACTION DISPLAY


Display shows:

2) Dial index number.(e.g., 005)

OR

Press Volume button to select index and press


3) Enter toll pattern via dial keypad.(e.g., 212)

OR

Enter wild card(e.g., 21X) and press Right Soft button to move cursor to COS options.

4) Press Volume button to move cursor along line until under toll class mark.(e.g., E).

Enter a 1 for ‘Yes’ or 0 for ‘No’.

Press Right Soft button to store and return to step 1.

OR


DENY(001):BCDEFG

:000000

DENY(005):BCDEFG

:000000

DENY(005):BCDEFG

212 :000000

DENY(005):BCDEFG

21X :000000

DENY(001):BCDEFG

212 :000100

2-196




OR


RELATED ITEMS

MMC 703

MMC 704



[703] TOLL ALLOWANCE TABLE

Provides a way to make toll restriction very easy and flexible. There are 500 allowable entries in the allow table for an OfficeServ 7100-main system and each entry index can be assigned to a class of service. Each index can have up to 12 digits. With the use of wild cards(MMC 704, Assign Wild Character), more flexibility can be built into toll restriction.

Six toll levels, B to G, are programmable. Toll level A is set as ‘unrestricted’ by default, and toll level H is set as ‘in-house only’ by default.

DEFAULT DATA

ALL ENTRIES ARE SET TO 0

PROGRAM BUTTONS

A

B

C

Used to enter wild card X

Used to enter wild card Y

Used to enter wild card Z

ACTION DISPLAY


Display shows:

2) Dial index number.(e.g., 005)

OR

Press Volume button to select index and press Right Soft button to move cursor.

3) Enter toll pattern via dial pad.(e.g., 202)

OR

Enter wild card(e.g., 20X) and press Right Soft button to move cursor to COS options.

ALOW(001):BCDEFG

:000000

ALOW(005):BCDEFG

:000000

ALOW(005):BCDEFG

202 :000000

ALOW(005):BCDEFG

20X :000000


2-197

CHAPTER 2.


4) Press Volume button to move cursor along line until under toll class mark.(e.g., E).

Enter a 1 for ‘Yes’ or 0 for ‘No’.

Press Right Soft button to store and return to step 1.

OR



OR


RELATED ITEMS

MMC 702

MMC 704

TOLL DENY TABLE


ALOW(001):BCDEFG

202 :000100

2-198



[704] ASSIGN WILD CHARACTER

Provides flexibility to toll restriction(call barring) when a specific numbering plan is desired. There are only three entry tables but more than one digit can be assigned per table if needed.

DEFAULT DATA

X ENTRIES SET TO 1

Y AND Z ENTRIES SET TO 0

ACTION DISPLAY


Display shows:

2) Press Volume button to select X, Y, or Z(e.g., Z) and press Right Soft button to advance cursor to

3) Press Volume button to move cursor to option digit desired(e.g., 5) and enter 1.(put under other

digits as required)


OR



OR


:0123456789*

#

X:111111111111

:0123456789*

#

Z:000000000000

:0123456789*

#

Z:000001000000

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 702

MMC 703

TOLL DENY TABLE



2-199

CHAPTER 2.


[705] ASSIGN SYSTEM SPEED DIAL

Enables the assignment of system speed dialling numbers. There are up to 450 entries available for programming.(or 950 entries if set in MMC 861 SYSTEM OPTIONS) Each speed dial number consists of a trunk or trunk group access code followed by a separator and up to 24 digits to be dialled. These dialled digits may consist of 0-9, and #. If the system recognizes a valid trunk or trunk group access number, it will automatically insert the separator.

NOTE: If 500 entries are allowed, the bin numbers are 500-945; if 950 entries are allowed, the bin numbers are 050-999.

DEFAULT DATA

NONE

PROGRAM BUTTONS

B

C

D

E

F

ANS/RLS



Used to insert a pulse/tone conversion code ‘C’.

Used to mask/unmask following digits-shows as ‘[’ or ‘]’

Used to enter name for speed dial bin(see MMC 706)

Used to save the speed dial number and name to the CID translation table(MMC 728)

ACTION DISPLAY


Display shows:

2) Dial speed index desired.(e.g., 505)

OR


3) Enter access code(e.g., 9) plus the phone number up to 24 digits(digits will scroll under)

and press Right Soft button to return to step 2.

4) Press F key to toggle to MMC 706 step 3 to enter name.

SYS SPEED DIAL

500:

SYS SPEED DIAL

505:

SYS SPEED DIAL

505:9–121223456789

SYS SPEED NAME

505:

2-200



5) If you want to save the speed dial number and name to the CID translation table.(MMC 728)

Press the ANS/RLS button and dial 1 for YES.

(The speed dial name must exist)


OR


RELATED ITEMS

MMC 606

MMC 706

ASSIGN SPEED BLOCK


[706] SYSTEM SPEED DIAL BY NAME

SYS SPEED DIAL

ADD CLI XLT ?NO

Allows a name up to 11 characters to be entered for each system speed dial location.

This name enables the speed dial number to be located when using the directory dial feature.



DEFAULT DATA

NO NAMES

PROGRAM BUTTONS

ANS/RLS Used to save the speed dial number and name to the CID translation table(MMC 728).

ACTION DISPLAY


Display shows:

2) Dial system speed entry number.(e.g., 505)

OR

Press Volume button to select entry number and press Right Soft button to move cursor.

SYS SPEED NAME

500:

SYS SPEED NAME

505:


2-201

CHAPTER 2.


3) Enter name using dial keypad and press Right Soft button to return to step 2.

OR

Press the F key to return to MMC 705, step 3.

4) If you want to save the speed dial number and name data to the CLI translation table.(MMC 728)

Press ANS/RLS button and dial 1 for YES.

(The speed dial number must exist)

5) Press Right Soft button to return to step 2 above.

OR


OR


RELATED ITEMS

MMC 606

MMC 705

ASSIGN SPEED BLOCK


SYS SPEED NAME

505:TELECOMS

SYS SPEED DIAL

505:

SYS SPEED NAME

ADD CLI XLT ?NO

2-202



[707] AUTHORIZATION CODE

Enables the authorization feature on a per-class of service selection. There are 500 available entries. Authorization codes must be 4-10 digits long.

DEFAULT DATA

NONE

ACTION DISPLAY


Display shows:

2) Dial code index number.(e.g., 005)

OR

Press Volume button to selected index number and press Right Soft button to move cursor.

3) Enter authorization code(minimum of four digits and a maximum of 10 digits) via dial keypad

(e.g., 1234567890) and press Right Soft button to move cursor.

4) Enter class of service number 01-30.(e.g., 05)

OR

Press Volume button to select COS and press Right

Soft button to select and return to step 2.


OR


AUTHOR.CODE(001)

C:01

AUTHOR.CODE(005)

C:01

AUTHOR.CODE(005)

1234567890 C:01

AUTHOR.CODE(005)

1234567890 C:05

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 305

MMC 701

ASSIGN FORCED CODE

ASSIGN COS CONTENTS


2-203

CHAPTER 2.


[708] ACCOUNT CODE

Enables the account code entry feature. There are 999 available entries.

DEFAULT DATA

NONE

ACTION DISPLAY


Display shows:

2) Dial code index number.(e.g., 005)

OR


3) Enter account code(maximum 12 digits) via dial keypad(e.g., 1234) and press Right Soft button

to move cursor back to step 2.


OR


ACCOUNT CODE

001:

ACCOUNT CODE

005:

ACCOUNT CODE

005:1234

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 305 ASSIGN FORCED CODE

2-204



[709] TOLL PASS CODE/SPECIAL CODE TABLE

This MMC provides a means to program trunk code tables as described below.

No Special Code Description

0

1

PBX CODE

SPECIAL CODE

This table contains up to five entries and is used to identify the trunk access codes needed for toll restriction when the system is used with either a PBX or a CENTREX-supplied dial tone. Toll restriction will only be applied on trunks flagged as PBX in MMC

401 if a trunk access code entered in this table is dialled. Toll restriction will be applied to the digits following the trunk access code.

This table identifies the special feature codes used to activate central office custom-calling features such as CID Block and

Call Waiting Disable. The special feature codes can be used on a per-call basis without affecting LCR or toll restriction programming. There is a maximum of 10 entries available, each of which may be up to four digits long.

2 TOLL OVERRIDE This table of eight entries is used to identify the numbers that will bypass all dialling restrictions. This bypass includes toll restriction, trunk access and forced authorization or account codes. Each entry in the table can be up to 14 digits long.

3 OVRD USE TRK GRP This entry designates the trunk group that toll override calls will access.

DEFAULT DATA

NONE

ACTION DISPLAY


Display shows:

2) Select PBX, SPECIAL CODE, TOLL OVERRIDE or OVRD USE TRK GRP.

OR


3) Enter index number.(e.g., 3)

OR


PBX ACCESS CODE

1:

TOLL OVERRIDE

1:

TOLL OVERRIDE

3:_


2-205

CHAPTER 2.


4) Enter via dial keypad the desired access/feature code.(e.g., 911)

Press Right Soft button to enter and return to step 3 and enter more entries.


OR


RELATED ITEMS

MMC 401

MMC 702

MMC 703

MMC 305

TRUNK LINE/PBX LINE

TOLL DENY TABLE


ASSIGN FORCED CODE

TOLL RESTRICTION

MMC 702

MMC 703

MMC 704

TOLL DENY TABLE



TOLL OVERRIDE

3:911

2-206



[710] LCR DIGIT TABLE

The LCR DIGIT TABLE contains all numerical digits for the completion of outgoing call placement. This table works in conjunction with LCR ROUTE TABLE, LCR TIME TA-

BLE and LCR MODIFY DIGITS TABLE. There is a maximum 2000 entries with a digit string length of 10 numerical digits. This system automatically maintains entered digit strings in numerical order. The characters * and # are also accepted for use with feature codes.

DEFAULT DATA

NONE

ACTION DISPLAY


Display shows:

2) Dial LCR entry.(e.g., 0005)

OR

Press Volume button to select entry and press


3) Enter LCR digit string via the dial keypad and press Right Soft button.

OR


4) Enter digit length.(max. 31)

Cursor will move to RT.(route selection)

Valid entry will return you to step 1.


OR


LCR DIGIT (0001)

DIGIT:

LCR DIGIT (0005)

DIGIT:_

LCR DIGIT (0005)

DIGIT:305426

LCR DIGIT (0005)

LENGTH:10 RT:01

LCR DIGIT (0005)

LENGTH:10 RT:01

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 712 LCR ROUTE TABLE


2-207

CHAPTER 2.


[711] LCR TIME TABLE

This table, through the LCR ROUTES, allows calls placed at any given time of day to use the least cost trunk route that is available. When LCR ROUTE ADVANCE is allowed, it is possible for calls to be placed on more expensive trunks on any given time of day. There are four possible time entries per day; the start time of the next time period is the end time of the previous time period.

DEFAULT DATA

NONE

ACTION DISPLAY


Display shows:

2) Dial day of week.(SUN-SAT, e.g., WED)

OR

Press Volume button to make day selection and press Right Soft button.

3) Dial time band.(A-D, e.g., B)

OR


Right Soft button.

4) Dial time via keypad.(24-hour format, e.g., 0800)

Cursor moves to LCRT.(see MMC 712)

5) Dial time table number.(1-4)

OR


Right Soft button.


OR


LCR TIME (SUN:A)

HHMM: LCRT:-

LCR TIME (WED:A)

HHMM: LCRT:-

LCR TIME (WED:B)

HHMM: LCRT:-

LCR TIME (WED:B)

HHMM:0800 LCRT:-

LCR TIME (WED:B)

HHMM:0800 LCRT:1

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 710

MMC 712

MMC 713

LCR DIGIT TABLE

LCR ROUTE TABLE


2-208



[712] LCR ROUTE TABLE

The LCR ROUTE TABLE is responsible for selecting a specific trunk group in the completion of an outward bound call. This table works in conjunction with LCR DIGIT TABLE,

LCR TIME TABLE, LCR COS TABLE and LCR MODIFIED DIGITS TABLE. After you dial a valid digit string, the system uses the LCR ROUTE TABLE to select a specific predetermined trunk group. There is a maximum of 99 routes available.

If more than one trunk group is available for call completion, the system uses the first designated trunk group and then the succeeding trunk groups. If all trunk groups are busy in a selected route, call queue becomes active and allocates trunks as they become available.

DEFAULT DATA

NONE

ACTION DISPLAY


Display shows:

2) Dial LCR ROUTE table number.(e.g., 05)

OR

Press Volume button to selected table and press


3) Dial TIME BAND index number 1-4.(e.g., 2)

OR

Press Volume button to selected index and press


4) Dial LCR COS number 1-8.(e.g., 4)

OR

Press Volume button to selected COS and press


5) Dial TRUNK GROUP access code.(e.g., 801)

OR

Press Volume button to selected access code and press Right Soft button to move cursor.

LCR ROUTE (01:1)

C:1 G:NONE M:---

LCR ROUTE (05:1)

C:1 G:NONE M:---

LCR ROUTE (05:2)

C:1 G:NONE M:---

LCR ROUTE (05:2)

C:4 G:NONE M:---

LCR ROUTE (05:2)

C:4 G:801 M:---


2-209

CHAPTER 2.


6) Dial MODIFY DIGITS index number.(e.g., 050)

OR


OR

Press Right Soft button to skip step and move

cursor to step 2.


OR


RELATED ITEMS

MMC 310

MMC 710

MMC 711

MMC 713


LCR DIGIT TABLE

LCR TIME TABLE


LCR ROUTE (05:2)

C:4 G:801 M:050

LCR ROUTE (05:2)

C:4 G:801 M:---

2-210



[713] LCR MODIFY DIGIT TABLE

This program is sometimes referred to as Outgoing Dial Rules. It enables the system to add or delete a digit string or singular digit if needed to complete a call. With these digits inserted, a long distance call will be placed over a local line using the common carrier network. The characters * and # can also be entered. There are 200 modify digit entries available.


NOF DEL DGT

I

A

Number of digits to delete

Insert(before dialling string)

Append(after dialling string)

DIGIT STRING KEY

Insert String + Digit String(delete) + Append String

Max. No. of Digit Entries

15

14

14

DEFAULT DATA

NONE

ACTION DISPLAY


Display shows:

2) Enter index number.(e.g., 005)

OR

Press Volume buttons to make selection and press


3) Enter number of digits to delete.

OR

Press Right Soft button to skip step and move cursor to next step.

4) Enter digits to be inserted.(e.g., 10288)

OR

Press Right Soft button to skip step or to store information and advance to next step.

LCR MODIFY (001)

NOF DEL DGT:00

LCR MODIFY (005)

NOF DEL DGT:00

LCR MODIFY (005)

NOF DEL DGT:01

LCR MODIFY (005)

I:10288_


2-211

CHAPTER 2.


5) Enter digits to be appended.(e.g., 45678)

OR

Press Right Soft button to skip step or to store information and return to step 2.


OR


RELATED ITEMS

MMC 310

MMC 710

MMC 711

MMC 712


LCR DIGIT TABLE

LCR TIME TABLE

LCR ROUTE TABLE

LCR MODIFY (005)

A:_

2-212



[714] DID NUMBER AND NAME TRANSLATION

Assigns an incoming DID call to a specific ring plan destination. It also provides a call waiting option, if needed, so that a second incoming DID call can be received. The table is also used to define which MOH source a caller to that DID number will hear when placed on hold. A name up to 11 characters can be added to the number. There is a maximum of

999 entries. If there is no matching number on DID service, the call is routed to the operator group.

Option

DGT

MOH SOURCE

PRI

RING PLAN

1: XXX, 2: XXX,

3: XXX, 4: XXX,

5: XXX, 6: XXX

CW

MC

DC

NAME

TONE

CADENCE

Description

Digits to be received from Trunk line.(up to 16 digits may be entered)

Allows the technician to select what the calling party will hear if the call is placed on hold. There are four possible music selections.

DID priority option. There are nine priority levels: priority 1 is the highest and priority 9 is the lowest. When calls come into a station group and all group members are busy, the system will assign a priority to the DDI numbers so that calls from a high-priority DDI number will be placed at the front of the group queue. If this option is set to NO, the call held longest in the group queue has the highest priority.

Ring plan and destination during each ring plan. The destination can be a station, station group, trunk or trunk group. If a trunk or trunk group is selected the trunks must be programmed as E & M trunks to allow the received digits to be re-sent. This is referred to as DID Repeat digits over tie line. Entering the character ‘B’ means to repeat the received digits.

Call Waiting Yes/No.(Allows a second DID call to be received.)

The maximum call count. When this is set to 99, the feature will not work. When set to 0, if a call comes in that matches DID digits and DGT field then the system will reject the call. When set between 1 and 98, if a call comes in that matches DID digits and DGT field then the system counts the same DID digits, and if the count is the same or higher than this value, the system sends busy signal to caller.

The number of digits to delete. This is useful with Tandem switching, mixed numbering plans and DID Repeat digits over tie line. Maximum number of digits that can be deleted is 16.

Enter up to 11 characters to identify call. Refer to MMC 104, STATION

NAME, for how to enter the name.

Assigns ring tone to DLI port.

Assigns ring cadence to SLT port.


2-213

CHAPTER 2.


DEFAULT DATA

INDEX DIGIT MOH PRI 1-6 CW MC DC NAME

ACTION DISPLAY


Display shows:

2) Enter valid index number(e.g., 005) via dial keypad.

OR



3) Enter digits to be translated(e.g., 5065) via dial keypad and press Right Soft button to move cursor.

4) Enter the MOH source for this entry.

OR


Right Soft button to return to step 3 above.

5) Enter priority level via dial keypad.

(1-9 or NO)

OR


Right Soft buttons to advance to next step.

6) Enter station or group number for each Ring Plan destination via dial keypad.(e.g., 530)

OR


Right Soft button to advance to next step.

DID DIGIT (001)

DGT:

DID DIGIT (005)

DGT:

DID DIGIT (005)

DGT:5065

DID DIGIT (005)

MOH:NONE PRI:NO

DID DIGIT (005)

MOH:NONE PRI:NO

DID DIGIT (005)

1:530 2:

2-214



7) Enter call wait option via dial keypad.

(1 for YES, 0 for NO)

OR



8) Enter maximum call count via dial keypad.(00-99)

OR



9) Enter number or delete digit via dial keypad.(0-16)

OR

Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to advance to next step.

10) Enter the name via dial keypad and press Right

Soft button to return to Step 1.


OR


RELATED ITEMS

DID DIGIT (005)

CW:N MC:99 DC:0

DID DIGIT (005)

CW:N MC:99 DC:0

DID DIGIT (005)

CW:N MC:99 DC:0

DID DIGIT (005)

NAME:


2-215

CHAPTER 2.


[715] PROGRAMMED STATION MESSAGE

Allows custom messages to be programmed or default messages to be changed.


Refer to ENTERING CHARACTERS in MMC 104, STATION NAME.

There are 15 messages in the system:

MESSAGES 01-10 are 16-character pre-programmed default messages. Any of them can be changed. MESSAGES 11-15 are 16-character blank messages that can be created.

DEFAULT DATA

TEN PROGRAMMED MESSAGES:

01. IN A MEETING

02. OUT ON A CALL

03. OUT TO LUNCH

04. LEAVE A MESSAGE

05. PAGE ME

06. OUT OF TOWN

07. IN TOMORROW

08. RETURN AFTERNOON

09. ON VACATION

10. GONE HOME

ACTION DISPLAY


Display shows:

2) Enter message number.(e.g., 11)

OR

Press Volume button arrow to make selection.


3) Enter message via dial keypad.(maximum 16 characters)

Use ‘A’ button to toggle upper case/lower case.



OR


RELATED ITEMS

MMC 115 SET PROGRAMMED MESSAGE

PGM.MESSAGE (01)

IN A MEETING

PGM.MESSAGE (11)

Blank Message

PGM.MESSAGE (11)

IN MEETING ROOM

2-216



[716] UK LCR OPTION

This MMC provides UK LCR options.


0 NETWORK CODE This table is used to network access code when the call is routed to the secondary network. This table contains up to 16 entries. Each code has 4 digits maximum in length and use option for None, CCC, PIN or Both.(Default: all codes are empty and all use options are none)

0 NONE: This code doesn’t use.

1 CCC: This code uses with Call Cast Code(CCC).

2 PIN: This code uses with PIN Code.

3 BOTH: This code uses with PIN code and Call Cast Code.

1

2

PIN CODE

CCC OPTION

This table is used to PIN code when the call is routed to the secondary network. This table contains up to 4 entries and each code has 10 digits maximum in length.(Default: all tables are empty)

This is used to which number used for Call Cost Code.

(Default: Station Number)

0 STATION NUMBER: Station number uses for Call Cost Code.

1 NONE: Doesn’t use Call Cost Code.

3 STATION PIN NO.

This is assigned to PIN code table number for each station number.(Default: all stations are 1)

DEFAULT DATA

SEE DESCRIPTION

ACTION DISPLAY


Display shows:

2) Enter option number 0-3.

OR

Press Volume buttons to select number and press Right Soft button to move cursor.

3) Enter number 0-16.

OR


4) Enter network access code via dial keypad.

NETWORK CODE

01: USE:NONE

NETWORK CODE

01: USE:NONE

NETWORK CODE

02:_ USE:NONE

NETWORK CODE

02:1234 USE:NONE


2-217

CHAPTER 2.


5) Enter use option number.(0-3)

OR


Right Soft button to save and return to step 3.


OR


RELATED ITEMS

MMC 400

MMC 310

MMC 710

MMC 711

MMC 712

MMC 713



LCR DIGIT TABLE

LCR TIME TABLE

LCR ROUTE TABLE


NETWORK CODE

02:1234 USE:CCC

2-218



[717] UCD AGENT ID

This MMC defines UCD agent ID numbers or PIN numbers. These numbers are used to log

UCD agents into the UCD groups. There are 100 available entries and each entry is tied to a specific UCD group. Agent ID codes can be up to 4 digits long.

DEFAULT DATA

NONE

ACTION DISPLAY


Display shows:

2) Dial code entry number.(e.g., 005)

OR


3) Enter ID code via dial keypad(e.g., 1234) and press Right Soft button to move cursor.

4) Enter group number.(e.g., 505)

OR

Press Volume button to select group and press Right Soft button to select and return to step 2.

OR

Select all groups.


OR


RELATED ITEMS

AGENT PIN (001)

ID: GRP:NONE

AGENT PIN (005)

ID:_ GRP:NONE

AGENT PIN (005)

ID:1234 GRP:NONE

AGENT PIN (005)

ID:1234 GRP:505

MMC 607 UCD OPTIONS


2-219

CHAPTER 2.


[718] MY AREA CODE

This MMC defines the home area code and country code. This information is used for caller ID and ISDN calls in defining the area code on incoming calls. This MMC removes the local area code to allow callback without digit modifications in LCR.

DEFAULT DATA

NONE

ACTION DISPLAY


Display shows:

2) Enter 0 for COUNTRY or 1 for AREA.

OR



3) Enter area code(maximum 4 digits) via dial keypad

(e.g., 2) and press Right Soft button to move

cursor back to step 2.


OR


MY AREA CODE

AREA :

MY AREA CODE

AREA :

MY AREA CODE

AREA :2

RELATED ITEMS

2-220



[719] IDLE DISPLAY

This program allows you to enter guidance data to be displayed on large LCD phones.



DEFAULT DATA

NONE

ACTION DISPLAY


Display shows:

2) Enter the number of the line on a large LCD phone

(01~12) on which guidance data is to be displayed.

OR


3) Enter guidance data via dial keypad and press

Right Soft button to save and move to step 2.


OR


IDLE DISPLAY (01)

IDLE DISPLAY (02)

IDLE DISPLAY (02)

WELCOME TO ABC

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 120 LARGE LCD OPTIONS


2-221

CHAPTER 2.


[720] COPY KEY PROGRAMMING

Provides a tool for duplicating key assignments from one phone to another. This can be done on a per-station basis or on all stations, but not on a group of stations. A limitation is that the original and target phones must be of the same type.(the same number of buttons)

DEFAULT DATA

NONE

ACTION DISPLAY


Display shows:

2) Enter the station number to copy to.(e.g., 205)

OR

Press Volume buttons to make selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor.

OR


3) Enter station number to copy from.(e.g., 203) and cursor returns to step 2.

OR

Press Volume buttons to make selection and press Right Soft button to return to step 2.


OR


[201] COPY KEY

FROM:NONE

[205] COPY KEY

FROM:NONE

[205] COPY KEY

FROM:203

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 107

MMC 721

MMC 722

MMC 723

KEY EXTENDER




2-222



[721] SAVE STATION KEY PROGRAMMING

Provides a service tool which minimizes the accidental loss of programmable buttons on phones. First the data is saved and then the station can be replaced with another station type or the keys can be reprogrammed to other features. Once testing or replacement is completed, the data can be restored to the individual station, providing the same type is in place.

CONDITIONS

This program must be used carefully because key programming data is saved to a common programming database. When a new phone is connected, the system copies data from this database to the new phone.

DEFAULT DATA

RESTORE

ACTION DISPLAY


Display shows:

2) Enter desired station number.(e.g., 205)

OR


3) Press Volume button to make function selection and press Right Soft button to enter and return to

[201] SAVE KEY

RESTORE

[205] SAVE KEY

RESTORE

[205] SAVE KEY

SAVE


OR


RELATED ITEMS

MMC 107

MMC 722

MMC 723

KEY EXTENDER




2-223

CHAPTER 2.


[722] STATION KEY PROGRAMMING

Allows the customizing of programmable buttons on specific phones and add-on modules

(AOMs). For phones, buttons 1 and 2 are set as CALL buttons by default. For AOMs, all buttons are set as DS keys by default. Features are selected by pressing the dial keypad buttons the required number of times. For example, for OHVA, the number 6 is pressed three times. If the BOSS key is required, 2 is pressed for the first letter B and then the Volume button used to change the selection from BARGE to BOSS.

DIAL KEYPAD

COUNT

DIAL 2

DIAL 3

DIAL 4

DIAL 5

DIAL 6

DIAL 7

1

AB

DGPALM

GPIK

LANREQ

MMPA

PAGE

2

BARGE

EP

HDSET

LANREQ

NEW

PAGE

3

CAD

FAUTO

ICONF

LANREQ

OHVA

RB

4

SETDND

WAKEUP WAKEUP DIAL 9 WAKEUP

Programmable Button Assignments

XCHIN

Feature

AB

ABAND

Description

ABSENCE

ABANDONED CALL

ABW

ACC

AN/RLS

BARGE

BILL

BLOCK

BOOTH

BOSS

AGENT BUSY/WRAP UP

ACCOUNT

ANSWER/RELEASE

BARGE-IN

BILL(Hotel Feature)

OHVA BLOCK

BOOTH(Hotel Feature)

BOSS/SECRETARY

Feature

MMPG

MS

MSG

MUTE

MW

NEW

NND

NOCLIP

NPG

NS

NXT

Description

MEET ME PAGE

MANUAL

SIGNALLING

MESSAGE

MUTE

MESSAGE WAIT

NEW CALL

NAME NUMBER

DATE

NO CID SEND

NETWORK

PAGE

NETWORK

STATION

CID NEXT

2-224



(continued)

Feature Description Feature Description

CAD

CALL

CAMP

CANMG

CBK

CC

CCBS

CHIN

CHOUT

CALL ACTIVITY DISPLAY

CALL BUTTON

STATION CAMP-ON

OHVA

OPER

PAGE

PROG

OFF-HOOK VOICE ANNOUNCE

OPERATOR

PAGE

MESSAGE CANCEL

CALLBACK

CALL COVERAGE

ISDN CALL BACK

PAGPK

PICKUP PAGE HOLD

PARK

PAUSE

CHECK IN(Hotel Feature)

PMSG

CHECK OUT(Hotel Feature)

PRB

CALL PARK ORBIT

PAUSE


PRIVACY RELEASE AND BRIDGE

SET PROGRAM

CHOICE

CLIP

CONF

CHOICE

(Related to News Server)

CALLER ID

CONFERENCE

CONP

CR

CONNECTED NAME

DISPLAY

CALL RECORD

(Requires SVMi card)

CREDIT

CREDIT(Hotel Feature)

CS

CALL STATUS

CSNR

CALLER ID SAVE NUMBER

REDIAL

DGPALM

EASY ALARM SET TO

REMOTE STATION

DICT

DIR

DICTATION

DIRECTORY

DIVERT

DLOCK

EXECUTIVE CALL DIVERT

TO SECRETARY

DOOR LOCK

PTHR

RB

REJECT

RETRY

REVW

RP

RSV

RTO

PATH REPLACEMENT

ROOM BILL(Hotel Feature)

OHVA REJECT

AUTO REDIAL ON BUSY

REVIEW

RING PLAN

ROOM STATUS VIEW

(Hotel Feature)

RING PLAN TIME OVERRIDE

SETDND

SET DO NOT DISTURB

SETMG

SET MESSAGE W/O RING

SG

STATION GROUP

DND

DNDO

DP

DROP

DS

DO NOT DISTURB

DO NOT DISTURB

OVERRIDE

DIRECT PICKUP

CALL DROP

DSS KEY

SLOCAT

STAFF LOCATOR(Hotel Feature)

SMDR

SNR

SP

SMDR KEY

SAVED NUMBER REDIAL

UCD SUPERVISOR

SPD

SPKR

SSET

SPEED DIAL

SPEAKER

ISDN SUPPLEMENTARY SERVICE

SET


2-225

CHAPTER 2.


(continued)

Feature

DT

ECT

EP

EXTMIC

FAUTO

FLASH

FWRD

GPIK

HDSET

HLDPK

HOLD

HOTEL

ICONF

IDISC

IG

IHOLD

INFDSP

INQIRE

IRET

ISPY

LCR

LISTN

LNR

LOG

MMPA

Description Feature Description

DTS KEY

EXPLICIT CALL TRANSFER

STATE

ESTABLISHED CALL

PICKUP

EXTERNAL MIC

STORE

SYSALM

SET EXECUTIVE STATE

STORE DISPLAYED NUMBER

FORCED AUTO ANSWER

FLASH

CALL FORWARD

GROUP PICKUP

HEADSET MODE

HOLD PICKUP

TCLIP

TG

TIMER

TP

TRARPT

TRSF

UA

SYSTEM ALARMS

TEMP CLIP

TRUNK GROUP

TIMER

TERMINAL PORTABILITY

TRAFFIC REPORT

TRANSFER

UNIVERSAL ANSWER

HOLD

HOTEL(Hotel Feature)

VM

VOICE MAIL MEMO


VMADM

VOICE MAIL ADMINISTRATION


ISDN 3 PTY CONFERENCE

VMAME

ANSWER MACHINE EMULATION


ISDN 3 PTY

DISCONNECTION

IN/OUT GROUP

VMMSG

VOICE MAIL MESSAGE KEY


ISDN 3-PARTY HOLD

INFORMATION DISPLAY

(Requires News/Call Plus)

INQUIRE

ISDN 3 PTY RETRIEVE

CID SPY

VT

VOICEMAIL TRANSFER

LEAST COST ROUTING

GROUP LISTENING

LAST NUMBER REDIAL

CALL LOGGING

MEET ME PAGE ANSWER

WAKEUP

WAKE UP(Hotel Feature)

XCHIN

EXPRESS CHECK IN

(Hotel Feature)

2-226



DEFAULT DATA

For phones, buttons 1 and 2 are set as CALL buttons by default.(Other settings depend on the keyset type.) For AOMs, all buttons are set as DSS buttons by default.

ACTION DISPLAY


Display shows:

2) Enter selected station number.(e.g., 205)

OR



3) Enter selected key number.(e.g., 18)

OR

Press Volume button to select key number and press Right Soft button to move cursor.

4) Using table above, press dial keypad to select number.

OR


Right Soft button to advance cursor to step 5 to enter extender, if required, or to return to step 2.

5) Enter extender if required.(e.g., 03)

OR




OR


[201] KEY (MAST)

01:CALL1

Æ

[205] KEY (MAST)

01:CALL1

Æ

[201] KEY (MAST)

18:NONE

Æ_

[201] KEY PROG.

18:NONE

ÆGPIK_

[201] KEY PROG.

18:NONE

ÆGPIK03

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 107

MMC 720

MMC 721

KEY EXTENDER




2-227

CHAPTER 2.


[723] SYSTEM KEY PROGRAMMING

This MMC is similar to MMC 722, Station Key Programming, except that changes are made system-wide rather than on a per-station basis. Features are entered via the dial keypad by pressing numbers as shown in the table.

TYPE OF PHONE

No Type of Phone

00 24 BTN SETS

01 12 BTN SETS

03 EU 6B SETS

05 48/64 BTN AOMS

06 20 BTN SETS

07 28 BTN SETS

08 18 BTN SETS

09 8 BTN SETS

10 99 BTN SETS

11 38 BTN SETS

12 21 BTN SETS

13 14 BTN SETS

14 DS-07S SETS

DIAL KEYPAD

Description

Phone with 24 program buttons


EU phone with 6 program buttons

AOM with 48/64 program buttons









7000 Range phone

COUNT

DIAL 2

DIAL 3

DIAL 4

1

AB

DGPALM

GPIK

BARGE

EP

HDSET

2

CAD

FAUTO

ICONF

3 4

DIAL 6

DIAL 7

MMPA

PAGE

NEW

PAGE

OHVA

RB SETDND

DIAL WAKEUP XCHIN WAKEUP WAKEUP

See Programmable Button Assignments in MMC 722.

2-228



DEFAULT DATA

SEE DEFAULT DATA IN MMC 722

ACTION DISPLAY


Display shows:

2) Enter type of set via dial keypad.(e.g.,1)

OR


3) Enter key number.(e.g., 03)

OR


4) Using table above, press dial keypad to select number.

OR

Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to advance cursor to step

5 to enter extender, if required.

OR


5) Enter extender if required.(e.g., 03)

OR



OR


TYPE:24 BTN SETS

01:CALL1

Æ

TYPE:12 BTN SETS

01:CALL1

Æ

TYPE:12 BTN SETS

03:NONE

Æ

TYPE:12 BTN SETS

03:NONE

ÆGPIK

TYPE:12 BTN SETS

03:GPIK

ÆGPIK03

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 107

MMC 720

MMC 721

KEY EXTENDER




2-229

CHAPTER 2.


[724] DIAL NUMBERING PLAN

This MMC allows the technician to change directory numbers for stations, trunks, station groups, trunk groups and feature access codes. The system can be pre-programmed with default 3- or 4-digit numbering for stations, station groups and trunk numbers depending on the position of the DIP switches on the MCP card. There is an error message provided to prevent the accidental duplication of a directory number or feature access code.

No Type of Dial No Description

00

01

02

03

STN DIAL NO.

TRK DIAL NO.

AA/VD DIAL NO

MISC DIAL NO.

This is where station directory numbers are changed or assigned.

Default: 201-2xx, 3xx(last 319) or 2001-2xxx

This is where trunk directory numbers are changed or assigned.

Default: 701-7xx or 7001-7xxx

Not used

This is where directory numbers for relays, MOH ports and the alarm sensor are changed or assigned.

Default: MISC01:371

MISC02: 361

MISC03:362

MISC04:3999

04 STNG DIAL

NUMBER

05 TRKG DIAL

NUMBER

This is where station group numbers are changed or assigned.

Default: 500-5xx or 5001-5xxx

This is where trunk group numbers are changed or assigned.

Default: The first is 9 or 0, 800-809

06 FEAT DIAL NUMBER This is where feature access codes are changed or assigned. Dialling codes are entered via the dial keypad by pressing a number the required number of times to select the feature. For example, for

OHVA, the number 6 would be pressed three times.

Please remember that this program is system-wide.

07 S0 STN DIAL NO. This is where directory numbers for BRI station ports are changed or assigned.

Default: 8701-8708

09 NTWK LCR DIAL NO This is where additional LCR access codes are entered if two or more OfficeServ 7100 systems are networked together.

Default: NONE

2-230



(continued)

No Type of Dial No Description

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

VIRT EXT DIAL NO

MGI DIAL NO.

IP STN DIAL NO.

WLAN DIAL NO,

SPNET DIAL NO

H323 TRK DIAL NO

SIP TRK DIAL NO

This is where virtual station directory numbers are changed or assigned.

Default: SLT: 3501-3508, DGP: 3401-3416

This is where MGI port directory numbers are changed or assigned.

Default: 3801-38xx

This is where IP-based station directory numbers are changed or assigned.

Default: 3201-3208

This is where IP-based station directory numbers are changed or assigned.

Default: 3301-3308

This is where Samsung proprietary switch-to-switch VoIP networking trunk signalling port directory numbers are changed or assigned.

Default: 8301-8308

This is where VoIP H.323 trunk signalling port directory numbers are changed or assigned.

Default: 8401-8408

This is where VoIP SIP trunk signalling port directory numbers are changed or assigned.

Default: 8501-8508

FEATURE NUMBERING DIAL KEYPAD

COUNT

DIAL 2

DIAL 3

DIAL 4

DIAL 5

DIAL 6

DIAL 7

1

AB

DGPALM

GPIK

LANREQ

MMPA

PAGE

2

BARGE

EP

HDSET

LANREQ

NEW

PAGE

3

CAD

FAUTO

ICONF

LANREQ

OHVA

RB

4

SETDND

DIAL 9 WAKEUP XCHIN WAKEUP WAKEUP


2-231

CHAPTER 2.


Feature Code Assignments and Default

Feature Default

ABAND 64

Description

ABW NONE AGENT BUSY/WRAP UP

ACCT 47 ACCOUNT

BARGE NONE BARGE-IN

BOSS NONE BOSS/SECRETARY

CAMP 45 STATION

CANMG 42

CBK 44 CALLBACK

CHIN NONE CHECK IN(Hotel Feature)

CHOUT

CHOICE

NONE

NONE

CHECK OUT(Hotel Feature)

CHOICE(Related to News Server)

CONF 46 CONFERENCE

CONP NONE CONNECTED NAME DISPLAY

CR NONE CALL RECORD(Requires SVMi card)

CREDIT NONE CREDIT(Hotel Feature)

DGPALM NONE EASY ALARM SET TO REMOTE STATION

DICT NONE DICTATION

DIRPK 65

DISALM 58

DIVERT NONE

DLOCK 13

DND 40

EXECUTIVE CALL DIVERT TO SECRETARY

DO NOT DISTURB

2-232

E-LCR1

E-LCR2

E-LCR3

E-LCR4

NONE

NONE

NONE

NONE

FAUTO 14

FLASH 49

SECOND LCR DIGIT TRANSLATION




FORCED AUTO ANSWER

FLASH

FWD 60 CALL



(continued)

Feature

GRPK 66

Default

GROUP PICKUP

Description

HLDPK 12 HOLD PICKUP

HOLD 11 HOLD

HOTEL NONE HOTEL(Hotel Feature)

ICONF

IDISC

NONE

NONE

ISDN 3-PARTY CONFERENCE

ISDN 3-PARTY DISCONNECTION

IG

IHOLD

53

NONE

IN/OUT GROUP

ISDN 3-PARTY HOLD

INFDSP

IRET

LCR

LISTN

LNR

NONE

NONE

#

NONE

19

INFORMATION DISPLAY(Requires News/Call Plus)

ISDN 3-PARTY RETRIEVE

LEAST COST ROUTING

GROUP LISTENING

LAST NUMBER REDIAL

MMPA

MMPG

MSG

MYGRPK

NEW

NOCLIP

56

54

43

28

NONE

NONE

MEET ME PAGE ANSWER

MEET ME PAGE

MESSAGE

MY PICKUP GROUP CALL PICKUP

NEW CALL

NO CID SEND

OHVA

OPER

PAGE

PAGPK

NONE

0

55

10

PARK NONE

PMSG 48

OFF-HOOK VOICE ANNOUNCE

OPERATOR

PAGE

PICKUP PAGE HOLD

CALL PARK ORBIT

RB

REJECT

NONE

NONE

ROOM BILL(Hotel Feature)

OHVA REJECT

RSV

RTO

SELFID

NONE

NONE

NONE

ROOM STATUS VIEW(Hotel Feature)

RING PLAN TIME OVERRIDE

SELF SYSTEM ID


2-233

CHAPTER 2.


Feature Default Description

SETMG

SLOCAT

SLTALM

41

NONE

NONE

SET MESSAGE W/O RING

STAFF LOCATOR(Hotel Feature)

EASY ALARM SET TO SELF STATION

SLTMMC

SNR

15

17

NORMAL PHONE PROGRAMMING

SAVED NUMBER REDIAL

SPEED 16

SRELOC NONE SET

SSET

STATE

NONE

NONE

ISDN SUPPLEMENTARY SERVICE SET

SET EXECUTIVE STATE

(continued)

UA

VMADM

VMAME

VMMEMO

VMMSG

VMSCMT

VMSMSG

WAKEUP

WCOS

67

NONE

NONE

NONE

NONE

NONE

NONE

18

59

UNIVERSAL ANSWER

VOICE MAIL ADMINISTRATION(Requires SVMi card)

ANSWER MACHINE EMULATION(Requires SVMi card)

VOICE MAIL MEMO(Requires SVMi card)

VOICE MAIL MESSAGE KEY(Requires SVMi card)

VMS COMMENT(Requires SVM -800)

VMS MESSAGE(Requires SVM -800)

WAKE UP(Hotel Feature)

WORKING CLASS OF SERVICE

DEFAULT DATA

SEE DESCRIPTION

FEATURE CODES DEPEND ON COUNTRY

2-234



ACTION DISPLAY


Display shows:

2) Dial option number to make selection.(e.g., 06)

OR



3) Dial first letter of feature name.(e.g., 7)

OR

Press Volume button to make selection then press


4) Enter digits(e.g., 63) via the dial keypad.

5) Press Right Soft button to enter change and continue to make changes.

If an error message appears indicating duplication of access code, enter 1 for YES for change or

enter 0 for NO for no change.


OR


STN DIAL NUM:C1

S2-P01:201

Æ

FEAT DIAL NUMBER

ABAND :64

Æ_

FEAT NUMBER PLAN

PAGE :55

Æ

FEAT NUMBER PLAN

PARK :NONE

Æ_

FEAT NUMBER PLAN

PARK :NONE

Æ63

FEAT NUMBER PLAN

PARK :NONE

Æ63

SAME DIAL EXIST

CHANGE? Y:1,N:0

RELATED ITEMS

ALL MMCs


2-235

CHAPTER 2.


[725] SMDR OPTIONS

Allows the system administrator to select the information printed on the SMDR report.

The following options may be selected:

No Option

00 PAGE HEADER

01 LINE PER PAGE

04 AUTHORIZE

CODE

TIME

06 IN/OUT GROUP

07 DND CALL

08 WAKE-UP CALL

09 DIRECTORY

NAME

13 NO. OF DIAL

MASK

Default

YES

66

02 INCOMING CALL YES

03 OUTGOING CALL YES

NO

YES

NO

NO

YES

NONE

10 CALLER ID DATA NO

11 ABANDON CALL NO

0

Description

This option determines whether a page header will print at the top of each page. This would normally be turned off if SMDR is being sent to a Call Accounting machine.

This option selects the length of each page to determine when to print the SMDR header. The number of lines is in the range 01-99.

This option determines whether incoming calls will print on SMDR.

This option determines whether outgoing calls will print on SMDR.

This option determines whether authorization codes will print on SMDR. If this option is set to NO, ‘****’ is printed on SMDR.

This option determines whether valid calls will include the minimum call time in total call duration.

This option allows a message, IN GROUP or OUT

GROUP, to be printed in the ‘digits dialled’ column each time a station enters or leaves a group.

This option allows a message, IN DND or OUT DND, to be printed in the ‘digits dialled’ column each time a station enters or leaves DND.

This option determines whether stations receiving an alarm reminder call will print on SMDR.

This option allows the system administrator to enter a name up to 16 characters which will appear on the

SMDR header.

This option can be selected to print Caller ID data received from the Central Office on incoming calls.

This option requires the use of a 132-column wide carriage printer or an 80-column printer set for condensed print.

If this option is set to YES, unanswered calls for which

CID information was received will print on SMDR.

If this option is set to a numeric value, the selected last digits of the number dialled field will be masked as asterisks(*) on the SMDR print out. Maximum masked digits is 18. First 4 digits will not mask.

2-236



(continued)


15 INCOMING

ANSWER

NO

16 INTERCOM CALL NO

17 KEY MMC IN/OUT NO

FEED

LINE

23 DID NUM/NAME

24 ITP

REGISTRATION

25 SET

RELOCATION

END

0

YES

NO

NO

Description

If this option is set to YES, the duration of calls ringing before being answered will print on SMDR.

This option determines whether intercom calls will print on SMDR.

If set to YES the SMDR record will show programming being opened and closed in MMC 200 and MMC 800.

This option determines where the page feed is inserted on HM REPT.(Hotel Application Only)

This option determines that the number of empty lines per each page on HM REPT.(Hotel Application Only)

If this option is set to YES, received DID information will print on SMDR.

If set to YES the SMDR record will show registration of

ITP phones.

If set to YES the SMDR record will show Set Relocations.



DEFAULT DATA

SEE DESCRIPTION



2-237

CHAPTER 2.


ACTION DISPLAY


Display shows:

2) Dial the option number.(e.g., 01)

OR

Use the Volume buttons to scroll through the options and press Right Soft button to select an option.

3) Enter the option data.

OR

Use the Volume buttons to press Right

Soft button to save the data and return to step 2.


OR


RELATED ITEMS

MMC 300 CUSTOMER ON/OFF PER STATION

PAGE HEADER

PRINT: YES

LINE PER PAGE

60 LINE/PAGE

LINE PER PAGE

50 LINE/PAGE

2-238



[727] SYSTEM VERSION DISPLAY

This MMC is used for system version display only.(READ ONLY) The displays depend on which modules are included in the system

DEFAULT DATA

NONE

ACTION DISPLAY


Display shows:

2) Press Volume button to show other modules, e.g.,:


OR


MP10-MAIN VERS

07.02.26 V4.01.p

MP10-SP VERS

07.02.26 V1.01.e

MP10-VMS VERS

07.02.26 V4.01.p

MP10-DATA VERS

NO VERSION DATA

RELATED ITEMS

NONE


2-239

CHAPTER 2.


[728] CID TRANSLATION TABLE

Allows the system administrator or technician to associate a CID number received from the central office with a name programmed in this translation table. If there is no match between a received number and a name in this table, ‘no CID name’ will be displayed.

The translation table consists of 1000 entries. Each entry comprises a telephone number up to 14 digits and a name up to 16 digits.



DEFAULT DATA

NONE

ACTION DISPLAY


Display shows first entry

2) Dial entry number.(e.g., 0005)

OR

Use Volume button to scroll through entries and press Right Soft button to select entry.

3) Enter telephone number and press Right Soft button to advance to name entry.

OR

Enter telephone number and press Left Soft button to return to step 2.

4) Enter associated name and press Right Soft button to return to step 2.


OR


CLIP XLAT(0001)

DGT:

CLIP XLAT (0005)

DGT:_

CLIP XLAT (0005)

DGT:3054264100

CLIP XLAT (0005)

SAMSUNG TELECOM

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 312

MMC 608

ALLOW CALLER ID

ASSIGN REVIEW BLOCK

2-240



[740] STATION PAIR

Assigns a secondary station to a phone. This secondary station can be a keyset or single line phone. The secondary station assumes the Call Forwarding, Class of Service, LCR

Class, and DND attributes of the primary station. The secondary station will ring when the primary station rings, and vice versa. Features can be set or cancelled at either station.

When changing the COS

If the COS is changed for either station in MMC 301, the change affects both stations. Messages from the secondary extension will display the secondary extension number.

DEFAULT DATA

NONE

ACTION DISPLAY


Display shows

2)

Enter the primary station number via dial

Keypad.(e.g., 201)

OR

Use Volume button to select and press Right Soft button.

3) Enter the secondary station number via dial

Keypad.(e.g., 205)

OR

Use Volume button to select and press Right Soft button.


OR


[201] PRIMARY

SECONDARY:NONE

[201] PRIMARY

SECONDARY:NONE

[201] PRIMARY

SECONDARY:205

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 102

MMC 301

MMC 310

CALL FORWARD

ASSIGN STATION COS



2-241

CHAPTER 2.


[746] COSTING DIAL PLAN

The COSTING DIAL PLAN is used to analyze the leading dialled digits of a dialled number and determine what DIAL PLAN it is to follow. Data entry for this program is in three fields: ENTRY, DIGITS and COST RATE table reference.

DIGITS

Up to 500 entries may be made. Each entry can be up to 10 digits. These are the entries that will be searched to find a match with the digits dialled by the station making the call. This is a leading digits table and the system will look for the exact leading digits in the table that match the number dialled. For example, if a user dials 1305 and the COSTING DIAL

PLAN contains 1, 1308 and 1312, the dialled digits will be matched to 1 because 1308 and

1312 do not form a complete match. When this table is created by the technician or when any new entries are added, the system automatically places all entries in numerical order.

Wild cards(

∗) can be used to represent any digit. The Toll Restriction Wild Card Character assignment(MMC 704) is common with Call Costing and Toll Restriction. When all entries are used, [LAST ENTRY] is displayed.

DIAL PLAN

This shows in the programming display as DP and represents a pattern(1-7, 8). This pattern is used by MMC 433, TRUNK COST RATE, to determine the correct billing according to

MMC 749, RATE CALCULATION TABLE

When the system finds a DIAL PLAN match for the digits dialled, the system checks

MMC 749 to see what RATE CALCULATION to use for costing the call.

EXAMPLES

When a station user dials a number, the system will search the COSTING DIAL PLAN to find a match. If 13056 is dialled and this MMC contains entries 1, 13, 1305 and 1401, the closest match is 1305 and this will be selected. If 1305 is dialled and this MMC contains entries 1, 13, 13056 and 1401, no action will be taken until the station user dials another digit. If the next digit is 6, the 13056 entry is the closest match and this entry will be selected, but if the next digit is anything other than 6, the 13 entry is the closest match.

Whenever a new entry is added, the system will sort all entries in numerical order because this is the logical order in which the system analyzes digits. Wild cards are checked after exact digits. If 1813 and 18

∗∗ are entered, the system will check 1813 first. If no match is found, it will check 18

∗∗.

2-242



DEFAULT DATA

NONE

ACTION DISPLAY


Display shows:

2) Dial CALL COST entry.(e.g., 005)

OR

Press Volume button to select entry and press Right Soft button to move cursor.

3) Enter digit string via the dial keypad and press Right Soft button.

4) Enter DIAL PLAN 1-8.(e.g., 8)

OR

Press Volume button to select dial plan and press Right Soft button to save and return to step 2.


OR


COST DP (001)

DIGIT:

COST DP (005)

DIGIT:_

COST DP (005)

DIGIT:1305

COST DP (005)

CALL RATE: 8

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 433

MMC 747

COST RATE



2-243

CHAPTER 2.


[747] RATE CALCULATION TABLE

The RATE CALCULATION TABLE is used to define the billing charges for each COST

RATE. These rate tables correlate with the Trunk Cost Rate and the Costing Dial Plan.

There are eight call costing rates. Each rate has the following data fields.

No Type

(FIRST INTERVAL

DURATION)

(FIRST INTERVAL

COST)

Description

This is the amount of time at the beginning of each call to which a fixed cost is applied.

The range is 0-999 seconds; e,g. 180 seconds(three minutes).

This is the cost for the first interval duration in £s sterling or Euros.

The range is 0 to 999; e.g., 345(£3.45 or €3.45).

(SECOND INTER-

VAL DURATION)

(SECOND INTER-

VAL COST )

4 SURCHARGE

This is the duration of each billing increment after the first interval has expired.

The range is 0-999 seconds; e.g., 006 seconds(six seconds).

This is the cost for each billing increment, in £s sterling or Euros, after the first interval has expired.

The range is 0-999; e.g., 100(£1.00 or €1.00).

This is a one-time charge, in £s sterling or Euros, that is applied to the call over and above the time charges.

The range is 0-999; e.g.,150(£1.50 or €1.50).

Currency values

(£ or €)

Currency values(£ or €) depend on the setting for the USE EURO option in MMC 210.

DEFAULT DATA

ALL COST RATES: NO DATA

ACTION DISPLAY


Display shows:

2) Dial COST RATE number 1-8.(e.g., 3)

OR

Press Volume button to select COST RATE and press Right Soft button to move cursor.

COST RATE (1)

1ST DUR :000 SEC

COST RATE (3)

1ST DUR :000 SEC

2-244



3) Dial option number 0-4.(e.g., 1)

OR



4) Enter data via dial keypad.(e.g., 125=1.25)

OR

Press Volume button to select data and press



OR


RELATED ITEMS

MMC 433

MMC 746

COST RATE

COSTING DIAL PLAN

COST RATE (3)

1ST COST:000

COST RATE (3)

1ST COST:125


2-245

CHAPTER 2.


[750] VM CARD RESTART

This MMC is used for the Samsung Built-In Voice Mail card.

There are four options available in this MMC:


0 MBX DOWNLOAD When the Built-In Voice Mail module starts, part of the power up procedure will download data from the system to determine time, date, what mailboxes to create, and system numbering plan. This must be done at least once, but once done this download feature can be turned NO to save boot up time.

2 VIRTUAL This option is determine which type virtual port include during

DOWNLOAD mailbox and system numbering plan downloading procedure.

The virtual port type are followed:

No Type

0 VIRTUAL EXT

Description

Virtual extension number

1 DESKTOP ITP DESKTOP IP-based phone number

2 DECT PHONE DECT terminal number

3 VM CONNECTION

3 MOBILE ITP Wireless IP-based mobile phone number

4 BRI STATION ISDN terminal number

5 VOIP NET TRK VoIP networking trunk number

6 VOIP 323 TRK VoIP H.323 trunk number

7 VOIP SIP TRK VoIP SIP trunk number

8 REMOTE STN Remote station number via networking

Select VMS Type. There are 3 types: SVMi CARD, DLI CON-

NECT, IP-UMS SERVER(impossible simultaneously use all type)

DEFAULT DATA

ALL OPTIONS ARE NO

2-246



ACTION DISPLAY


Display shows:


Right Soft button.

3) Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button.


OR


MBX DOWNLOAD

NO

VM RESTART

RESET NOW ? NO

VM RESTART

RESET NOW ? YES

RELATED ITEMS

NONE


2-247

CHAPTER 2.


[751] ASSIGN MAILBOX

This MMC is only used for the Samsung Built-In Voice Mail card. It assigns mailboxes to each station or group as required. During Voice Mail card power up, mailboxes will be created for each directory number with a ‘YES’ entry. Once the Voice Mail database has been created, new mailboxes can be added: y

Through Voice Mail administration. y

By adding a new mailbox in this MMC.

If a mailbox is to be removed, this must be done through Voice Mail administration.

If a station that does not have an associated mailbox calls the Voice Mail system, it will be answered by the Voice Mail system main greeting.

CONDITIONS

Mailboxes that are needed for users who do not have an extension must be added through

Voice Mail programming.

DEFAULT DATA

ALL STATIONS: YES

ALL GROUPS: NO

ACTION DISPLAY


Display shows:.

2) Dial station number.

OR

Press Volume button to scroll the number and press Right Soft button to move cursor.

3) Dial 0 for NO or 1 for YES.

OR

Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to save and return to step 2.


OR


ASSIGN MAIL BOX

[201] YES

ASSIGN MAIL BOX

[202] YES

ASSIGN MAIL BOX

[202] NO

RELATED ITEMS

NONE

2-248



[752] AUTO RECORD

y y y y

This MMC is only used for the Samsung Built-In Voice Mail card. Specific stations in the phone system can be assigned to automatically record conversations. When this option is set, all incoming, all outgoing, or all calls(incoming and outgoing) can be recorded.

In this MMC you can assign:

Station number: Which station can use this feature.

Mailbox number: What mailbox the conversations are recorded in.

I, O or B: What type of calls are recorded.(in, out or both)

Voice mail port number: What port is dedicated to the station.

Before using the Auto Record feature

Before using the Auto Record feature, make sure that you are not violating any laws. Samsung is not responsible for any illegal use of this feature.

CONDITIONS

A maximum of eight stations can use this feature at one time. The same port cannot be assigned to more than one station. Attempts to do this will result in an error message. When a

Voice Mail port is assigned here, it is automatically removed from the Voice Mail group defined in MMC 601.

DEFAULT DATA

NONE

ACTION DISPLAY


Display shows:

2) Dial station number via dial keypad.

OR


3) Dial mailbox number via dial keypad.

OR


AUTO RECORD

STN:201 MB:NONE

AUTO RECORD

STN:201 MB:NONE

AUTO RECORD

STN:201 MB:201


2-249

CHAPTER 2.


4) Dial VM number via dial keypad.

OR


5) Dial call type via dial keypad.(0: I, 1: O or 2: B)

OR



OR


RELATED ITEMS

NONE

AUTO RECORD

PORT:209 CALL:I

AUTO RECORD

PORT:209 CALL:B

2-250



[753] WARNING DESTINATION

This MMC is only used for the Samsung Built-In Voice Mail card. It provides an emergency destination for calls destined for the card if the card is removed or is offline.

In addition, any calls that are forwarded to the card will not forward; they will remain ringing at the ‘fwd from’ station until answered. This destination can be a station number or a group number.

DEFAULT DATA

5000

ACTION DISPLAY


Display shows:

2) Dial station number or group number.

OR

Press Volume button to scroll through numbers and select.


OR


WARNING DEST.

DEST:500

WARNING DEST.

DEST:501

RELATED ITEMS

NONE


2-251

CHAPTER 2.


[754] VM HALT

This MMC is only used for the Samsung Built-In Voice Mail. It is used to halt the Voice

Mail Module. If the Voice Mail module is halted by using this MMC, system has to restart to use the Voice Mail module again. At that time, ‘RESTART’ option can be used.

DEFAULT DATA

RESTART

ACTION DISPLAY


Display shows:

2) Enter 1 to HALT or 0 to PROC

OR

Press Volume button to select.

3)

If you select 1 to halt, display shows:

Press 1 to confirm.


OR


VM HALT

STATUS:RESTART

VM HALT

STATUS:RESTART

VM HALT

ARE YOU SURE? YES

RELATED ITEMS

NONE

2-252



[755] VM ALARM

This MMC is only used for the Samsung Built-In Voice Mail. It will generate an alarm message in the mailbox defined in MMC 751 whenever the Voice Mail disk drive reaches a threshold.

The threshold is measured as a percentage of capacity. This means that if the MMC is set for 80, the alarm will be generated when the disk exceeds 80% of the available drive space.

DEFAULT DATA

THRESHOLD: 80%

ACTION DISPLAY


Display shows:

2) Enter new threshold level.(e.g., 70)


OR


VM ALARM

THRESHOLD:80

VM ALARM

THRESHOLD:70

RELATED ITEMS

NONE


2-253

CHAPTER 2.


[756] ASSIGN VMMOH

This MMC is only used for the Samsung Built-In Voice Mail. It is used to assign each port a Music-On-Hold source for the system from a sound file located on the Voice Mail card hard disk drive. The 100 available sound files are defined as numbers 5000 to 5099.

To use the default music, select the number; otherwise, make sure you record the sound file first. Then, assign the sound file to a Voice Mail port.

For example, if you record sound file 5025 you would associate 25 with a specific Voice

Mail port, e.g., 301. This will dedicate the port for use only as MOH and remove it from group 529 or 549. Now 301will show up as a valid music source in MMCs 308, 309 and

408.

Each Music-On-Hold source assigned here requires one Voice Mail port.

When the first Built-In Voice Mail port is used for VMMOH

If the first Built-In Voice Mail port is used for VMMOH, it must be disabled before boot up since Built-In Voice Mail and the system use port 1 during boot up to exchange critical information. For this reason we suggest you use the last port as

VMMOH ports.

DEFAULT DATA

NOT USED

ACTION DISPLAY


Display shows:

2)

Dial VM number.(e.g.,

301

)

OR

Press Volume button to make a selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor.

3)

Enter VM message number.(e.g., 25)

OR



OR


SET VMMOH

301 : NOT USED

SET VMMOH

301: NOT USED

SET VMMOH

301: 25

RELATED ITEMS

NONE

2-254



[757] VM IN/OUT

This MMC is only used for the Samsung Built-In Voice Mail. It is used to assign each

Voice Mail port as used for incoming, outgoing or both-way calls. This MMC must support outgoing calls if off-premises notification(beeper, outbound follow me or outbound notification) is used.

DEFAULT DATA

IN/OUT

ACTION DISPLAY


Display shows:

2) Dial VM number.(e.g., 301)

OR


3) Enter option via dial keypad.(e.g., IN)

OR



OR


VM IN/OUT

301: IN/OUT

VM IN/OUT

301: IN/OUT

VM IN/OUT

301: IN

RELATED ITEMS

NONE


2-255

CHAPTER 2.


[758] VM DAY/NIGHT

This MMC is only used for the Samsung Built-In Voice Mail. The module can operate in either a DAY or NIGHT operating mode. The mode determines what main menu greetings and options are played to callers and can change automatically (if enabled in the card) according to the settings in this MMC.

This MMC contains either a DAY or NIGHT instruction for each Ring Plan.

DEFAULT DATA

ALL RING PLANS: DAY

ACTION DISPLAY


Display shows:

2) Enter ring plan number.

OR


3) Dial 0 for day or 1 for night.

OR

Press Volume button to make a selection and press Right Soft button to save and move cursor.


OR


VM DAY/NIGHT

RING 1 : DAY

VM DAY/NIGHT

RING 3 : DAY

VM DAY/NIGHT

RING 3 : DAY

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 507 ASSIGN RING PLAN TIME

2-256



[759] CLI RINGING

This MMC assigns a specific CID number received from the central office to a specific ring plan destination. Also allows you to reject a specific CID number and assign priorities.

There are 9 priority levels: priority 1 is the highest and priority 9 is the lowest.

It also allows you to select the ring tone heard at a phone when called by a specific CID number.

There is also a cadence control option to perform a similar function for SLTs. There are eight ring tones available along with a Follow Station(NO) option. There are five cadences and a Follow

Station option(NO) for SLTs. The CID Ringing table consists of 100 entries.

DEFAULT DATA

NONE

Option

CLI

REJ

PRI

Description

CID number to be received from the central office. Up to 16 digits may be entered.

CID call reject option. When this sets YES, if a call comes that matched CID number and CLI field then the system will be reject call.

CID priority option. There are 9 priority levels: priority 1 is the highest and priority 9 is the lowest. When calls into station group come and group members are all busy, the system will assign a priority to the CID number so that calls from a high priority CID number will be placed at the front of the group queue.

If this option sets NO, the longest call that placed at the group queue has the highest priority.

Ring plan and destination during each ring plan. The destination can be a station, station group.

R1: XXX, R2: XXX,

R3: XXX, R4: XXX,

R5: XXX, R6: XXX

TONE

CAD

Ring Tone options for a specific CID Number.(NO, 1~8)

No Calls will ring with the phone users choice of ring frequency.

1~8 Calls from the programmed CID number will ring phones with this ring frequency.

Ring Cadence options for a specific CID Number at SLT’s(NO, 1~5)

No Calls will ring with the normal SLT ring cadences.

1 Calls from the programmed CID number will ring SLT’s with the intercom ring cadence.

2 Calls from the programmed CID number will ring SLT’s with the CO ring cadence.

3 Calls from the programmed CID number will ring SLT’s with the DOOR ring cadence.

4 Calls from the programmed CID number will ring SLT’s with the ALARM ring cadence.

5 Calls from the programmed CID number will ring SLT’s with the CALL-

BACK ring cadence.


2-257

CHAPTER 2.


ACTION DISPLAY


Display shows:

2) Dial entry number.(e.g., 005)

OR


3) Enter CID number and press Right Soft button to advance to next entry.

OR

Enter CID number and press Left Soft button to return to step 2.

4) Enter reject option via dial keypad.

(1 for YES, 0 for NO)

OR



5) Enter priority level via dial keypad.(1-9 or NO)

OR



6) Enter station or group number for each Ring.

Plan destination via dial keypad.(e.g., 501)

OR



7) Dial 1-8(or NO) to select ring tone.(e.g., 2)

OR



8) Dial 1-5(or NO) to select ring cadence.

OR




OR


CLI RINGING(001)

CLI:

CLI RINGING(005)

CLI:_

CLI RINGING(005)

CLI:1234567

CLI RINGING(005)

REJ:NO PRI:NO

CLI RINGING(005)

REJ:NO PRI:NO

CLI RINGING(005)

R1:501 R2:NONE

CLI RINGING(005)

TONE:2 CAD:NO

CLI RINGING(005)

TONE:2 CAD:NO

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 312 ALLOW CALLER ID

2-258



[760] ITEM COST TABLE

This MMC provides a means to assign a code to a billable item along with a 10-character name for the item. There are a maximum of 100 entries(00 to 99) in the table with item 00 reserved as the code for room deposits, 01 reserved as the code for phone deposits and items 89 to 99 reserved for other PMS stream items.

These item codes, with the exception of codes 93 to 99, will appear on the guests’ bills at checkout and will serve to identify what each charge on the bill is for. The room bill, when printed, will also show telephone calls with an item designation of TEL and the name field will show the number dialled. In addition to the name, up to eight of the tax codes or rates defined in MMC 761 can be applied to each item.

PRE DEFINED CODES

Description

This is the code used for pre-pay room deposits.

This is the code used for pre-pay phone deposits.

No Code

93

94

95

96

97

98

99

00 Room Deposit

01 Phone Deposit

02-88 -

89

90

W/UP SET

W/UP ANS

91

92

W/UP N/ANS

W/UP CANCL

Check In

Check out

Available

Occupied

Clean Room

Fix Room

Hold

A wake up call was set.

A wake up call was answered.

A wake up call was not answered.

A wake up call was cancelled.

A guest has checked into a room.

A guest has checked out of a room.

A room has been flagged as AVAILABLE.

A room has been flagged as OCCUPIED.

A room has been flagged as NEEDS CLEANING.

A room has been flagged as NEED MAINTENANCE.

A room has been flagged as HOLD.

CONDITIONS


OPERATION.



DEFAULT DATA

NO ENTRIES


2-259

CHAPTER 2.


ACTION DISPLAY


Display shows:

2) Enter valid code number(e.g., 02) via dial keypad.

OR


3) Enter item name(e.g., ROOM COST) via keypad.

4) Press Right Soft button to move cursor to tax entries.

5) Enter the tax rates that apply to this item(‘1’ selects each rate) and press Right Soft button to return to


OR


ITEM CODE (00)

NAME:RM Deposit

ITEM CODE (02)

NAME:

ITEM CODE (02)

NAME: ROOM COST

ITEM CODE (02)

TAXES:00000000

ITEM CODE (02)

TAXES:11000000

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 761 TAX RATE SETUP

2-260



[761] TAX RATE SETUP

This MMC allows the technician to set up the eight tax rates used in MMC 760. Each tax rate may be defined as a fixed value or as a percentage of the item cost. In addition, a 10- character name may be used to define the reason for the tax. The options are detailed below.

Option

TAX RATE

TYPE

VALUE

NAME

Description

The number assigned to this tax rate. Tax rates are numbered 1 to 8 to match the rate field in MMC 760, counting from left to right.

The type of tax. Defines if the VALUE is applied as a percentage(%) of the cost of an item(e.g., service charge) or is added as a fixed currency value(C) to an item or is applied as a Inclusive VAT percentage(I) of the cost of an item.

The actual tax rate that will be applied to the item cost.

A 10-character name that will be displayed on the room bill alongside the tax.

CONDITIONS


OPERATION.



DEFAULT DATA

ALL RATES ARE %

ACTION DISPLAY


Display shows:

2) Enter valid tax number, e.g., 2, via dial keypad.

OR


3) Dial 0 for ‘%’, 1 for ‘C’ or 2 for ‘I’.

(Refer to table above)

OR


TAX RATE (1)

TYPE:% VAL:00.00

TAX RATE (2)

TYPE:% VAL:00.00

TAX RATE (2)

TYPE:C VAL:00.00


2-261

CHAPTER 2.


4) Enter the tax rate or value via dial keypad.

OR


If valid entry, system advances cursor.

5) Enter name and press Right Soft button to return to step 2.


OR


RELATED ITEMS

MMC 760 ITEM COST TABLE

TAX RATE (2)

TYPE:C VAL:01.25

TAX RATE (2)

NAME:MIA BED

2-262



[762] ROOM COST RATE

This MMC allows the technician to set up the cost rates for a week. Each room cost rate can be assigned with a percentage of the actual room cost from Sunday to Saturday.

EXAMPLE: If you set SUN: 150%, 1. MON: 100%, 2.TUE: 090% .

Then, if you set £100 as the room cost when checking in a guest, the real room cost will be

£150 on Sunday, £100 on Monday and £90 on Tuesday.

CONDITIONS

This function can be used only when the Hotel function is enabled in ‘MMC 813, HOTEL

OPERATION’.

DEFAULT DATA

ALL RATES ARE 100%

ACTION DISPLAY


Display shows:

2) Dial day number 0-6.(e.g., 2)

OR

Press Volume button to select day and press


3) Enter room cost rate.(001-999, e.g., 090)

RM COST RAT(SUN)

100% :

RM COST RAT(TUE)

100% :

RM COST RAT(TUE)

100% :090


OR


RELATED ITEMS

MMC 760 ITEM COST TABLE


2-263

CHAPTER 2.


[763] SECOND LCR

This MMC allows the technician to input the Extended LCR information table.

Max table index is 200. This table have translation and route information for input digits.

The last table(index 200) has only ‘NEXT ROUTE’ option. This is used for the case there are no matching table for user input digits. NEXT ROUTE option can be set by LCR or trunk group as follows.

Default

-


IN DIGIT

OUT DIGIT

Define user input digits after E-LCR code

(Max 16 digits)

Outgoing digits(these digits will be sent instead of input digits) (Max

16 digits)

USE LCR NUM Select which E-LCR code(E-LCR1, E-LCR2, E-LCR3, E-LCR4) used for this table index.

NEXT ROUTE Select ‘LCR’ or trunk group to seizure.

‘LCR’ means that MMC710 LCR DIGIT table will be used with outgoing digits(OUT DIGIT).

-

ALL

LCR

CONDITIONS

MMC724 FEATURE CODE: E-LCR1, E-LCR2, E-LCR3, E-LCR4 addition

DEFAULT DATA

SEE DESCRIPTION

ACTION DISPLAY


Display shows:

2) Dial Table number 001-200.

OR

Press Volume button to select Table number and press Right Soft button to move cursor.

3) Enter IN DIGIT maximum 16 digits, and press


4) Enter OUT DIGIT option number([1]).

OR

Press Volume button to select OUT DIGIT and press


(001)IN DIGIT

(001)IN DIGIT

(001)IN DIGIT

1234

(001)OUT DIGIT

2-264



5) Enter OUT DIGIT maximum 16 digits, and press


6) Enter USE LCR NUM option number([2]).

OR

Press Volume button to select USE LCR NUM and press Right Soft button to move cursor.

7) Enter USE LCR NUM maximum 16 digits, and press


8) Enter NEXT ROUTE option number([3]).

OR

Press Volume button to select NEXT ROUTE and press Right Soft button to move cursor.

9) Enter USE LCR NUM maximum 16 digits, and press



OR


RELATED ITEMS

MMC 310

MMC 711

MMC 712

MMC 713

MMC 724

LCR CLASS

LCR TIME

LCR ROUTE

LCR MODF. DGT

NUMBER PLAN

(001)OUT DIGIT

7500

(001)USE LCR NUM

(001)USE LCR NUM

9

(001)NEXT ROUTE

(001)NEXT ROUTE

LCR


2-265

CHAPTER 2.


[800] ENABLE TECHNICIAN PROGRAM

Used to open and close technician-level programming. If programming is not opened and an attempt is made to access a system MMC, an error message will be displayed.

CONDITIONS

A 4-digit passcode is required to access this MMC. Each character can be digits 0-9. When opened, this MMC enables access to all MMCs.

DEFAULT DATA

DISABLE

ACTION DISPLAY


Display shows:

ENABLE TECH.PROG

PASSCODE:

ENABLE TECH.PROG

PASSCODE:

∗∗∗∗

ENABLE TECH.PROG

DISABLE TENANT:1

Incorrect code shows:

3) Enter 1 to enable or 0 to disable.

OR


Right Soft button to move tenant number and

ENABLE TECH. PROG

PASSCODE ERROR

ENABLE TECH.PROG

ENABLE TENANT:1 enter tenant number(1-2).

4) Press Speaker button to advance to MMC entry level.

801:TEC.PASSCODE

5) Enter the MMC required to begin programming.

6) To log out and return to MMC 800, press

Volume button to select DISABLE.

OR

Press Speaker button then Transfer to return to normal display.

Programming option will time out.

SELECT PROG.ID

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 801 CHANGE TECHNICIAN PASSCODE

2-266



[801] CHANGE TECHNICIAN PASSCODE

Used to change the passcode which allows access to MMC 800, Enable Technician Program, from its current value.

CONDITIONS

The passcode is four characters long. Each character can be digits 0-9. The current or old passcode is required for this MMC.

DEFAULT DATA

DEFAULT PASSCODE: 4321

ACTION DISPLAY


2) Enter new passcode.

3) Enter new passcode again.

4) If passcode is correct, press Right Soft key to continue and enter desired MMC.

If passcode is incorrect.



OR


TECH. PASSCODE

NEW CODE:_

TECH. PASSCODE

NEW CODE:

∗∗∗∗

TECH. PASSCODE

VERIFY :

∗∗∗∗

TECH. PASSCODE

VERIFY :SUCCESS

TECH. PASSCODE

VERIFY :FAILURE

TECH. PASSCODE

NEW CODE:

∗∗∗∗

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 800 ENABLE TECHNICIAN PROGRAM


2-267

CHAPTER 2.


[802] CUSTOMER ACCESS MMC NUMBER

Allows the System Administrator(customer) to have access to certain MMCs. For example, it is required that the customer has access to MMC 102, Call Forward, for call forwarding but it is not required that the customer has access to MMC 710, LCR Digit Table, for LCR dial plans.

This MMC is for both tenants.

DEFAULT DATA

NONE

ACTION DISPLAY


Display shows:

2) Enter desired tenant number(1-2) via dial keypad.

OR


3) Enter desired MMC number via dial keypad.

OR


4) Enter 1 for YES or 0 for NO via dial keypad.

OR

Press Volume button to make selection and press Left Soft button to return to step 3 to make additional entries.


OR


RELATED ITEMS

NONE

CUST.USE MMC :1

100:STN LOCK:YES

CUST.USE MMC :1

100:STN LOCK:YES

CUST.USE MMC :1

102:CALL FWD:YES

CUST.USE MMC :1

102:CALL FWD:NO

2-268



[805] TX LEVEL AND GAIN

Allows the system administrator to set the base level of TX volume on phones. There are eight levels that can be controlled by the Volume buttons on phones, and 10 controllable levels in the system. This MMC allows the system administrator to classify any desired eight levels within 11.


0 TX LEVEL CONTROL

1

2

MISC TSW GAIN

TSW GAIN

CONTROL

Adjusts the transmitting sensitivity(max.: 9) Default values are:

INDEX: 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

LEVEL: 0 1 2 4 3 5 6 7

Adjusts the level of the internal music source of the MCP card or the external music source of the MIS card(0~7, higher numbers mean lower levels). Default value is 0.

Adjusts the tone sensitivity. There are eight types of matrix connections of the T-Switch that adjust the tone sensitivity(0-7, below).

Connection between Trunk lines are only applicable when set as 0 in MMC 421.

0 DGP DLI phone

1 SLT SLI phone

2 ATRK Analogue trunk

3 DTRK Digital trunk

4 DECT DECT terminal

5 VOIP MGI port or IP-based phone

6 SVMi SVMi port

7 WLAN WIP port

DEFAULT DATA

RX

TX

DGP Æ


‘MMC [805] TX LEVEL AND GAIN’ should not be changed from the default levels without the assistance of the local SAMSUNG distributor.

DGP

0.0

SLT

0.0

ATRK DTRK DECT

0.0 0.0 -6.0

VOIP

0.0

SVMi WLAN

-6.0 +1.9

DECT Æ

VOIP Æ

SVMi Æ

WLAN Æ


0.0

0.0

0.0

-6.0

0.0

0.0

0.0

-2.5

0.0

0.0

0.0

-6.0

0.0

+1.9 -6.0 0.0 -6.0 0.0

0.0 -6.0 0.0 -6.0 0.0

0.0 -6.0 0.0 -6.0 0.0

0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 +1.9

2-269

CHAPTER 2.


ACTION DISPLAY


Display shows:

2) Press Volume button to make selection(0-3) and press Right Soft button to move cursor.

3) (When the TX LEVEL CONTROL is selected) a. Select the desired volume level via dial keypad.

OR

Press Volume button to go to the next volume level and press Right Soft button. b. Enter desired volume data via dial keypad.

OR

4) (When the MISC TSW GAIN is selected) a. Enter desired MISC/BGM TSW gain via dial keypad.

OR

Press Volume button to select desired MISC/BGM

TSW gain and press Right Soft button.

5) (When the TSW GAIN CONTROL is selected) a. Select the TX TWS connect type via dial keypad.

OR

Press Volume button to go to the next TX TSW connect type and press Right Soft button. b. Select the RX TSW connect type via dial keypad.

OR

Press Volume button to go to the next RX TSW connect type and press Right Soft button. c. Enter desired TSW gain control data via dial keypad.

OR

Press Volume button to scroll data and press

Right Soft button.


OR


TX LEVEL CONTROL

LEVEL 0

Æ0

TX LEVEL CONTROL

LEVEL 1

Æ1

TX LEVEL CONTROL

LEVEL 1

Æ1

TX LEVEL CONTROL

LEVEL 1

Æ3

MISC TSW GAIN

BGM/MOH :0

TSW GAIN CONTROL

SLT

ÆDGP :+0.0

TSW GAIN CONTROL

SLT

ÆATRK:+0.0

TSW GAIN CONTROL

SLT

ÆATRK:+1.9

RELATED ITEMS

NONE

2-270



[806] CARD PRE-INSTALL

Allows the pre-programming of a card slot for a specific card type. A card inserted into a system will not be recognized by the system until it is enabled using this MMC. Cards installed using this MMC will not be assigned in the system numbering plan—you should use MMC 724 to assign the desired directory numbers to extensions, trunks, ports or miscellaneous functions.

When a card is removed and a different type card is inserted

If a card is removed and a different card is inserted, and this MMC is performed, the memory associated with the previous card(e.g., key programming) will be erased.

When a previous card is UNI Board and a current card is the same, but the modules are changed

If a UNI card is removed and a UNI card which has different modules is inserted, system will recognize automatically. So it does not need to preinstall .

DEFAULT DATA

NONE

ACTION DISPLAY


Display shows:

2) Enter cabinet number via dial keypad.(e.g., 1)

OR


3) Enter slot number via dial keypad.(e.g., 6)

OR


4) Dial 1 for YES to reset card or dial 0 for NO.

OR

C:1–S:1

8 DLI

Æ8 DLI

C:1–S:1

8 DLI

Æ8 DLI

C:1–S:6

16 DLI

Æ16 DLI

C:1–S:6

RESET CARD ? NO


2-271

CHAPTER 2.



5) Dial 1 for YES to reset card or dial 0 for NO.

OR


C:1–S:6

ARE YOU SURE?NO

2-272




OR


RELATED ITEMS

MMC 724 DIAL NUMBERING PLAN

[807] PHONE VOLUME CONTROL

Allows the system administrator to set phone volume levels.

Phone Volume Level

No

0

1

KEY TONE VOL

SIDETONE VOL

Type No

0

1

FX

Type

LINE VOLUME

SPEAKER VOLUME

3

4

MIC TX LEVEL

NOISE GUARD

3

4

MIC LP ATTEN

ACOU DECOUPL

9 MIN RX VOL(28D, 12L, 21D, ITP)


‘MMC [807] PHONE VOLUME CONTROL’ should not be changed from the default levels without the assistance of the local SAMSUNG distributor.


2-273

CHAPTER 2.


DEFAULT DATA

DEPENDS ON PHONE TYPE(SHOWN FOR 21D)

21D FX

Type

KEY TONE VOL

SIDETONE VOL

HANDSET TX

MIC TX LEVEL

NOISE GUARD

NOISE THRES

ALC THRES

TX/RX THRES.

TX/RX COMP

MIN RX VOL

Default

4

3

1

1

8

3

5

1

7

6

Type

LINE VOLUME

SPEAKER VOLUME

NOR.LP ATTEN

MIC LP ATTEN

ACOU DECOUPL

ELEC DECOUPL

T/R RATIO

R/T RATIO

VOL.CONTROL:US24

KEY TONE VOL:1

VOL.CONTROL:EU24

KEY TONE VOL:1

VOL.CONTROL:EU24

SIDETONE VOL:1

VOL.CONTROL:EU24

HANDSET TX :6

Default

3

14

4

5

8

2

8

2

ACTION DISPLAY


Display shows:

2) Enter phone type via dial keypad.

OR



3) Enter volume item via dial keypad.

OR



4) Enter volume data via dial keypad.

OR




OR


RELATED ITEMS

NONE

2-274



[810] HALT PROCESSING

Used only in the event that all data processing needs to be stopped either in a single cabinet slot or in the entire system.

DEFAULT DATA

PROC

ACTION DISPLAY


Display shows:

2) Enter cabinet selection via dial keypad.

OR


OR

Select all cabinets and slots.(and go to step 4)

HALT/PROCESSING

C:ALL S:ALL

ÆPROC

HALT/PROCESSING

C:1 S:ALL

ÆPROC

HALT/PROCESSING

C:ALL S:ALL

ÆPROC

HALT/PROCESSING

C:1 S:2

ÆPROC

3) Enter slot number via dial keypad.

OR


4) Enter 1 for HALT or 0 for PROC.

OR


Right Soft button to enter and return to step 2.


OR


RELATED ITEMS

NONE


2-275

CHAPTER 2.


[811] RESET SYSTEM

Provides a means of restarting the system. The system can simply be reset or it can be reset and all memory cleared to default values. Extreme care should be taken when using this

MMC. If the system is restarted, all voice/data connections are dropped. If memory is cleared, all customer data is deleted and the system returns to defaulted status.

No

0

1

2

Type Description

RESET SYSTEM System reset only with MC card read.

CLEAR MEMORY System reset and make default system with MC card read.

FAST RESTART System reset only without MC card read.

DEFAULT DATA

NONE

ACTION DISPLAY


Display shows:

2) Enter reset type(0-2) via dial keypad.

OR




OR


Right Soft button.


OR


Right Soft button.

5) If clear memory, system will return with default time and date and default extension number.

OR

If system just restarted, it will return to normal programmed status.

SYSTEM RESTART

RESET SYSTEM?NO

SYSTEM RESTART

CLEAR MEMORY?NO

SYSTEM RESTART

CLEAR MEMORY?YES

SYSTEM RESTART

ARE YOU SURE?YES

RELATED ITEMS

NONE

2-276



[812] SET COUNTRY CODE

Selects the country for correct system programming and operation.


‘MMC [812] SET COUNTRY CODE’ should not be used from the default levels without the assistance of the local SAMSUNG distributor.

DEFAULT DATA

NONE

ACTION DISPLAY


Display shows:

2) Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button.

3) Press Volume button to select YES or NO and press Right Soft button.


OR


SELECT COUNTRY

Undefined

SELECT COUNTRY

RUSSIA/CIS

DEFAULTING SYSTM

ARE YOU SURE?NO

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 811 RESET SYSTEM


2-277

CHAPTER 2.


[813] HOTEL OPERATION

Allows the installing technician to enable the HOTEL feature.

DEFAULT DATA

DISABLE

ACTION DISPLAY


Display shows:

2) Dial 1 for ENABLE or 0 for DISABLE.

OR



OR



OR



OR


HOTEL OPERATION

DISABLE

HOTEL OPERATION

ENABLE

HOTEL OPERATION

CHANGE NOW ? NO

HOTEL OPERATION

ARE YOU SURE?YES

RELATED ITEMS

Hotel Related MMCs

MMC 221

MMC 222

MMC 513

MMC 760

MMC 761

MMC 762

EXTENSION TYPE

FAX PAIR

HOTEL TIMER

ITEM COST TABLE

TAX RATE SETUP

ROOM COST RATE

2-278



[815] CUSTOMER DATABASE COPY

This enables the on-board customer database(SRAM) to be copied to the MC Database(MCDB) and also allows the MCDB database to be copied to the SRAM. A daily save can be programmed to automatically save the SRAM to the MCDB. This ensures that an up-to-date database is always available in case of a catastrophic failure. A daily save time of 00:00 means that no daily save is performed.

It is recommended that the MCDB is cleared before the SRAM is copied to it. When the

SRAM is copied to the MCDB there is no interruption in service. If the MCDB is copied to the SRAM, the system will reset to accept the new data.

MCDB(Mc card database)


S:mm/dd/yy hh:mm

CLEAR MCDB

COPY TO SRAM

Indicates the time the database was saved to the MCDB.

Clear MCDB.

Copy MCDB to SRAM.

SRAM(MCP on-board database)


S:mm/dd/yy hh:mm

COPY TO MCDB

Indicates the time the SRAM was last saved.

Copy SRAM to MCDB.

DAILY SAVE hh:mm The time the SRAM will be saved to the MCDB.

A MC Card of 256 MB

A MC Card of 256 MB must be installed in order to copy the on board database(SRAM) on to the MC card (MCDB).

DEFAULT DATA

DAILY SAVE 00:00(no daily save)

ACTION DISPLAY


Display shows:

If MC card is in use, the display shows:

CUST DBASE:MCDB

S:12/01/01 00:00

CUST DBASE:MCDB

MMC IS BUSY


2-279

CHAPTER 2.


2) Press Right Soft button to move cursor.





If you select YES, the display shows.



8) Input save time.

OR




Right Soft button to make changes and return to


OR


RELATED ITEMS

NONE

CUST DBASE:MCDB

S:12/01/01 00:00

CUST DBASE:MCDB

CLEAR SMDB :NO

CUST DBASE:MCDB

CLEAR SMDB :YES

CUST DBASE:MCDB

ARE YOU SURE?NO

CUST DBASE:MCDB

Cleared....

CUST DBASE:SYSDB

DAILY SAVE:00:00

CUST DBASE:SYSDB

DAILY SAVE:00:00

CUST DBASE:SYSDB

DAILY SAVE:23:30

CUST DBASE:SYSDB

COPY TO SMDB:NO

CUST DBASE:SYSDB

ARE YOU SURE?:YES

2-280



[818] PROGRAM DOWNLOAD

APP

SYS

DRV

WEB

RUT

MSP

CSP

PR2

PRI

Change the system version by downloading the new version stored on the MC card to the

APP/SYS/DRV/WEB/RUT/MSP/CSP and TEPRI cards.


To upgrade application (including MP and VM module)

Include all modules. (?)

To upgrade Driver, F/W (including SP, MGI, drivers)

To upgrade WEB UI

To upgrade Router module (limited in MP11)

To upgrade MSP driver

To upgrade CSP driver

To upgrade TEPRI2 Package

To upgrade TEPRI/ TEPRIa Package

DEFAULT DATA

NONE

ACTION DISPLAY


Display shows:

2) Press Volume button to select program type and press Right Soft button to move cursor.

3) Press Volume button to select YES and press Right Soft button to move cursor.


OR


PGM DOWNLOAD

APP:ap10v014.pkg

PGM DOWNLOAD

SYS:rd10v014.pkg

SYSTEM PKG

DOWNLOAD NOW?YES

RELATED ITEMS

NONE


2-281

CHAPTER 2.


[819] MC FILE CONTROL

Displays the size(in bytes) of various system program files on the MC card.

Files included in MC card are described below:

File Name

Startup.ini

Ms10v508.pkg

Cs10v101.pkg

Description

If user designates an MCP program in MMC 818, related data are saved in this file.

This file is initially not included but is created when the above programs are selected at MMC 818.

MSP driver program

This program must be included in MC card to start the system.

MSP driver program

This program must be included in MC card to start the system.

Dr10v014.pkg

MP and VM module is included in this package.

This package includes SP, MGI and other drivers.

Ws10v014.pkg vm_l_use.tar/ vm_l_uk.tar

DEFAULT DATA

NONE

WEB UI program

VM prompt

2-282



ACTION DISPLAY


Display shows:

2) Press Volume button to confirm program type


OR


Startup.ini sz:512 bytes

Cs10v101.pkg sz:14418432 bytes

RELATED ITEMS

NONE


2-283

CHAPTER 2.


[820] ASSIGN SYSTEM LINK ID

This MMC is used to assign the system link ID for PRI and VoIP networking. Up to 100 link IDs can be entered including SELF ID. In addition, each Link ID is associated with the

IP address and IP address type of the MCP card for that system.

Option

LINK ID

SIGNAL G/W

IP TYPE

Description

System ID for networking feature.

System IP address for VoIP networking.

System IP address type for VoIP networking. SELF system IP address type determines ‘SYSTEM IP TYPE’ in MMC 830.

CONDITIONS

‘SELF’ represents self-node, and must be set to use the networking function. Items other than ‘SELF’ are used for station numbers and can be omitted.

DEFAULT DATA

NONE

ACTION DISPLAY


Display shows:

2) Enter SELF link ID via dial keypad and press Right Soft button.

3) Press Volume button to select other link ID and press Right Soft button to mover cursor.

4) Enter other link ID via dial keypad and press Right Soft button.


OR


RELATED ITEMS

MMC 821

MMC 823

MMC 824

MMC 830


ASSIGN NETWORK COS


ETHERNET PARAMETERS

SELF :LINK ID

SELF :LINK ID

11

SYS01:LINK ID

SYS01:LINK ID

22

2-284



[821] ASSIGN NETWORK TRUNK

Assigns the Q-signalling PRI trunk for networking. It is assigned data on a per-TEPRI card basis.

DEFAULT DATA

NORMAL

ACTION DISPLAY


Display shows:

2) Enter first trunk number of PRI card.

OR


3) Enter 0 for NORMAL, or 1 for Q-SIGNALLING.

OR

Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to save and move cursor.


OR


[701] Q-SIG TRK

NORMAL

[701] Q-SIG TRK

NORMAL

[701] Q-SIG TRK

Q-SIGNALLING

RELATED ITEMS

NONE


2-285

CHAPTER 2.


[822] VIRTUAL EXTENSION TYPE

Assigns the virtual extension port type. The virtual extension port types are followed:

No

03

04

05

06

07

08

00

01

02

09

10

11

12

13

14

Type

SLT

24 BTN SET

12 BTN SET

7 BTN SET

6 BTN SET

28 BTN SET

18 BTN SET

8 BTN SET

38 BTN SET

21 BTN SET

14 BTN SET

LARGE SET

7 BTN LCD

0 BTN LCD

NONE

Description

Emulates SLI port

24 buttons phone

12 buttons phone

7 buttons phone

6 buttons phone

28 buttons phone

18 buttons phone

8 buttons phone

38 buttons phone

21 buttons phone

14 buttons phone

Large LCD phone

7 buttons LCD phone

0 button LCD phone not used

DEFAULT DATA

3501-3522: SLT

3401-3440: 21 BTN SET

2-286



ACTION DISPLAY


Display shows:

2)

Enter virtual extension number.

OR


OR

Select all ports.

3)

Enter virtual extension type.

OR

Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to save and move cursor.


OR


[3501]PORT TYPE

SLT

[3501] PORT TYPE

SLT

[ALL] PORT TYPE

SLT

[3501] PORT TYPE

SLT

RELATED ITEMS

NONE


2-287

CHAPTER 2.


[823] ASSIGN NETWORK COS

Assigns the class of service for networking.

No Option

01 CALL OFFER

04 CC SIG CONN

05 CC SVC RETN

06 CCBS

07 CCNR

08 CFB

09 CFNR

10 CFU

11 CI

12 CI CAPABIL

14 CI PROTECT

23 CONP LEVEL

26 CT RE-ROUTE

28 DNDO

29 DNDO CAPABL

30 DNDO PROTEC

31 PAGE

32 PATH REPL.

33 PATH RETEN

Default

2

2

3

N

N

Y

2

2

Y

Y

N

Y

Y

Y

N

N

Y

Y

Y

N

Description

Call Offer

CC Retention of Signal Connection

CC Service Retention

Call Completion to Busy Subscriber

Call Completion on No Reply

Call Forward Busy

Call Forward No Reply

Call Forward Unconditional

Intrusion Capability Level(1~3)

Intrusion Protection Level(0~3)

CONP Level(0: none, 1: Alert, 2: Busy, 3: Both)

Transfer By Rerouting

Do Not Disturb Override

DNDO Capability Level(0~3)

DNDO Protection Level(1~3)

PAGE

Path Replacement

Path Retention

CONDITIONS

NONE

DEFAULT DATA

SEE DESCRIPTION

2-288



ACTION DISPLAY


Display shows:

2) Dial the class of service number.(01-30)

OR



3) Dial the feature number.

OR



4) Enter 0 for NO, or 1 for YES.

OR

Press Volume button to select YES or NO and

Press Right Soft button to store data.


OR


NETWORK COS (01)

01:CALL OFFER :Y

NETWORK COS (02)

01:CALL OFFER :Y

NETWORK COS (02)

03:CC PATH RSV:Y

NETWORK COS (01)

03:CC PATH RSV:N

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 301 ASSIGN STATION COS


2-289

CHAPTER 2.


[824] NETWORK DIAL TRANSLATION

Assigns the digit translation table used for networking. Generally, under networking conditions, you must dial the node ID and extension number to call the another node extension.

In this MMC, the system provides a simple digit translation so that the user need only dial the extension number to call the station on the other node. The access digit needs to be programmed in MMC 724(‘NTWK LCR DIAL NO.’ option) first. The system allows 96 entries for network dial translation.

DEFAULT DATA

NONE

ACTION DISPLAY


Display shows:

2) Dial the entry number.

OR



3) Enter digit string for access to node(max. 8 digits) and press Right Soft button to move cursor.

4) Enter number of digits user will dial.(e.g., 3 for 3digit extension)

OR



5) Enter max. number of digits system will dial.

OR



6) Enter YES/NO to display other node extension in internal extension number format.

OR

Press Volume button to select and press Right Soft button to move cursor.

01:601

Æ

SIZE:0 MAX:00

01:601

Æ_

SIZE:0 MAX:00

01:601

Æ60201

SIZE:0 MAX:00

01:601

Æ60201

SIZE:3 MAX:00

01:601

Æ60201

SIZE:3 MAX:08

01:601

Æ60201

DISP:N MBX:N

2-290



7) Enter YES/NO to assign Mailbox to remote extension automatically.

OR




OR


RELATED ITEMS

MMC 710

MMC 724

MMC 820

LCR DIGIT TABLE

DIAL NUMBERING PLAN


01:601

Æ60201

DISP:Y MBX:N


2-291

CHAPTER 2.


[825] ASSIGN NETWORKING OPTIONS

Assigns the options used for networking.


0 ADD NUMBER TO NAME Assign to include the extension number in the name field of

Q-SIG standard message.

1 USE REMOTE VM

2 REMOTE VM NUMBER

Assign to use SVMi on remote system.

Assign to access number of remote SVMi when the Remote

VM is used.

3 REMOTE CID NUMB

4 USE REMOTE ATTN

5 REMOTE ATTN NUMB

Assign to use delete node number when CID number send to

SVMi.

Use Attendant on remote system.(RING 1-6, Y/N)

6 SPNET DIGIT SEND

Access number of remote Attendant when the remote Attendant is used.(RING 1-6)

Specify by which method dialled digits are sent across the network.

DEFAULT DATA

ADD NUMB TO NAME: YES

USE REMOTE VM: NO

REMOTE VM NUMBER: NONE

REMOTE CID NUMB: YES

USE REMOTE ATTN: NO

REMOTE ATTN NUMB: NONE

SPNET DIGIT SEND: MGI SIGNALLING

2-292



ACTION DISPLAY


Display shows:

2) Dial the option number.

OR




OR

Press Volume button to select YES/NO and press Right Soft button to mover cursor.


OR


ADD NUMB TO NAME

YES

USE REMOTE VM

NO

USE REMOTE VM

YES

RELATED ITEMS

NONE


2-293

CHAPTER 2.


[826] ASSIGN SYSTEM REFERENCE CLOCK

The system clock may be synchronized with an external clock source from the TEPRI or

BRI card, or it can use the internal clock source.

This MMC can assign the system clock source priority when the external clock source is used.

DEFAULT DATA

PRIORITY 1: C1-S0

PRIORITY 2: C1-S1

PRIORITY 3: SELF

ACTION DISPLAY


Display shows:

2) Dial the priority number

OR



3) Dial the priority data.

OR

Press Volume button to select and Press

Right Soft button to store.


OR


RELATED ITEMS

NONE

REFERENCE CLOCK

PRIORITY 1:C1-S0

REFERENCE CLOCK

PRIORITY 1:C1-S0

REFERENCE CLOCK

PRIORITY 1:C1-S0

2-294



[829] LAN PRINTER PARAMETERS

This program sets the various parameters required for printing to a LAN-connected device.

The data listed below can be printed.

01. SMDR

02. UCD REPORT

03. TRAFFIC REPORT

04. ALARM REPORT

05. UCD VIEW

06. PERIODIC UCD

07. HOTEL REPORT

08. PMS

The items that are set in this program are:

No Option Default Description

00 DATA -

01 CURR STATUS OFF

02 EMPTY BUFF NO

03 UPDATE LAN

04 DESTINATION

05 PRINTER IP

06 PRINTER TCP

NO

OFF

200.1.1.1

10010

07 LAN TCP 10020

08 RETRY COUNT 03

Current status of the LAN printer

Prints all data left in the buffer

Applies modified values set in this MMC

Data transmit destination(Off, Printer, PC, Both)

The IP address of the LAN printer

The TCP port of the printer

LAN TCP port

Re-transmit attempt count(00~10)

09 RETRY WAIT

10 PJL ENABLE

11 LANGUAGE

12 PAPER SIZE

010 sec

FALSE

RAW

A4

Wait time for re-transmit(005~250 sec)

Sets PJL(0. FALSE, 1. TRUE)

Printer language(0. RAW, 1. PCL, 2. PS)

Paper size(0. A4, 1. LETTER)

13 FONT type(0.COURIER, 1.TIMES NEW ROMAN)

14 DUPLEX ENAB FALSE Sets duplex(0. FALSE, 1. TRUE)

16 PRINT TRAY DEFAULT

17 RESOLUTION 300

18 LINE/PAGE 60

Printer tray(0.Default, 1.Tray1, 2.Tray2, 3.Manual)


2-295

CHAPTER 2.


DEFAULT DATA

SEE DESCRIPTION

ACTION DISPLAY


Display shows:

2) Enter type of data to be printed.

OR

Press Volume button to select the type and press the Right Soft button to move the cursor.

3) Enter the item number.

OR

Press Volume button to select the item and press the Right Soft button to move the cursor.

4) Select the data.

OR

Press Volume to select the data and press



OR


[01] DATA TYPE

SMDR

[02] DATA TYPE

UCD REPORT

[02] PRINTER IP

200. 1. 1. 1

[02] PRINTER IP

168.219. 83.101

RELATED ITEMS

NONE

2-296



[830] ETHERNET PARAMETERS

This MMC provides a mean to configure the Internet Protocol(IP) addressing of the MCP card.

No Parameter Description

00 SYSTEM IP ADDR Specifies the IP address for the MCP card.

01 SYSTEM GATEWAY Specifies the designated gateway IP address used for contacting

IP devices beyond the local network subnet.

02 SYSTEM NET MASK Specifies the IP subnet mask.

This parameter is used by the system to calculate the range of IP devices(subnet) that are within ‘direct reach’ of the MCP.(without having to go through the designated network IP gateway)

03 SYSTEM RESET Prompt to reset system MCP when system IP address is changed.

This reset is same as FAST RESTART in MMC 811.

04 SYSTEM IP TYPE Specifies if the system will be routing data over a public or private network.

05 SYSTEM PUBLIC IP The MCP will originate communications to IP phones and VoIP connections outside the local network using this IP address. Communications to/from this IP will require involvement of the MGI card. The system identifies communications to/from this address as ‘public’. This allows devices, on remote networks/subnets, to establish communications with the system, without exposing the

LAN. See ‘SYSTEM IP TYPE’.

08 SYSTEM MAC ADDR For reference, and cannot be changed. The unique hardware

(MAC) address of the MCP card.

12 PCMMC ADDRESS When the system wants to connect to PCMMC, it will be sent to this IP address for a connection message.(Reserved for future use.)

13 SM MANAGER IP Not used.

14 CTI SERVER ADDR IP address of CTI Server

17 NEWS ADDRESS IP address of News Server

18 MMS SERVER IP IP address of MMS Server

19 MMS WEB SERV IP IP address of MMS WEB Server


2-297

CHAPTER 2.


ETHERNET

- The first three parameters: SYSTEM IP ADDR, SYSTEM GATEWAY, and SYS-

TEM NET MASK are stored separately from the main system database and thus will not be defaulted when MMC811 ‘CLEAR MEMORY’ is performed. Furthermore, any changes to these parameters will not be applied until the MCP2 is reset.

- When changing any IP address/value, three digits must be entered for each(octet) field. For example 192.168.1.10 should be entered as: 192 168 001

010.

CONDITIONS

y y

This MMC must be used if there are ITP phones and/or MGI cards on the system.

After changing Ethernet parameters, restart the system to apply the new settings.

DEFAULT DATA

SYSTEM IP ADDR: 165.213.97.185

SYSTEM GATEWAY: 165.213.97.1

SYSTEM NET MASK: 255.255.255.0

SYSTEM RESET: NO

SYSTEM IP TYPE: PRIVATE IP ONLY

SYSTEM PUBLIC IP: 1.1.1.1

SYSTEM MAC ADDR: CARD DEPENDENT

PCMMC ADDRESS: 168.219.1.101

SM MANAGER IP: 0.0.0.0

CTI SERVER ADDR: 0.0.0.0

NEWS ADDR: 0.0.0.0

MMS SERVER IP: 0.0.0.0

MMS WEB SERV IP: 0.0.0.0

2-298



ACTION DISPLAY


Display shows the system IP address.

2) Press Volume button to make selection and


3) Using the keypad, enter 3-digit IP numbers.

(e.g., 192 168 001 010 for 192.168.1.10)

Cursor will return to step 1 upon completion of IP address entry.

4) Press Volume button to make selection and


5) Using the keypad, enter 3-digit IP numbers.

(e.g., 192 168 001 001 for 192.168.1.1)

Cursor will return to this step on completion of system gateway entry.


7) Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to store and move cursor.


OR


SYSTEM IP ADDR

165.213. 97.185

SYSTEM IP ADDR

165.213. 97.185

SYSTEM IP ADDR

192.168.001.010

SYSTEM GATEWAY

165.213. 97. 1

SYSTEM GATEWAY

192.168.001.001

SYSTEM RESTART

ARE YOU SURE? NO

SYSTEM RESTART

ARE YOU SURE? NO

RELATED ITEMS

NONE


2-299

CHAPTER 2.


[831] MGI PARAMETERS

This MMC provides a mean to configure the Internet Protocol(IP) addressing of the MGI card(s) in the system.

No Parameter

0 IP ADDRESS

1 GATEWAY

2 SUB MASK

3 IP TYPE

4 PUBLIC IP

5 PUB PORT

6 VERSION

8 CARD RESET

9 IP VERSION

Description

Specifies the IP address for the MGI card.

Specifies the designated IP gateway address used for contacting

IP devices beyond the local subnet.

Specifies the IP subnet mask. This parameter is used by the system to calculate the range of IP devices(subnet) that are within ‘direct reach’ of the MGI.(without having to go through the designated network IP gateway)

Specifies if the system will be routing data over a public or private network.

The MGI will originate communications, to IP phones and VoIP connections outside the local network, using this IP address. If this

IP address sets 0.0.0.0, 255.255.255.255 or default value then this

MGI card uses private IP only. See System IP Type on MMC 830.

Public Port

No entry required. Used to indicate revision of MGI3 S/W.

Reboots MGI card.

Specidies MGI IP version is IPv4 / IPv6.

- IP ADDRESS, GATEWAY, and SUB MASK—any changes to these parameters will not be applied until the MGI card is reset.

- When changing any IP address/value, three digits must be entered for each

(octet) field. For example, 192.168.1.10 should be entered as 192 168 001 010.

2-300



CONDITIONS

This MMC cannot be accessed unless there is an MGI card installed in the system.

DEFAULT DATA

IP ADDRESS: 1.1.1.1

GATEWAY: 1.1.1.1

SUB MASK: 255.255.255.0

IP TYPE: PRIVATE IP ONLY

PUBLIC IP: 1.1.1.1

PUB PORT: 00000

VERSION: V4

CARD RESET: NO

IP VERSION: IPv4

ACTION DISPLAY


Display shows the first MGI card.

2) Enter MGI number.

OR


3) Enter MGI parameter number.

OR


4) Enter MGI parameter.

OR



OR


[3801] IP ADDRESS

168.219. 76.101

[3801] IP ADDRESS

168.219. 76.101

[3801] IP ADDRESS

168.219. 76.101

[3801] IP ADDRESS

165. 10. 1.100

RELATED ITEMS

NONE


2-301

CHAPTER 2.


[832] VoIP ACCESS CODE

Provides a means to apply the Internet Protocol(IP) address to the VoIP gateway. This

MMC also assigns the number of channels that can be used for IP faxes.

TABLE(00~62): Outbound or Inbound table used for specific access codes. Usually when the MCP2 card is used as a VoIP gateway, the Outbound table is used. The Inbound table is used to determine the number of digits to receive before processing the call. Each table has

63 entries(00~62).


0 ACCESS DGT This is the access code that is used once the VoIP gateway is accessed; this directs a call based on the routing tables used. An access code table then references an access code and correlates an IP address to the access code for routing. A maximum of eight digits are available.

1 DGT LENGTH This field requests the number of digits that are expected to be received to make up the whole access code.

2 DEL.LENGTH This is the number of digits to delete after receiving the access code.

If no digits are deleted the access code will be sent as part of the call to the destination to continue routing.

3 INSERT DGT

4 IP TABLE 1

Digit(s) to insert for routing at the destination. This can be used when different numbering plans exist or if a dial 9 access is to be inserted in the dialled digits.

This is the first table referenced for routing the access code to an IP address. The system has 64 IP tables(00~63) with 16 entries(00~15) in each table. See MMC 833.

6 IP START This entry indicates where in a table to start looking for an IP code to associate with the access code. This can be used to manage where to start looking for an IP address in high traffic VoIP gateway applications.

For example: If IP address routing to the desired destination is known to be in the last seven entries of a table, the IP START location would be 8.

IP address searching would start at entry 8.

7 SERVER USE This parameter determines whether a H.323 Gatekeeper will be utilized to establish this connection.

2-302



DEFAULT DATA

ACCESS DGT: 00~09(digits 0~9), 10~62 NONE

DGT LENGTH: 1

DEL.LENGTH: 1

INSERT DGT: NONE

IP TABLE 1: 00

IP START: NONE

SERVER USE: NO

ACTION DISPLAY


Display shows the outbound and first access

code.

2) Enter 0 for O(outbound) or 1 for I(inbound) code table.

OR



3) Enter access code table number(00-62) via dial keypad.

OR



4) Enter access code item(0-6) via dial keypad.

OR



5) Enter access code data via dial keypad.

OR


Right Soft button to save and move cursor.


OR


(O:00)ACCESS DGT

0

(O:00)ACCESS DGT

0

(O:01)ACCESS DGT

1

(O:01)ACCESS DGT

1

(O:01)ACCESS DGT

840

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 833

MMC 834

MMC 836

MMC 837

VOIP IP TABLE

H.323 OPTIONS

H.323 GATEKEEPER OPTIONS

SIP OPTIONS


2-303

CHAPTER 2.


[833] VoIP IP TABLE

This MMC provides the IP addresses in tables pointed to by the VoIP code entry(MMC

832). There are 63 tables with up to 16 entries each. The destination IP address is required to route dialled digits based on the access code and digits dialled. The IP entry field is divided into 4 sections allowing modification of separate IP address fields.

When changing IP

When changing any IP address/value, listed below, three digits must be input for each(octet) field. Example 192.168.1.10 input must be: 192 168 001 010

DEFAULT DATA

TB(00) ENTRY(00): MMC 830 SYSTEM IP ADDR

ALL OTHERS: EMPTY

ACTION DISPLAY


Display shows the first table number.

2) Enter table number(00-62) via dial keypad.

OR


3) Enter entry number(00-15) via dial keypad.

OR


4) Enter IP address via dial keypad.

Cursor will be return step 3.


OR

Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC entry.

TB(00) ENTRY (00)

0. 0. 0. 0

TB(00) ENTRY (00)

0. 0. 0. 0

TB(00) ENTRY (00)

0. 0. 0. 0

TB(00) ENTRY (00)

165.213. 87.110

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 830

MMC 832

MMC 834

MMC 837

MMC 838

ETHERNET PARAMETERS

VOIP ACCESS CODE

H.323 OPTIONS

SIP OPTIONS


2-304



[834] H.323 OPTIONS

This MMC provides various VoIP support options. The options set in this MMC apply system wide.

No Parameter Description Default

00 GATEWAY CALL ID Numeric identifier for system(up to 12 digits)

01 H.323 FAST SETUP Enables or disables the H.323 Fast Start call setup method.

02 CALLER ID TYPE This option controls the calling party identification type. There are 3 possible selections:

0 GWID: shows the gateway call ID.

1 ANI: shows the calling station number

2 IP: shows the calling H.323 gateway IP address.

06 TUNNELING

07 DEFAULT DIL NO This allows programming of the default direct-in- line number when digits are missing or incorrect on an inbound call.

11 CODEC AUTO NEGO Enables or disables Auto CODEC Negotiation when the MGI is used as an H.323 gateway.

14 SIGNAL PORT

Enables or disables the need for additional channels using H.245 signalling. Tunneling allows use of the H.245 signal channel with the Q.931 channel.

17 SEND CLIP TABLE

Indicate the port number for H.323 signalling and sets a range of numbers allowed by firewall equipment. The common and default IP path or port used is 10000.

Refers to SEND CLI NUMBER(MMC 323), which provides calling party identification when using the

MGI as a H.323 gateway. This provides station ID of the calling station. A single-digit value corresponding with the desired table in MMC 323 should be entered here. This is only used when

MMC 405 value is null.

1234

ENABLE

ANI

ENABLE

500

ON

10000

1

FOLLOW

DID TRANS when the MGI is used as a H.323 gateway.

0 FOLLOW TRUNK RING: Follows MMC 406

1 FOLLOW DID TRANS: Follows MMC 714

2 FOLLOW INCOM DGT: Follows MMC 724

19 ALLOW GW CHECK When using a gatekeeper, this permits the H.323 gateway to check for gatekeeper presence.

20 CLIR WITH NUMBER When this option is enabled, the CLIP number is sent to the network even if the CLIP restriction flag is set.

21 USE OVERLAP DIAL Enables use of overlap dialing.

DISABLE

DISABLE

ENBLOC


2-305

CHAPTER 2.


DEFAULT DATA

SEE DESCRIPTION

ACTION DISPLAY


Display shows the first option.

2) Enter H.323 option number(00-20) via dial keypad.

OR


3) Enter H.323 option data via dial keypad.

OR



OR


GATEWAY CALL ID

1234

H.323 FAST SETUP

DISABLE

H.323 FAST SETUP

ENABLE

RELATED ITEMS

NONE

2-306



[835] MGI DSP OPTIONS

This MMC provides various MGI DSP options.


00 CODEC-FRAME Selects which audio CODEC compression will be used and the transmission interval time of VoIP packets generated by the MGI card. MGI3 card supports

G.729A(8 K), G.729(8 K), G.711(64 K), and

G.723.1(5.3~6.4K).

01 ECHO CANCEL Enables or disables echo cancellation. This function removes the echo that is generated by voice reflection and packet delay.

02 SILENCE SUP

03

04

IN FILTER

OUT FILTER

This parameter determines whether silence suppression is used. This prevents transmission during the silence period of a call, and conserves bandwidth when enabled.

This option selects input filtering of the DSP. This should always be set to ENABLE.

This option selects output filtering of the DSP. This should always be set to ENABLE.

05 INPUT GAIN

06

08

09

VOICE VOL

JITTER OPT

MIN JITTER

PCM input gain value of DSP. The range is-

31 dB~32 dB(0~63).

This set the quality of PCM voice from the VoIP DSP to the site. Default is 32(0 dB).

This value selects the voice volume. The range is-

31 dB~31 dB(0~63).

This is a scale value that introduces a intentional buffer(delay) of the transmission of VoIP packets generated by the MGI card. This value determines whether the focus is on packet loss or packet delay.

The range is 00~12.

Decides the minimum time to consider delay for jitter adjustment.

The range is 010~300 ms

10 MAX JITTER

11

12

FAX ECM

MAX FAX CNT

Decides the maximum time to consider delay for jitter adjustment.

The range is 010-300 ms.

This option selects retry of Fax-over-IP if errors are detected.

This is the maximum number of channels that can be simultaneously used for Fax-over-IP. The range is

00~16.

G.729A –

20 Ms

ENABLE

DISABLE

ENABLE

ENABLE

32

32(0 dB).

4

30 ms

150 ms

ENABLE

2


2-307

CHAPTER 2.


(continued)

No Parameter

13 DTMF TYPE

14 TOS FIELD

15 FAX RETRY

16 RTP CHK TM

17 USE T38 711

18 802.1 VLAN

19 802.1 PRIOR

20 802.1Q

21 EC GAIN

22 NLP

23 EC TAIL LEN

24 JIT PEROID

25 JIT DEL TM

Description Default

There are two types of DTMF transmission: INBAND, which is industry standard(H.245) type DTMF transport, and OUTBAND which is a Samsung proprietary method.

An 8-bit binary value that will be used by external routers, switches, etc,(that optionally support TOS-bit prioritization) to identify the transport-priority value of data packets generated by the MGI card. This value can be left at the default value(00000) if your network infrastructure does not support this method of bandwidth management.

This option selects retry count of Fax-over-IP if errors are detected. The range is 0~4(0 means no retry).

OUTBAND

All bits 0

3

This option selects the interval time for sending RTCP. 5 SEC

If use T38 FAX, specifies 711 Codec use Enable

Set value (0000~4095) 0000

0

DISABLE

Set value (0~7)

Enable or disable for 802.1Q

(including 802.1 VLAN and 802.1 PRIOR)

Set EC gain value (18~38)

Set NLP value (0~2)

Set EC TAIL LEN (8~128)

Set JITTER PERIOD (1~10)

Set JITTER DELETE TIME (0~500)

32

0

064 MS

01

250

DEFAULT DATA

SEE DESCRIPTION

ACTION DISPLAY



2) Enter MGI type(0-2) via dial keypad.

OR


3) Enter MGI DSP parameter via dial keypad.

OR

MGI3:CODEC-FRAME

G.729A –40 MS

MGI3:CODEC-FRAME

G.729A –40 MS

MGI3:CODEC-FRAME

G.729A –40 MS

2-308




4) Enter MGI DSP parameter.

OR



OR


RELATED ITEMS

MMC 831 MGI PARAMETERS

MGI3:CODEC-FRAME

G.729A –20 MS


2-309

CHAPTER 2.


[836] H.323 GK OPTIONS

Provides a means to set the H.323 gatekeeper parameters for an optional, external industrystandard H.323 network gatekeeper, using Registration, Admissions and Status signalling

(RAS). The settings apply system wide.




00 GK CONNECTION This enables the H.323 call to connect to a gatekeeper.

01 GK ROUTING

02 GK IP ADDRESS

DISABLE

This enables routing of calls through a gatekeeper. DISABLE

This is the gatekeeper’s IP address.

0.0.0.0

03 GK NAME This is the alphanumeric identifier of the gatekeeper.(Up to 16 characters.)

04 ALTER GK IP ADDR This provides an alternate gatekeeper address.

05 H.323 GATEWAY ID This is the H.323 identifier used by the MGI when registering with the gatekeeper.(Up to 32 characters.)

NO

This is the E.164 identifier used by the H.323 trunk when registering with the gatekeeper.(Up to 16 digits long.)

07 GK KEEP ALIVE This is the timer that the MGI uses to acknowledge the presence of the gatekeeper. The range is

000~999 seconds.

08 GK DOWN ROUTE This provides an alternate route if the primary gatekeeper is down. Selections are PSTN or ALTER

GK.

09 GK RAS TYPE Select if AUTO or MANUAL, depending on your gatekeeper’s capabilities.

MODE

12 RRQ FAIL TIME

Select ON or OFF for use of Un-register Request

RAS(URQ) messages.

Programs the time frame to re-send Registration

Request RAS(RRQ) messages to a gatekeeper.

The range is 1~99.

‘Gatekeeper’

0.0.0.0

‘OfficeServ’

1234

0 SEC

PSTN

AUTO

ON

30 seconds

2-310




13 GRQ SEND Select ON or OFF for use of Gatekeeper RAS Request(GRQ) messages.

14 USE MULTI E.164 When this option is set to ENABLE, the E.164 identifier can be assigned.

15 E.164 LISTS This is the E.164 identifier used by the H.323 trunk when registering with the gatekeeper. There is a maximum 32 E.164 identifier lists with a digit string length of 16 digits.

16 GK REGISTERED Display the status of registration to the Gatekeeper.

Default

OFF

DISABLE

NONE

DEFAULT DATA

SEE DESCRIPTION

ACTION DISPLAY


Display shows the first available option.

2) Enter H.323 GK option via dial keypad.

OR


3) Enter H.323 GK option data.

OR

Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to save and return step 3.


OR


GK CONNECTION

DISABLE

GK ROUTING

DISABLE

GK ROUTING

ENABLE

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 834 H.323 OPTIONS

NO


2-311

CHAPTER 2.


[837] SIP OPTIONS

This MMC permits the adjustments of optional Session Initiation Protocol(SIP) trunk parameters. The MCP supports SIP and H.323 on a per-call-per-port basis. The settings are system wide.



No Parameter

00 GATEWAY

CALL ID

Description

Numeric system identifier(up to 12 digits)

Default

‘1234’

TYPE

NO

This option controls the calling party identification type.

There are 3 possible selections:

0 GWID: shows the gateway call ID.

1 ANI: shows the calling station number.(default)

2 IP: shows the calling H.323 gateway IP address.

This allows programming of the default direct-in-line number when digits are missing or incorrect on an inbound call.

Sets the UDP port used on a SIP trunk call.

ANI

5000

5060

TRUNK

Sets the UDP port used on a SIP phone call. 5070

PHONE

09 RE-TRANS.

T1 TIME

10 RE-TRANS.

T2 TIME

11 RE-TRANS.

T4 TIME

12 GENERAL

RING TM

TM

The initial re-transmission time if there is no answer, based on the RFC2543 specification. The range is

0~9900 ms.

The maximum re-transmission time if there is no answer, based on the RFC2543 specification. The range is

0~9900 ms.

The time the User Agent Server waits after receiving the

ACK message. Based on the RFC2543 specification. The range is 0~9900 ms.

The server retransmits the response for this length of time until the requested retransmission is received. For example, the wait time after sending 200 OK for INFO.

The range is 0~99900 ms.

After the client sends ACK for the INVITE Final Response, the client cannot confirm if the server received the ACK message.

The client waits for this length of time after sending ACK for the Final Response. The range is 0~99900 ms.

500 ms

4000 ms

5000 ms

5000 ms

5000 ms

2-312



(continued)


14 PROVISIONAL After receiving the Provision Response, the User Agent

TIME waits for this length of time until Timeout ends. The range is 0~999900 ms.

TIME

Before sending Cancel for the Invite Request, the User

Agent waits for this length of time. The range is

0~99900 ms.

16 GEN.NO

RESP TIME

17 REQ.RETRY

TIME

Before sending Cancel for General Request, the User

Agent waits for this length of time. The range is

0~99900 ms.

After sending General Request, the User Agent waits for the Final Response for this length of time. The range is

0~99900 ms.

ENABLE

Sets ENABLE or DISABLE to use an optional, external industry-standard SIP Server.

Sets SIP server IP address.

IP

Sets the port to use on the SIP Server.

PORT

29 SIGNAL PORT Indicates the port number for SIP signalling and sets a range of numbers allowed by firewall equipment. The common and default IP path or port used is 10000.

TABLE

33 INCOMING

MODE

Refers to SEND CLI NUMBER(MMC 323), which provides calling party identification when using the MGI as a

SIP gateway.

This provides station ID of the calling station. A singledigit value corresponding to the desired table in MMC

323 should be entered here. This is only used when

MMC 405 value is null.

This option selects how incoming calls are routed when the MGI is used as a SIP gateway.

0 FOLLOW TRUNK RING: Follows MMC 406

1 FOLLOW DID TRANS: Follows MMC 714(default)

2 FOLLOW INCOM DGT: Follows MMC 724

180000 m

5000 ms

5000 ms

5000 ms

DISABLE

0.0.0.0.

5060

10000

1

FOLLOW DID

TRANS

CHECK

When using a gatekeeper, this permits the SIP gateway to check for gatekeeper presence.

DISABLE

T-GW System number when registering as a trunking gateway. 4100

NUM

4200

NUM

S-GW System number when registering as a gateway for stations.

NUMBER

When this option is enabled, the CLIP number is sent to the network even if the CLIP restriction flag is set.

DISABLE


2-313

CHAPTER 2.


(continued)


38 SIP

REGISTERED

Display the status of registration to the SIP Server.

39 GW SERVICE When using SIP Server, if this option is ENABLE, then register by user and if DISABLE then register by system number.

Domain name for authorization when using SIP Server

NAME

41 GW USER ID User ID for authorization when using SIP Server

42 REGISTER

PSWD

This password must be used to register SIP Server

This tims value is expire time.

TIME

44 SESSION

TIMER

45 SERVER

VENDOR

46 LINK TEST

Settion Timer Value can be set.

(0:NONE, 1:UPDATE, 2:REINVITE)

SIP server vender value can be set.

(0:IETF, 1:IMS, 2:BroadWorks, 3:Xener, 4:Telcoware,

5:SEC-IMS)

This value is for Link test between Proxy Server and OfficeServ system.

(0:NONE, 1:OPTIONS)

NO

Default

DISABLE

-

000000 SEC

NONE

0

NONE

DEFAULT DATA

SEE DESCRIPTION

ACTION DISPLAY



2) Enter SIP option number 00-38(e.g., 01) via dial keypad.

OR



3) Enter SIP option data via dial keypad.

OR



GATEWAY CALL ID

1234

CALLER ID TYPE

ANI

CALLER ID TYPE

IP

2-314




OR


RELATED ITEMS

MMC 323

MMC 405

MMC 306

MMC 714

MMC 724

MMC 832

MMC 834


TRUNK CO TEL NUMBER



DIAL NUMBERING PLAN

VOIP ACCESS CODE

H.323 OPTIONS


2-315

CHAPTER 2.


[839] SIP USER

This MMC is used to register sip user and password.

DEFAULT DATA

ACTION DISPLAY



2) press Right Soft button to move cursor.

REG-01 : USER NUM

REG-01 : USER NUM

REG-01 : USER NUM

3) Enter registration number(01-100) via dial keypad.

OR


4) Enter table number(0,1) via dial keypad.

OR


5) Enter user number or password via dial keypad.

OR

press Right Soft button to save


OR


REG-01 : USER NUM

REG-01 : USER NUM

-

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 837 SIP OPTIONS

2-316



[838] PRIVATE IP ADDRESSES

This MMC is used to select which SYSTEM IP Address(PRIVATE or PUBLIC) is used to connect other devices via an H.323 or SIP trunk. The device that use the PRIVATE IP Address assigned in this MMC, the PRIVATE SYSTEM IP Address will be used to connect the device.



DEFAULT DATA

TABLE(80): 165.213.255.255

ALL OTHERS: 0.0.0.0

ACTION DISPLAY



2) Enter table number(01-80) via dial keypad.

OR


3) Enter IP address via dial keypad.

Cursor will return to step 3.


OR


PRIVATE IP (01)

0. 0. 0. 0

PRIVATE IP (01)

0. 0. 0. 0

PRIVATE IP (01)

165.213. 87.110

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 830

MMC 832

MMC 834

MMC 837

ETHERNET PARAMETERS

VOIP ACCESS CODE

H.323 OPTIONS

SIP OPTIONS


2-317

CHAPTER 2.


[840] IP PHONE INFORMATION

This MMC provides a means to register IP phones with the OfficeServ 7100 system. During registration, the IP and MAC addresses are also registered. The User ID and Password must match the table entry in this MMC for the IP phone to be registered. The system default phone numbers are 3201~3299 and default User IDs match the default station numbers. The system default password is 1234. IP phones must be individually programmed with a User ID and Password in order to register with the system.

No Option Description Default

00 USER ID This is the ID the IP phone must match to register with the OfficeServ 7100 system.(alphanumeric)

First 99 IP phones are 3201~3299, others are EMPTY.

‘1234’

01 USER PSWD This is the password the IP phone must have to register with the OfficeServ 7100 system.

(alphanumeric)

02 IP ADDR

03 MAC ADDR

This is the IP address of the IP phone when registered with the system.(Read only)

This is MAC address of the IP phone when registered with the system.(Read only)

04 SIG PORT This is the IP UDP port of the IP phone when registered with the system.(Read only) This information will be needed when traversing NAT routers, firewalls, etc.

05 VOICE PORT This is the IP RTP port of the IP phone when registered with the system.(Read only) This information will be needed when traversing NAT routers, firewalls, etc.

06 IP TYPE This is the type of IP network used: PRIVATE or

PUBLIC.

07 DSP TYPE This selects which CODEC this phone’s DSP will use.

G.729A(low bandwidth) or G.711(high bandwidth).

This data uses IP phone to IP phone connection only; others follow MGI CODEC type.

08 PHONE TYPE This is the type of IP phone used, SAMSUNG or SIP

(future). Use SAMSUNG.

09 REGIST CLR This is used to clear the registration of a particular

IP phone. This is similar to unplugging and plugging in the phone and is useful for maintenance.

10 FRAME

COUNT

This value determines the transmission interval time of VoIP packets generated by the IP phone. This data uses MMC 841 ITP DSP PARA DOWN =

PHONE DATA only. The range is 10~40 ms.

0.0.0.0.

FFFFFFFFFFFF

6000

9000

PRIVATE

G.729A

SAMSUNG

NO

20 ms

2-318



(continued)


11

12

JITTER BUF

TOS FIELD

Decides the minimum time to consider delay for jitter adjustment. This data uses MMC 841 ITP DSP

PARA DOWN = PHONE DATA only. The range is

10~90 ms.

An 8-bit binary value that will be used by external routers, switches, etc,(that optionally support TOSbit prioritization) to identify the transport-priority value of data packets generated by the IP phone.

This value can be left at the default value(00000) if your network infrastructure does not support this method of bandwidth management. This data uses

MMC 841 ITP DSP PARA DOWN = PHONE DATA only.

20 m

All bits 0

13 S/W VERSION Display IP phone software version.(Read only)

14 S/W UPGRADE This is used as IP phone software upgrade request command. When YES is selected and Right Soft button is pressed, the system requests IP phone software upgrade with TFTP IP address.

15 TIME ZONE

PUBLIC

-

-

Allows remote IP phones to display own time zone. 00.00

When this option is set to USE MGI, the MGI can be allocated between remote IPs in the same private zone.

NOT USE MGI

17 SIG TYPE UDP

18

19

20

PRIVATE IP

VIDEO DSP

VIDEO SIZE

This option can change UDP/TCP signal type for

IPs.(ITP V3.xx only supports the TCP signal type. If

TCP is set and ITP V2.xx attempts to connect, the

TCP signal type will change from TCP to UDP automatically.)

Displays private IP address of remote IP phone allocated by phone’s router.

This option is codec value o f Video IP phone

(0 : MPEG4, 1 : H.263)

This option is for video size

(0 : CIF, 2 : QCIF)

-

H.263

CIF

DEFAULT DATA

SEE DESCRIPTION


2-319

CHAPTER 2.


ACTION DISPLAY


Display shows:

2) Enter IP phone number via dial keypad.

OR


3) Enter IP phone option number via dial keypad.

OR


4) Enter option data via dial keypad.

OR



OR


[3201]USER ID

3201

[3210]USER ID

3210

[3210]DSP TYPE

G.729A

[3210]DSP TYPE

G.711

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 615

MMC 616

MMC 830

MMC 831

MMC 835

MMC 841

MGI GROUP

MGI USER

ETHERNET PARAMETERS

MGI PARAMETERS

MGI DSP OPTIONS

SYSTEM IP OPTIONS

2-320



[841] SYSTEM IP OPTIONS

This MMC provides various proprietary Samsung VoIP and IP integration options.

The options set in this MMC apply system wide.

No Option

00 PHONE VERSION

01 PHONE TFTP IP

Description Default

Sets running IP-based phone and new phone software version with the system.

0 LARGE DGP: Large LCD phone

1 LARGE ITP: Large LCD IP-based phone

2 2LINE ITP2: 2-line LCD IP-based phone

3 WIPM APPL: Wireless IP-based mobile phone software.

4 SOFT PC: IP phone emulation on PC (Soft-

Phone application)

5 SOFT PDA: IP phone emulation on PDA (Soft-

Phone application)

8 WIPM BOOT: Wireless IP-based mobile phone boot program.

9 SOFT MENU: Soft menu version

Sets phone software upgrade TFTP server IP address.

Defines the method that IP-based phones use to register with the system.

0 TYPE: a) SYS PSWD: System will authenticate the

IP-based phones with the value in ITP

REGISTRATION: PSWD parameter(see 1, below).

B) PHONE PSWD: System will authenticate the IP-based phones according to entries made in MMC 840. c) DISABLE: System will not authenticate

IP-based phones.

0000

0.0.0.0

SYS PSWD

1 PSWD: This is a system-wide password used for registration of IP phones.

Sets EasySet link via LAN option with the system.

‘1234’

0 PSWD: This is a system-wide password used for authentication of EasySet server.

1 ALIVE: This is an EasySet link via LAN alive check timer.

‘1234’

0 SEC


2-321

CHAPTER 2.


(continued)


04 CTI LINK OPTION

05 ITP DSP PARA

Sets CTI link via LAN option with the system.

0 SMDR REPORT: Sets YES or NO for SMDR data to CTI link via LAN.

1 UCD REPORT: Sets YES or NO for UCD data to

CTI link via LAN.

2 ALIVE: This is a CTI link via LAN alive check timer. If this is set to 0, the system will not check link alive.

Sets IP phone DSP parameter system wide.

NO

NO

300 SEC

0 M-FRAME: This value determines the transmission interval time of VoIP packets generated by the IP phone. This data uses DOWN = SYS

DATA only(see 3, below). The range is

10~40 ms.

1 JITTER: Decides the minimum time to consider delay for jitter adjustment. This data uses

DOWN = SYS DATA only(see 3, below). The range is 10~90 ms.

10 ms

20 ms

2 TOS: An 8-bit binary value that will be used by external routers, switches, etc,(that optionally support TOS-bit prioritization) to identify the transport-priority value of data packets generated by the IP phone. This value can be left at the default value(00000) if your network infrastructure does not support this method of bandwidth management. This data uses DOWN

= SYSTEM DATA only(see 3, below).

All bits 0

3 DOWN: Determines whether system-wide data or individual phone data is used for DSP control of IP-based phones. a) SYSTEM DATA: System-wide data will be used.(MMC 841) b) PHONE DATA: Individual phone data will be used.(MMC 840)

SYS DATA

06 ITP TX GAIN/HSET Sets IP-based phone Handset TX gain value of each level.

07 ITP RX GAIN/HSET Sets IP-based phone Handset RX gain value of each level.

Depends on country

Depends on country

2-322



(continued)


08 ITP TX GAIN/MIC Sets IP-based phone MIC gain value of each level. Depends on country

09 ITP RX GAIN/SPKR Sets IP-based phone SPKR gain value of each level.

Depends on country

UPGRADE

Sets IP-based phone software upgrade option with the system.

0 TYPE: a) MMC COMMAND: IP-based phone software upgraded manually in MMC 840. b) PHONE CON: IP-based phone software upgraded automatically when phone connected. c) AUTO TIME: IP-based phone software upgraded automatically at set time.

MMC

COMMAND

0000(Disable)

11 MGI ALIVE PERIOD Set the time interval of checking the link connection of MGI card and the system.

13 LICENSE KEY Insert the license key to enable SoftPhone connection.

14 LICENSE STATUS

1 START(HHMM): IP-based phone software automatic upgrade start time.

2 INTERVAL: IP-based phone software automatic upgrade interval time.

15 DATA CARD IPC

16 MP MGI/VM KEY

The status(Valid or Invalid) of the inserted license key.

Set the value(YES or NO) to support IPC by DATA

CARD

Insert the license key to enable MGI, VM ports

10 seconds.

-

NONE

-

YES

-

17 MP MGI/VM STATUS The status of the inserted MP MGI/VM license key.

1. MGI ALLOW (0~8)

2. VMS ALLOW (0~4)

-

DEFAULT DATA

SEE DESCRIPTION


2-323

CHAPTER 2.


ACTION DISPLAY


Display shows the first available option.

2) Enter option category number 0-13 via dial

Keypad.(e.g., 2)

OR

Press Volume button to make select and press Right Soft button to move cursor.

3) Enter option number via dial keypad.

OR

Press Volume button to make select and press Right Soft button to move cursor.

PHONE VERSION

LARGE DGP: 0000

ITP REGISTRATION

TYPE: SYS PSWD

ITP REGISTRATION

PSWD: 1234

ITP REGISTRATION

OR

PSWD: 8228

Press Right Soft button to save and return to step 3.


OR


RELATED ITEMS

MMC 199

MMC 840

SHOW LICENSE STATUS


2-324



[845] WLAN PARAMETERS

This MMC modifies the WLAN parameters.

The SYSTEM KEY is used internally to distinguish between systems when registering a terminal. The default value is ‘00000’, but this must be changed to another value to enable the use of WLAN terminals. In addition, the SYSTEM KEY serves as an identification ID when a WLAN terminal connects to the WBS24.

The default value of the SYSTEM ID, ‘WBS24’, must also be changed to another value in order to use multiple systems in one area. The DNS setting for WLAN is additionally described in this MMC.

Set the network configuration for WBS24 by setting the IP assignment, Netmask and

Gateway. These settings should be compatible with the Intranet since the network configuration setting is essential for data service. In addition, the RF frequency for WBS24 should be selected. Currently up to 14 frequencies may be selected.

Session Initiation Protocol(SIP) variables used for the WBS24(Basic) can be defined.

WLAN PARAMETER

No Parameter

05 CODEC LIST

06 RF CHANNEL

Description

CODEC that can be used for VoIP calls between

WBS24 and terminal. G.711u, G.711a, G.726, and

G.729 can all be assigned.

Set a RF CHANNEL value that can be used by

WBS.

Default

CODEC 1: G.729

CODEC 2: NONE

CODEC 3: NONE

CODEC 4: NONE

USE CH 1: 01

USE CH 2: 06

USE CH 3: 11

USE CH 4: 00

USE CH 5: 00

USE CH 6: 00


2-325

CHAPTER 2.


(continued)


07 VERSION

20 MAX AP CH. Set the maximum channel number of AP

21 WLAN SWTCH Support WLAN switch function

SIP PARAMETER

Default

Version

00

DISABLE

No

0

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

Parameter Description Default(ms)

RE-TRANS T1 When using an unreliable transmission protocol such as UDP, retransmission is required when no reply is received. RE-TRANS.T1 TIME is the initial retransmission interval defined in RFC2543.

RE-TRANS T2 Maximum retransmission interval defined in RFC

2543

500

4000

5000 RE-TRANS T4 RFC 2543 defines this parameter for various purposes. For example, this parameter can be used as the time waited by User Agent Server after receiving

ACK message in an unreliable transmission protocol.

GEN RING TM When using an unreliable transmission protocol, the server cannot be sure if the client has received the last reply. Thus, the server must retransmit the reply for this length of time until it receives the requested retransmission. For example, this parameter can be used as the waiting time after sending 200 OK for

INFO.

INV RING TM When using an unreliable transmission protocol, the client cannot verify if the server has received the

ACK returned to the server for the INVITE Final Response. The client waits for this length of time after sending the ACK for the Final Response.

6000

1000

GEN NO RESP Waiting time before cancelling SIP related Request. 5000

INV NO RESP Waiting time before cancelling SIP INVITE Request. 6000

5000 REQ

RETRY

Waiting time for receiving final response for SIP related Request.

PROVISIONAL On receiving Provision Response, the User Agent must wait for this length of time until Timeout.

180000

DEFAULT DATA

SEE DESCRIPTION

2-326



ACTION DISPLAY


WLAN: SYSTEM ID

WBS24

2) When the cursor is on WLAN, press Volume button and select WLAN, WBS, or SIP.

WLAN: SYSTEM ID

WBS24

3) Press Right Soft button to move to the SYSTEM ID.

WLAN: SYSTEM ID

When the cursor is below SYSTEM ID, press

WBS24

Volume button to select the setting menu for WLAN.

4) Set the items below at the WLAN menu.

SYSTEM ID: Use the Soft button to move the

Register the SYSTEM KEY.

WLAN: SYSTEM ID cursor and enter the new WLAN SYSTEM ID to

register.

WBS24

Press Soft button and proceed to next register status.

WLAN: SYSTEM KEY

00000

Register the 1 st

DNS server IP.

WLAN: 1ST DNS IP

0. 0. 0. 0

Register the 2 nd

DNS server IP.

WLAN: 2ND DNS IP

0. 0. 0. 0

Register the 2 nd

WBS IP.

WLAN: 2ND WBS IP

0. 0. 0. 0

Select the voice codec. Select from G711a, G711u, and G729 CODEC.

Numbers are given from 1 to 4 based on priority.

Select the usable RF channel. Maximum six channels can be used for a system.

(Default RF channel: 1, 6, 11)

Used to change the TX POWER of all WBS.

(Default: LEVEL 1~4)

Used to clear registration information of all WBS.

WLAN: CODEC LIST

CODEC 1: G.711a

WLAN: RF CHANNEL

USE CH 1: 01

WLAN: WBS TX PWR

DEFAULT

WLAN: CLR WBSREG

ARE YOU SURE?NO


2-327

CHAPTER 2.


5) Set the items below at the WBS24 menu. The selected WBS is as set in MMC 849(SELECT AP

TYPE option) i.e. CWBS=COMBO WBS,

BWBS=BASIC WBS.

Register the WBS24 IP ADDRESS.

Register the WBS24 NET MASK.

Register the WBS24 GATEWAY.

Displays the WBS24 MAC ADDRESS.

Displays the WBS24 STATUS.

Register the WBS24 RF CHANNEL.(The WBS RF channel must be selected from the pre-assigned

RF channels in WLAN RF CHANNELS).

Register the WBS24 TX POWER.

(Default: LEVEL 1~4)

Used to clear the WBS parameter.

6) Set the items below at the menu.

The initial re-transmission time if no answer,

based on the RFC2543 specification.

The range is 0-9900 ms.(Default: 500 ms)

CWBS1: IP ADDR

0. 0. 0. 0

CWBS1: NET MASK

255.255.255. 0

CWBS1: GATEWAY

0. 0. 0. 0

CWBS1 : MAC ADDR

FFFF FFFF FFFF

CWBS1 : VERSION

CWBS1 : STATUS

OFF

CWBS1 : RF CHAN

USE CH 1:01

CWBS1 : TX POWER

DEFAULT

CWBS1 : PARA CLR

ARE YOU SURE?NO

SIP : RE-TRANS T1

000500MS

SIP : RE-TRANS T2

004000MS

The maximum re-transmission time if no answer,

based on the RFC2543 specification.


2-328



Register the RE-TRANS T4. The time the User Agent

Server waits after receiving the ACK message.

Based on the RFC2543 specification.


Register the GEN RING TM. The server retransmits the response for this length of time until the requested retransmission is received. For example, the wait time after sending 200 OK for INFO.


Register the INV RING TM. After the client sends

ACK for the INVITE Final Response, the client can not confirm if the server received the ACK message. The client waits this long after sending ACK for the Final Response.


Register the GEN NO RESP. Before sending Cancel for General Request, the User Agent waits this long.


Register the INV NO RESP. Before sending Cancel for the Invite Request, the User Agent waits this

long.


Register the REQ RETRY. After sending General Request, he User Agent waits for the Final Response for this length of time.

The range is 0-99900 ms Default is 5000 ms

Register the PROVISIONAL. After receiving the

Provision Response, the User Agent waits this long

SIP : RE-TRANS T4

005000MS

SIP : GEN RING TM

006000MS

SIP : INV RING TM

001000MS

SIP : GEN NO RESP

005000MS

SIP : INV NO RESP

006000MS

SIP : REQ RETRY

005000MS

SIP : PROVISIONAL

180000MS


RELATED ITEMS

MMC 846 WIP INFORMATION

MMC 848 WLAN IP/MAC LIST

MMC 849 WLAN CONFIGURATION


2-329

CHAPTER 2.


[846] WIP INFORMATION

This MMC sets up the WIP-5000M wireless terminal information.


00 REGISTERED

01 LOCATED

Shows if the terminal is registered.

02 PHONE TYPE Shows the type of the terminal.

NO

Shows if the terminal is connected to the system. DETACH

NONE

03 WLI NUMBER Number of WLI connected to the WBS24 servicing the terminal

04 WBS NUMBE Number of WBS24 servicing the terminal

-

-

05 IP OFFSET

06 IP ADDRESS

07 MAC ADDR

08 USER ID

09 PASSWORD

10 INSERT DGT

Location of IP pool of the terminal IP

Terminal IP address

Terminal MAC address

User ID per terminal

Password of terminal user

If five or more numbers are entered into the WIP terminal, this INSERT DGT is prefixed to the numbers, provided the entered numbers do not start with a C.O. number, C.O. group number,

LCR, network LCR, or function code.

-

0.0.0.0

0000 0000 0000

1212

0000

-

DEFAULT DATA

SEE DESCRIPTION

ACTION DISPLAY


2) Dial the WIP number.

OR



3) Set the items below at the menu.

Confirm the status of terminal registration for each phone number.

[3301] REGISTERED

NO

[3301] REGISTERED

NO

[3301] REGISTERED

NO

2-330



Displays the location of the registered terminal.

[3301] LOCATED

DETACH

Displays the PHONE TYPE of the registered terminal.

Displays the WLI NUMBER of the registered terminal.(currently not used)

Displays the WBS NUMBER of the registered ter-

[3301] PHONE TYPE

[3301] WLI NUMBER

[3301] WBS NUMBER minal.

Displays the IP OFFSET of the registered terminal.

[3301] IP OFFSET

Displays the IP ADDRESS of the registered terminal.

Displays the MAC ADDRESS of the registered terminal.

Register the USER ID of the terminal.

[3301] IP ADDRESS

[3301] MAC ADDR

[3301] USER ID

1212

Register the PASSWORD of the terminal.

[3301] PASSWORD

0000

Register the INSERT DGT for the terminal.

(These digits will be automatically inserted in front of user dialling digits when there are more than 4 digits and they do not start with the trunk access code or feature code.)

[3301] INSERT DGT

_

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 848

MMC 849

WLAN IP/MAC LIST

WLAN CONFIGURATION


2-331

CHAPTER 2.


[848] WLAN IP/MAC LIST

This MMC is used when viewing the IP list assigned to WLAN, or when creating a new IP list. This IP address is automatically assigned to WIP-5000M during a new registration procedure. If the IP address is already assigned, the assigned terminal number will be shown in the USED field.

Also, the MMC is used to set MAC addresses in the terminal in order to use the wireless

LAN.(not yet implemented)

DEFAULT DATA

NONE

ACTION DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button, and enter 848.

2) Select the menu.(0: IP LIST, 1: MAC LIST)

3) Select the table number.

4) Enter the IP ADDRESS.

5) A number next to USED indicates the terminal number to which the IP ADDRESS was assigned.

IP:001 USED:

0. 0. 0. 0

IP:001 USED:

0. 0. 0. 0

IP:001 USED:

_ 0. 0. 0. 0

IP:001 USED:

168. 0. 0. 0

IP:001 USED:3301

168.219.149. 5

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 846

MMC 849

WIP INFORMATION

WLAN CONFIGURATION

2-332



[849] WLAN CONFIGURATION

This MMC is used to set the WLAN configuration.

Parameter Description

REGISTER VoWLAN Enable or disable registration of new WIP-5000M mobile phone.

WIP REGIST CLEAR Used to clear the registration of WIP. FORCED mode clearing is used when the device is not connected normally(e.g., device broken), otherwise the NORMAL mode clearing can be used.

WBS WEP SERVICE Enable or disable the WEP(Wired Equivalent Privacy) feature.

WEP KEY Assign the WEP key.(13 characters only)

STATIC WBS IP

STATIC WIP IP

SELECT AP

Select the use of Static WBS IP.

Select the use of Static WIP IP.

Select if using DUAL AP or BASIC APs

DEFAULT DATA

REGISTER VoWLAN: DISABLE

WIP REGIST CLEAR: FORCED

WBS WEP SERVICE: DISABLE

WEP KEY: NONE

STATIC WBS IP: DISABLE

STATIC WIP IP: DISABLE

SELECT AP TYPE: BASIC AP(DEPENDS ON COUNTRY)

ACTION DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button, and press 849.

2) Enter the PASSCODE.

(This PASSCODE is assigned in MMC 202

3) Select ENABLE to register a terminal.

4) Select WIP REGIST CLEAR to clear the registration status for a terminal.

5) Select the WEP KEY setting when ENCRYPTION is selected.

ENTER PASSWORD

_

ENTER PASSCODE

****

REGISTER VoWLAN

ENABLE

WIP REGIST CLEAR

3301:FORCED

WBS WEP SERVICE

DISABLE


2-333

CHAPTER 2.


6) Enter WEP KEY values when the WBS WEP SER-

VICE is enabled.(13 characters only)

7) Select ENABLE to use the static WBS IP.

8) Select ENABLE to use the static WIP IP.

9) Select AP TYPE of the system. If you change the AP type, the system must be restarted.

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 846

MMC 848

WIP INFORMATION

WLAN IP/MAC LIST

WEP KEY

STATIC WBS IP

DISABLE

STATIC WIP IP

DISABLE

SELECT AP TYPE

COMBO AP

SELECT AP TYPE

RESET SYSTEM?NO

2-334



[850] SYSTEM RESOURCE DISPLAY

This MMC is used for system resource display.(used and free resources) This is a READ-

ONLY MMC.

0. DTMFR DSP’S

1. CID DSP’S

2. R2MFC DSP’S

3. CONF GROUP’S

DEFAULT DATA

NONE

ACTION DISPLAY


Display shows:

2) Enter the option number.(0-3)

OR

Press Volume button to select.


OR

Press Speaker button advance to next MMC.

DTMFR DSP’S

USE:000 FREE:008

CID DSP’S

USE:000 FREE:008

RELATED ITEMS

NONE


2-335

CHAPTER 2.


[851] ALARM REPORTING

This MMC is used to view, store, print or clear system alarms. Two levels of faults are displayed via an alarm code: major alarms and minor alarms. Major alarms codes are usually service affecting and require a certified technician to determine the fault. A minor alarm indicates a fault that may or may not be service affecting and usually does not seriously degrade the system’s operating capabilities.

The alarm buffer holds up to 100 alarms on a First In-First Out(FIFO) basis. Alarms provide a date and time stamp based on the system time. If applicable, the hardware cabinet, port, and/or slot will be displayed. If an ALARM SIO port is programmed(MMC 804), alarm information can be printed on demand and as it is provided.

ALARM REPORTING OPTIONS(Select one of the options)

No Option

0 VIEW ALARMS

1 OVERFLOW

CONTROL

2 CLEAR ALARM BUF

3 PRINT ALARM BUF

Description

View alarm buffer.

Determines buffer control when buffer is full.

0 OVERWRITTEN: When buffer is full, the oldest entry in buffer is overwritten.(Default.)

1 STOP RECORDING: When buffer is full, stop recording alarms.

Clears alarm buffer.

Prints contents of alarm buffer to the assigned alarm IO port.

ALARM CODE DEFINITION

See Alarm Code Definitions in MMC 852.

DEFAULT DATA

NONE

2-336



ACTION DISPLAY


Display shows:

2) Enter desired option.

OR



3) System displays the alarm count number, date and time stamp.

Alarm type and cause code will display.

4) Press Volume button to scroll through other alarms.

OR



OR


SYS ALARM REPORT

VIEW ALARMS

SYS ALARM REPORT

VIEW ALARMS

[00] 02/18 14:30

MNF02 C1-S02

SYS ALARM REPORT

VIEW ALARMS

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 852 SYSTEM ALARM ASSIGNMENTS


2-337

CHAPTER 2.


[852] SYSTEM ALARM ASSIGNMENTS

This MMC allows the assignment of system alarms to ring and display on stations that have an Alarm key assigned. The Alarm key is assigned in MMC 722(Station Key Programming). Alarm key programming is tenant wide(tenants 1 and 2). Alarms not programmed to report to the system Alarm key will still be retained in the maintenance alarm buffer for Alarm Reporting(MMC 851). The alarm buffer holds up to 100 alarms on a First

In-First Out(FIFO) basis. Pressing the Alarm key will silence the audible alarm until another alarm is generated by the system. Alarm conditions that have multiple causes(e.g.,

PRI errors and synchronization loss) will print all associated alarm information if an SIO port is programmed as an ALARM port. The specific fault alarm data can be displayed via

MMC 851, System Alarm Reporting.

Alarm Notification

Alarm Notification Off/On(0/1) determines if the alarm provides a visual and audible notification to the System Alarm key station(s). Pressing the System Alarm key and the release key will silence the audible alarm only at the station that pressed the System Alarm key and the release key. See alarm displays table for assignments.

Alarm Code Definitions:

Alarm Name No Code

-

MJA--

01 MJA01

02 MJA02

03 MJA03

04 MJA04

05 MJA05

06 MJA06

Definition

MCP2 Error

POR Restart

Soft Restart

Mem Reset

MCP Reset

System Fault

MCP2 restart process has been executed via power on restart.(POR)

MCP2 restart process has been executed via button reset.

The system RAM has been cleared via manual programming(PCMMC or KMMC) resulting in a system reset.

The MCP2 has software exception error.

Alarm data = Reason

- BUS ERR: Restart Bus Error

- ADDR.ERR: Restart Address Error

- ILLEGAL: Restart Illegal Opcode

- ZERO DIVID: Restart Zero Divide

- PRIVILEGE: Restart Privilege Violation

- ENDL LOOP: Restart Endless Loop

LCP Reset The SCP2 or LCP2 has reset

Alarm data = Cabinet(1, 2 or 3)

PCM Switching A fault has occurred in the Switching Control

Alarm data = MCP BASE, ESM: 1, ESM: 2 or ESM: 3

2-338



No

-

08

09

Code

MJB--

MJB01

MJB02

10

11

12

13

14

16

17

25

26

27

28

31

32

MJB03

MJB04

MJB05

MJB06

MJB07

MJC--

MJC01

MJC02

MJC10

MJC11

MJC12

MJC13

MJC16

MJC17

(continued)

Alarm Name Definition

LCP/TASK Error LCP or TASK Fault

HDLC Com Error Communications to LCP lost or faulty.

Memory Alarm 1 A RAM diagnostic check error has occurred in the

MCP2.

Memory Alarm 2 A RAM diagnostic check error has occurred in cabinet 1

SCP2.


LCP2.


LCP2.

IPC MSGQ Over IPC TX queue full error has occurred in the MCP2.

Alarm data = IPC Queue type

(MCP-LAN, MCP-SCP, MCP-LCP1, MCP-LCP2)

Task MSGQ Over Task MSG queue full error has occurred in the MCP2.

Alarm data = Error Task

DSP Error

DTMF Fault

Tone Fault

AA-DTMF Fault An abnormal fault reported in one of the AA card

DTMF resources.

Alarm data = Cabinet, Slot, Port(Cx-Syy-Pzz)

AA-MFR Rec

An abnormal interrupt has occurred in the system tone resources.

Alarm data = TONE Receiver DSP position.

An abnormal fault reported in one of the AA card

DTMF resources has recovered.

Alarm data = Cabinet, Slot, Port(Cx-Syy-Pzz)

E911 Restart

System DSP Fault

An abnormal interrupt has occurred in the system

DTMF resources.

Alarm data = DTMF Receiver DSP position

E911 Block

WLI Restart

The E911 card has restarted.

Alarm data = Cabinet, Slot(Cx-Syy)

The E911 card has blocked because the system detects the card does not work correctly.


The WLI card has restarted.


WLI Block The WLI card has blocked because the system detects the card does not work correctly.



2-339

CHAPTER 2.


No

-

33

34

35

Code

MJD--

MJD01

MJD02

MJD03

36

37

39

40

41

42

43

44

45

46

47

48

49

MJD04

MJD05

MJD07

MJD08

MJD09

MJD10

MJD11

MJD12

MJD13

MJD14

MJD15

MJD16

MJD17

(continued)


DTRK Error

Sync Failure

ISDN or E1 card Fault

Clocking on TEPRI cards has become asynchronous.

Sync Recovery Clocking on TEPRI cards has become synchronous.

Red Alarm

Red Alarm Rec PCM carrier detected locally on TEPRI cards.

Alarm Data = Cabinet, Slot(Cx-Syy)

Yellow Alarm

Locally detected loss of PCM carrier on TEPRI card for more than 250 ms.


Remotely detected failure transmitted in frame on

TEPRI card.


Rec

Blue Alarm

Remotely detected failure restored transmitted on

TEPRI card.


All 1's being transmitted on facility on TEPRI card.


Blue Alarm Rec A blue alarm condition has been cleared.


Bit Error Alarm Alarm is activated when the error rate exceeds 1 x 10

-6 errors. Note: 1x10

-6

is threshold for minor alarm, 1 x 10

-3

is threshold for major alarm errors on E1, PRI or BRI.


NTWRK Event An Implausible event has occurred on the PRI or BRI

Network digital line. Protocols do not match or subscriber ID mismatch.


SPID Init Error

SPID Init Rec

The BRI received an error from the network.

Alarm Data = Cabinet, Slot, Channel(Cx-Syy-czz)

The BRI has recovered from an error on the network


LPBK Error Internal on demand loopback failed.


LPBK Recovery Internal on demand loopback test passed.


BRI DL Unavail A BRI data link is out of service.


BRI DL Recovery A BRI data link is back in service.


RAM Error An error has occurred in the TEPRI or BRI card RAM.


2-340



No

-

50

Code

MJD--

MJD18

51

52

53

54

-

55

56

57

58

59

60

61

62

63

MJD19

MJD20

MJD21

MJD22

MJE--

MJE01

MJE02

MJE03

MJE04

MJE05

MJE06

MJE07

MJE08

MJE09

(continued)


DTRK Error

E1 Restart

PRI Restart

BRI Restart

ISDN or E1 card Fault

The E1 card has restarted.


The PRI card has restarted.


The BRI card has restarted.


PCM Loss Loss of PCM coding on a digital facility.


PCM Recovery Loss of PCM coding on a digital facility.


MGI Error MGI card Fault

MGI Restart

MGI Stop

The MGI card has restarted.


The MGI card has stoped.


MGI IP Duplicate The MGI card IP address is duplicated.


MGI NTWK Error The MGI card has blocked because the system detects the card doesn’t respond via network link.

External ping test.


MGI NTWK Rec The MGI card has restarted because the system detects the card does respond via network link.

External ping test.


MGI DSP Error The MGI card DSP has blocked because the system detects the card DSP does not run correctly.

Alarm Data = Cabinet, Slot(Cx-Syy-Pzz)

MGI DSP Run The MGI card DSP has restarted because the system detects the card DSP runs correctly.

Alarm Data = Cabinet, Slot(Cx-Syy-Pzz)

WBS Disconnect Indicates the WBS is disconnected.

Alarm Data = CWBS:xx or BWBS:xx

WBS connect Indicates the WBS is connected.

Alarm Data = CWBS:xx or BWBS:xx


2-341

CHAPTER 2.


No Code

MNF--

64 MNF01

Alarm Name

Minor Error

Card Out

65 MNF02 Card In

(continued)

Definition

Minor Fault with Alarm Buffer saving

A circuit card mounted in a universal slot has been removed from service or is not recognized by the system.


A circuit card mounted in a universal slot has been returned to service.


67

68

MNF04

MNF05

Trunk Fault

Alarm Data = Cabinet-Slot(Cx-Syy)

Out of service trunk detected via loop detect. Internal

CODEC test.

Alarm Data = Cabinet, Slot, Port(Cx-Syy-Pzz)

Trunk Recovery Out of service trunk detected via loop detected as out of service is now operational.

Alarm Data = Cabinet, Slot, Port(Cx-Syy-Pzz) nect

Out of service trunk detected via seizure of trunk. External seizure test.


70

71

72

73

74

75

MNF07

MNF08

MNF09

MNF10

MNF11

MNF12

Trunk Connect

SIO TxQ Over

SIO TxQ Under SIO Tx Queue under error has occurred in the MCP2.

Alarm Data = SIO number(SIO: x)

E1 Out Of Srv

SIO Tx Queue full error has occurred in the MCP2.


E1 Digital line status has been changed to out of service.


E1 In Service

Out of service trunk recovered via seizure of trunk. External seizure test.


SIO Out

E1 Digital line has been restored to normal service.


IO port has lost DTR.


76 MNF13 SIO In IO port has regained DTR.

Alarm Data = SIO 1 through 6

Time of Day Clock in the MCP2 has erred. 77

78

MNF14

MNF15

TODC Error

TSW Over Alarm The TSW has been requested to exceed the capacity of available time slots. Maximum 192 per cabinet.


79 MNF16 PSU Alarm There are more ports than can be supported in a cabinet and more power is required.


2-342



No Code

81 MNF18

82

83

84

85

86

87

88

MNF19

MNF20

MNF21

MNF26

MNF27

MNF28

MNF29

MNG--

(continued)

Alarm Name

nect

Definition

SLI Fault

Rec Over-configuration of cabinet has been corrected.


An SLI card has been detected as out of service via an internal CODEC test.


SLI Recovery

PSUB Alarm

An SLI card detected as out of service has been detected as recovered and is in service via internal CO-

DEC test.


Indicates there are over 120 ports in a cabinet with two

PSUs.


DSS Alarm

SIO RxQ Over

System capacity of 64-button DSS modules has been exceeded.

SIO Tx Queue full error has occurred in the MCP2.


SIO RxQ Under SIO Tx Queue under error has occurred in the MCP2.


LAN Printer Err LAN printer error has occurred in the MCP2.

Alarm Data = Data Type(SMDR)

LAN Printer Rec LAN printer error has recovered in the MCP2.

Alarm Data = Data Type(SMDR)

Minor Error Minor Fault without Alarm Buffer saving

Indicates the Phone is disconnected.

Alarm Data = Tel number or Cx-Syy-Pzz

91

92 MNG04 On Hook


MNG03 Off Hook Alarm Indicates Extension Off Hook Alarm timer has expired.


Indicates the Off Hook Alarm Extension is on hook.


93 MNG05 MGI Packet Loss Indicates the MGI connection RTP packet loss is more than 10 %.


94 MNG06 MGI Packet Delay Indicates the MGI connection RTP packet delay is more than 500 ms.



2-343

CHAPTER 2.


DEFAULT DATA

ALL OFF

ACTION DISPLAY


Display shows:

2) Enter desired Alarm Display number.(e.g., 64)

OR

Press Volume buttons to select desired option and press Right Soft button to advance the cursor.

3) To select if the alarm is active, press 1 for

YES and 0 for NO.

An entry will return the cursor to step 2.

OR




OR


01:MJA01 ACT:OFF

POR Restart

64:MNF01 ACT:OFF

Card Out

64:MNF01 ACT:ON

Card Out

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 501

MMC 722

MMC 723

MMC 851

MMC 853

SYSTEM TIMERS



ALARM REPORTING

MAINTENANCE BUSY

2-344



[853] MAINTENANCE BUSY

This MMC is used to place stations, trunks and common resources equipment in a maintenance busy condition. This can be used to isolate suspected intermittent problems. Stations placed in maintenance busy will behave like a station in DND when called. The calling stations display will show ‘MADE BUSY’. Stations receiving DID or E&M type calls will receive a DND/ No more calls tone. The station display will still function with station and date.

When the busy station is accessed, it will function like a ‘locked all’ station. Trunks made busy cannot originate calls. Ring down type trunks will still ring the programmed destination. Common resource equipment such as DSPs, CID DSPs and miscellaneous equipment such as page ports and voice mail card ports can also be placed in a maintenance busy state.

MAINTENANCE BUSY OPTIONS

Option Description No

0 TRK

1 STN

2 PAGE

4 DTMFR

5 CID

6 R2MFC

7 CONF

8 MGI

Trunks

Stations

DTMFR/CID/R2MFC DSP

If DTMFR, CID or R2MFC is selected when DSP is not mounted, display will show NONE. If mounted, display will show IDLE by default.

DEFAULT DATA

ALL IDLE


2-345

CHAPTER 2.


ACTION DISPLAY


Display shows busy functions:

2) Enter busy function type(0-8) via dial keypad.

OR



3) Enter station number.

OR



4) Press 1 to make busy or 0 to make idle.

OR


Right Soft button to save and return step 3.


OR


MAINTENANCE BUSY

TRK :NONE

Æ

MAINTENANCE BUSY

STN :NONE

Æ

MAINTENANCE BUSY

STN :201

ÆIDLE

MAINTENANCE BUSY

STN :201

ÆBUSY

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 851

MMC 852

ALARM REPORTING


2-346



[854] DIAGNOSTIC TIME

Provides a means to set the Diagnostic Time. The system diagnostics tests include memory audits, internal loopback tests on digital trunks, and DSP, AA DSP tests. Additional tests include CODEC tests on analogue trunk and station cards and tone tests. If the diagnostics cannot complete the tests because of system traffic, the system will abort the tests and retry during the next programmed diagnostic time. It is recommended to assign the diagnostic time during non-peak traffic periods.

DEFAULT DATA

NO DIAGNOSTIC TIME SET

ACTION DISPLAY


Display shows:

2) Enter weekday number.

(0: Sun, 1: Mon, …, 6: Sat)

OR



3) Enter hour(24-hour clock) via the dial keypad.

Cursor will advance to next entry.

4) Enter minutes(24-hour clock) via the dial keypad.

Cursor will return to step 2.


OR


RELATED ITEMS

MMC 851

MMC 852

MMC 853

ALARM REPORTING


MAINTENANCE BUSY

DIAGNOSTIC TIME

SUN: :

DIAGNOSTIC TIME

SUN:_ :

DIAGNOSTIC TIME

SUN:23:_

DIAGNOSTIC TIME

SUN:23:30


2-347

CHAPTER 2.


[856] TECH PROGRAMMING LOGS

This MMC lists the date, time and entry location of the last eight times that technicianlevel programming was accessed. This allows a technician to determine if there was unauthorized access to system programming and where this access occurred. The information stored in this log is displayed, for each of the eight accesses, as follows: first line shows the start date and time of access; second line shows the access type(see table) and end date and time of access.

There are four access types:

Type

NNNN

MODEM

LAN

SIOx

Description

The extension number of a phone that accessed programming directly(e.g., 3203)

Programming was accessed by PCMMC via the integrated V90 modem attached to the IOM board of the main cabinet.

Programming was accessed by PCMMC via the LAN connection on the MCP2 card of main cabinet.

Programming was accessed by PCMMC via one of the SIO connections on the IOM board of the main cabinet, where x is the number(2 or 3) of the SIO port that was used.

DEFAULT DATA

NONE

ACTION DISPLAY


Display shows:

2) Enter number 1-8 for required access display.

(e.g., 3)

OR

Press Volume button to scroll.


OR


(1) 11/22 11:03

Æ

3203 :11/22 11:27

(3) 11/22 12:30

Æ

3203 :11/22 13:30

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 800 ENABLE TECHNICIAN PROGRAM

2-348



[857] VIRTUAL CABINET SET

This MMC is the program that specifies the type of virtual cabinet card. The type of virtual cabinet card is as follows:

Range

Type

SLT

DGP

C2S01 ~ C2S03

C2S01 ~ C2S03

WIRED ITP C3S01 ~ C4S01

WLAN ITP C3S01 ~ C4S01

SIP STN C3S01 ~ C4S01

IP UMS -

Type

Range

BRI STN

GCONF

STN

C4S02 ~ C5S01

C4S02 ~ C5S01

SPNET TRK C3S02 ~ C5S03

SIP TRK C5S01 ~ C5S03

H323 TRK C5S01 ~ C5S03

DEFAULT DATA

Cabinet

2

Slot Card Type

1 SLI

2 DLI

3 DLI

4

Cabinet

3

5

Slot Card Type

ACTION DISPLAY


Display shows:

2) Enter number 1-3 for cabinet number and enter number 1-12 for slot number.

OR


C4-S01:SLT

SLT

C4-S01:SLT

SLT


2-349

CHAPTER 2.


3) Press Volume botton to scroll card type and Select card type by pressing Right soft botton.


OR


RELATED ITEMS

MMC 724 NUMBER PLAB

MMC 822 VIR.EXT TYPE

C4-S01:SLT

DGP

2-350



[859] HARDWARE VERSION DISPLAY

This MMC is used for system hardware EPLD/PCB version display. This is a READ-

ONLY MMC.

No

1

2

3

Option

MP CARD

C1S1

C1S2

Description

Shows the EPLD/PCB version of MCP.

Shows the EPLD/PCB version of card in cabinet1/slot1.

Shows the EPLD/PCB version of card in cabinet1/slot2

DEFAULT DATA

NONE

ACTION DISPLAY


Display shows:

2) Enter the option number.

OR



OR

Press Speaker button advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS

NONE

EPLD/PCB VERSION

MP CARD :V30

EPLD/PCB VERSION

C1S1 : UNI :V30


2-351

CHAPTER 2.


[861] SYSTEM OPTIONS

Sets a number of system options.

DEFAULT DATA

AUTO UPDATE TIME: DISABLE

SYSTEM SPEED BIN: MAX 500

IDLE WHEN ENBLOC: DISABLE

2 LINE ENBLOCK: DISABLE

2 ZONE EXT PAGE: DISABLE

USE LB FOR PAGE: NONE

LP TRK TONE DISC: DISABLE

ISDN SS FEATURE: DISABLE

SPNET OVERLAP: DISABLE

SPNET CLI TABLE: NONE

E-LCR CLI TABLE: NONE

EXTERNAL BGM/MOH: INT.CHIME


1

2

AUTO UPDATE TIME

SYSTEM SPPED BIN

Sets enable(1) or disable(0) the system automatically time and date update from ISDN call connection message. If sets enable, when system receives ISDN call connection message, system checks valid data of encapsulated time and date, and update system time and date device.

Sets max 500(0) or max 950(1) for the maximum number of system speed dial bin.

3 IDLE WHEN ENBLOC Decides the state of Large LCD Phone treated as idle or busy when the user of Large LCD Phone is dialling in ENBLOCK mode.

4 2 LINE ENBLOCK

7

8

LP TRK TONE DISC

ISDN SS FEATURE

9 SPNET OVERLAP

Decides the usage of ENBLOCK mode for 2 line LCD Phone with navigation buttons.

When this option is set to ON, loop trunk can be disconnected by detecting busy tone.

Decides whether ISDN SS(Supplement Service) is used or not.

10 SPNET CLI TABLE

To assign other dial tone, OVERLAP by spnet function can be enable.

If network call and this option is set, CLI have to be applied by

CLI TABLE.

11 E-LCR CLI TABLE If E-LCR call and this option is set, CLI have to be applied by CLI

TABLE.

12 EXTERNAL BGM/MOH Backgroud music source can be use internal source or external source, In case of external source, music source can be supported in MISC port.

2-352



ACTION DISPLAY


Display shows:

2) Enter the option number.

OR



AUTO UPDATE TIME

DISABLE

AUTO UPDATE TIME

DISABLE


2-353

CHAPTER 2.


3) Enter 1 or 0 to enable or disable.

OR


Right Soft button to store.


OR


RELATED ITEMS

MMC 107

MMC 505

MMC 606

MMC 705

MMC 706

MMC 722

MMC 723

KEY EXTENDER


ASSIGN SPEED DIAL BLOCK

SYSTEM SPEED DIAL




AUTO UPDATE TIME

ENABLE

2-354



[863] NODE INFO

This MMC allows 1000 systems to be connected by u spnet service.

No Option

1 ACCESS NUM

2 IP ADDR

3 TEL NUMBER

4 MAX COUNT

Description

Sets the system node ID

Sets the system IP address

Sets the system CO tel number

Sets this value to support ENBLOCK DIAL MODE.

CONDITIONS

NONE

ACTION DISPLAY


Display shows:

2) Select the entry number.(0001 ~ 2000)

OR



3) Select the option number.(0~3)

OR



(e.g ACCESS NUM)

4) Enter the system node ID

(0001) ACCESS NUM

(0001) ACCESS NUM

(0001) ACCESS NUM

Right Soft button to save.


OR


(0001) ACCESS NUM

RELATED ITEMS

NONE


2-355

CHAPTER 2.


[890] INITIALIZE PORT

This MMC clears a call process or initializes the database for specific station or trunks.

This will return the port to default condition.

DEFAULT DATA

NONE

ACTION DISPLAY


Display shows:

2) Enter the station or Trunk line.

OR

Press Volume button to make selection and press the Right Soft button to move cursor.

3) Enter 0 to call clear only or 1 to initialize port.

OR

Press Volume button to make selection and press the Right Soft button to move cursor.

4) Enter 1 for YES or 0 for NO.

OR

Press Volume button to make selection and press the Right Soft button to save and return to step 2.


OR


RELATED ITEMS

[201] CALL CLEAR

ARE YOU SURE?NO

[202] CALL CLEAR

ARE YOU SURE?NO

[202] DB INITIAL

ARE YOU SURE?NO

[202] DB INITIAL

ARE YOU SURE?YES

NONE

2-356



ABBREVIATION

A

B

ALG

AME

AOM

C

BRI

BWBS

Application Level Gateway

Answering Machine Emulation

Add On Module

Basic Rate Interface

Basic Wireless Base Station(Access Point)

CCBS

CCNR

CID

CLI

Call Completion to Busy Subscriber

Cell Completion on No Reply

Caller Identification

Call Line Identification

COM Communication

COS Class Of Service

CPLD Complex Programmable Logic Device

CR Mode

CSU

CWBS

Constant Resistance Mode

Communication Service Unit

Combo Wireless Base Station(Access Point)


I

II


D

DASL Digital Adapter Subscriber Loops

DECT

DGP

DHCP

DLI

DND

DPIM

DSP

DSU

DTMF

Digital Enhanced Cordless Telecommunications

Digital Phone

Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol

Digital Line Interface

Do Not Disturb

Door Phone Interface Module

Digital Signal Processor

Data Service Unit

Dual Tone Multi Frequency

E

G

E&M Ear&Mouth

Expanded Switch Module ESM

H

GK Gatekeeper

GVRP GARP VLAN Registration Protocol

HDLC

HLR

HTML

HTTP

High level Data Link Control

Home Location Register

Hypertext Markup Language

Hypertext Transfer Protocol

I

ID Identification

IDS Intrusion Detection System

IGMP

IMAP

IN-SCP

Internet Group Management Protocol

Internet Messaging Access Protocol

Intelligent Network Service Control Point



K

L

IPDC

IP-SCP

ISDN

ISUP

M

LCP

LED

LIM

MCP

MDF

MEGACO

MFM

MGC

MGI

MGCP

N

MWSLI

NMS


Internet Protocol Device Control

Internet Protocol Service Control Point

Integrated Services Digital Network

ISDN User Part

Local Control Processor

Light Emitting Diode

LAN Interface Module

Main Control Processor

Main Distribution Frame

Media Gateway Control

Multi Frequency Module

Media Gateway Controller

Media Gateway Interface

Media Gateway Control Protocol

Message Waiting Single Line Interface

Network Management System

III


O

OPX

P

Off Premises Extension

PBA

PCB

PCM

PCMMC

PLL

POP3

PPP

PPPoE

PRS

PSTN

Printed(circuit) Board Assembly

Printed Circuit Board

Pulse Code Modulation

PC-based Man Machine Communication

Phase Locking Loop

Post Office Protocol version 3

Point to Point Protocol

Point to Point Protocol over Ethernet

Polarity Reverse Detection

Public Switched Telephone Network

Q

Q-SIG Q-Signalling

R

Routing Information Protocol

Real-time Transmission Control Protocol

S

RIP

RTCP

SCM

SCP

SDP

SGCP

Switch and Conference Module

Signal Control Processor

Session Description Protocol

Simple Gateway Control Protocol

SIP Session Initiation Protocol

IV



T

SLI

SLT

SMDR

SMTP

SoL

STA

SVMi

TAPI

Single Line Interface

Single Line Telephone

Station Message Detail Recording

Simple Mail Transfer Protocol

Server optimized Linux

Spanning Tree Algorithm

Samsung Voice Mail(integrated)

Telephony Application Programming Interface

U

TEPRI T1E1PRI

TRK Trunk

V

UART

UCD

UDP

USB

VoIP

VPM

Universal Asynchronous Receiver and Transmitter

Uniform Call Distribution

User Datagram Protocol

Universal Serial Bus

Voice over Internet Protocol

Voice Processing Module


V


W

X

WIM

WLI xDSL

WAN Interface Module

Wireless LAN Interface x-Digital Subscriber Line

VI


OfficeServ 7100 Call Server

Programming Guide

©2007 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd.

All rights reserved.

Information in this giude is proprietary to SAMSUNG Electronics

Co., Ltd.

No information contained here may be copied, translated, transcribed or duplicated by any form without the prior written consent of SAMSUNG.

Information in this guide is subject to change without notice.

Samsung 7100 Medical Alarms Programming Guide

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server

Programming Guide

INTRODUCTION

Purpose

Audience

Guide Contents

Conventions

Console Screen Output

Reference Guides

Revision History

SAFETY CONCERNS

Symbols

Warning

WARNING

Caution

CAUTION

TABLE OF CONTENTS

CHAPTER 1. Overview of MMC Programming

1.1 Introduction to Programming

1.2 Digital Phones

1.2.1 DCS Euro Phones

1.2.2 DS/ITP-5000 Series Phones

1.3 Cautions in Programming

1.4

Program List by User’s Level

1.4.1 Station Level Programming

1.4.2 Operator Level Programming

1.5 Programming List by Name

1.6 Program List by Function

1.6.5 LCR Function

1.6.6 Auto Attendant/Voice Mail Function

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming

2.1 Overview of Programming Procedure

2.2 Programming Procedure

[100] STATION LOCK

[101] CHANGE USER PASSCODE

[102] CALL FORWARD

[103] SET ANSWER MODE

[104] STATION NAME

[105] STATION SPEED DIAL

[106] STATION SPEED DIAL NAME

[107] KEY EXTENDER

[108] STATION STATUS

[109] DATE DISPLAY

[110] STATION ON/OFF

[111] PHONE RING TONE

[112] ALARM REMINDER CLOCK

[113] VIEW MEMO NUMBER

[114] PHONE VOLUME

[115] SET PROGRAMMED MESSAGE

[116] ALARM AND MESSAGE

[117] EDIT TEXT MESSAGE

[118] CONFERENCE GROUP

[119] CALLER ID DISPLAY

[120] LARGE LCD OPTIONS

[121] PHONE LANGUAGE

[122] NEWS DISPLAY SPEED

[125] EXECUTIVE STATE

[199] SHOW LICENSE STATUS

[200] OPEN CUSTOMER PROGRAMMING

[201] CHANGE CUSTOMER PASSCODE

[202] CHANGE FEATURE PASSCODE

[203] ASSIGN UA DEVICE

[204] COMMON BELL CONTROL

[205] ASSIGN LOUD BELL

[206] BARGE-IN TYPE

[207] ASSIGN VM/AA PORT

[209] ASSIGN ADD-ON MODULE

[210] CUSTOMER ON/OFF PER TENANT

[211] DOOR RING ASSIGNMENT

[214] DISA ALARM RINGING STATION

[217] TRAFFIC REPORT OPTION

[219] RELAY TYPE

[220] ISDN SERVICE TYPE

[221] EXTENSION TYPE

[222] FAX PAIR

[224] WAKE-UP ANNOUNCEMENT

[300] CUSTOMER ON/OFF PER STATION

[301] ASSIGN STATION COS